Component and Materials Part 3 Januari 1977

Components and
materials
Part 3
January 1977
Radio
~---
Audio
Television
COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS

Part 3
January 1977
FM tuners
Loudspeakers
---
Television tuners and aerial input assemblies
Components for black and white television
Components for colour television
Contents
FOR " FERRITES FOR RADIO, AUDIO AND TELEVISIO~I"

SEE RELEVANT SECTION OF PART 4 a
==
::::::
::::::
::::::
---I
::::::
DATA HANDBOOK SYSTEM
Our Data Handbook System is a comprehensive source of information on electronic cornponents, subassemblies and materials: it is made up . of three series of handbooks each
comprising several parts.
ELECTRON TUBES
SEMICONDUCTORS AND INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS
BLUE
RED
GREEN
The several parts contain all pertinent data available at the time of publication, and each
is revised and reissued periodically.
Where ratings or specifications differ from those published in the preceding edition they
are pointed out by arrows. Where application information is given it is advisory an~ does
not form part of the product specification.
If you need confirmation that the published data about any of our products are the latest
available, please contact our representative. He is at your service and will be glad to
answer yo1:1r inquiries.
Thls information is furni shed for guidanc e , and with no guarantee as to its accuracy or
completeness; its publication conveys no licence under any patent or other right, nor
does the pu blisher assume liabilit y for any consequence of its use: spec ifications and
availab ility of goods mentioned in it are subject to change without notic e: it is not to be
reproduced in any way , in whole or in part without the writcen consent of the publisher.
December 1972
ELECTRON TUBES (BLUE SERIES) '

This series consists of the foll owing parts, i ssued on the dates indicated.
Part 1a
Transmitting tubes for communication

and Tubes for r.f. heating Types PEOS/25- TBW15/125
Part 1b
Transmitting tubes for communication

Tubes for r.f. heating
Amplifier circuit assemblies
Part 2
Microwave produ cts
Communica ti on magnetrons
Magnetrons for microwave heating
Klystrons
Travelling-wave tubes
Part 3
Special Quality tubes;

Miscellaneous devices
Part 4
Receiving tubes
Part Sa
Cathode-ray tubes
Part Sb
Camera tubes; Image intensifier tubes
Part 6
Products for nuclear technology
December 1975
January 1976
May 1976
Diodes
Triodes
T-R Switches
Microwave semiconductor devices
Isolators - circulators
January 1975
March 1975
August 1976
May 1975
January 1977
Channel e lectron multipliers

Geiger-Mueller tubes
Neutron tubes
Part 7
Gas-filled tubes
Voltage st a bilizing and reference tubes

Counter, selector , a nd indicat or tubes
Trigger tubes
Switching diodes
Part 8
TV Picture tubes
Part 9
Photomultiplier tubes
Phototubes (diodes)
August 1976
August 1975
Thyratrons
Ignitrons
Industrial rectifying tubes
High-voltage rectifying tubes
October 1975
June 1976
SEMICONDUCTORS AND INTEGRATED CIRCUITS (RED SERIES}

This series cons ists of the follow ing parts, issued on the dates indicated.
Part 1a
Rectifier diodes
Vo ltage regulator diodes (> 1, 5 W)
Transient suppressor d iodes
Part 1b
Rectifier stac ks
Th yr istors
T r iacs
October 1975
Diodes
Small signal germanium diodes

Sm a ll s ignal silicon diodes
Spec ial diodes
Part 2
March 1976
Rectifier diodes, thyristors, triacs
Voltage r egulat or d iodes (< 1, 5 W)

Voltage refer ence diodes
T un er d iodes
December 1975
Low-frequency t ransistors
.Part 3
High -frequency .and switching transistors
April1976
Part 4a
Special semiconductors
_June
Transmitting tran s istors

Microwave devices
F iel d - effect trans istors
Part 4b
Part Sa
Dual tran sistor s

Microminiature dev ices for
thick - and thin -film c ir cuits
Devices for optoelectronics
Photosen sitive diodes and tran sistors

Light emitting diodes
Dis plays
1~76
July 1976
Phot ocouple rs
Infrar ed s ensitive devices
Photoconductive devices
Professional analogue integrated circuits
November 1976
N. B. Cons umer circuits will be issued in par t 5b

Part 6
Digital integrated ci rcuits
May 1976
LOCMOS HE fa mily
GZ fam ily
l\l nuco rn h.coT" 10 7{..
COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS (GREEN SERIES)

This series cons ists of the following parts , issued on the dates indicated .
Part 1
Functional units, Input/output devices,

Peripheral devices
High noise immunity logic FZ / 30-Series
Circuit blocks 40 -Series and CSA 70
Counter modules 50 -Series
NORbits 60 -Series, 61-Series
Part 2a
Part 5
Electric motors and accessories
Circuit blocks
C ircuit blocks lOO kHz-Ser ies
Circuit blocks 1-Series
Part 8
October 1976
Ferroxcube potcores and square cores
Ferroxcube transformer cores
Ferrite core memory products
Small synchronous motors

Stepper motors
Part 7
January 1977
Components for black an d white
television
Compon'ents for colour television
Piezoelectric ceramics, Permanent magnet materials
Ferroxcube memory cores

Matr ix planes and stacks
Part 6
Ceramic capac itors

Var iable capac itors
Soft ferrites
Ferrites for radio, audio an d television
Beads and chokes
Part 4b
April1976
Radio, Aullio, Television

FM tuners
Loui::lspeakers
Television tuners and aer ial input
assemblies
Part 4a
February 1976
Negative temperature coefficient
thermistors (l\lTC)
Pos itive temperature coefficient
thermis tors (PTC)
Test switches
Capacitors
Electrolytic and solid capacitors
Paper capacitors and film capac itors
Part 3

Input/output devices
Hybrid integrated circu its
Peripheral devices
Resistors
F ixed resistors
Variable resistors
Voltage dependent resistors (VDR)
Light dependent res istors (LDR)
Par't 2b
November 1975
Variable mains transformers
Part 9
Piezoelectric quartz devices
Part 1 0
Connectors
December 1976
July 1975
Core memory systems

Septembe: 1975
Miniature direct current moto:s
September 1971
C ircuit blocks for ferr ite core
memory drive
July 1975
March 1976
November 197t;
---F.M.
tuners
AP2157 /01
3122 U7 152:10
11
F.M. TUNER
with diode tuning
QUICK REFERENCE DATA
--------------------~
Supply
volte~ge
(d. c.)
15 V
Frequency ran ge
87 .5- JO R lVIHz
Interme di a te frequ e nc y
10 . 7 MH z
APPLICATION
This tun e r is inte nded for use in hi-fi radio sets .
The required range can be obtained by limiting the tuning voltage .
Th e tun e r s are prrl\/ide d with a fou r- fold i . f. c ircuit .
N r>vcmher 19 76
A.1
AP2157/01
.1 122 137 152 30
F.M. TUN ER
11
MECHANICAL DATA
-
Dimehsions in mm
- - - - - - - 87,5max - - - - - - - i.f. injection

point
M2,5
15
~0. 02
L11.4
0,2
--
~
+ ~"---++---,.,JJ - t
0212xl
,___j,1
12.5
_,4.83 --.
. oo
olo
rear view
o
Fig.l
Note: The left a nd right sides are ide ntical.

Mounting
The tun e r can be mounted in any position.
Marking
Th e tuner is mar ked w ith the 12-digit cata logue number and the production code.
A4
Novembe r l 976
3122 137 152 30
AP2157/0l
F.M . TUNER
11
ELECTRICAL DATA.
Unless otherwise specified all electrical values apply at an ambient temperature of
25 5 C, a relative humidity of 60 15% and a supply voltage of 15 I V.
Sem iconductors
r . f. amplifier
mixer
oscillator
tuning diodes
BF324
BF324
BF324
!31311013 (2x), BBllOG
Ambient temperature range

operating
storage
0 to +55 <>c
- 20 to +70 C
Supply voltage (d. c.)
+15 1 V
Current drawn from+ 15V supply
8, 75 0, 5 mA
Tuning voltage range
+3 to +27 V
Frequency range
87,5 to 108 MHz
voltage
(V d . c.)
frequency
(MHz)
voltage
(V d. c.)
frequency
(MHz)
3,00
3,30
4,00
4,80
5,80
8,95
8,35
87
88
90
92
94
96
98
10 ,05
12 . 10
14,65
17,HO
2 1, 80
27,00
102
104
106
!OH
110
300 kHz
lOO
I
I
300kH z
Intermediate frequency
10,7 MHz
The oscillator fJ:equency is higher
than the signal frequency
I. F. ban dw icith ( 3 dB)
180 kHz
typ. 27 dB
300
Input impedance. asymmetr ica l
75
Output impedance
.100
Padding deviat ion
~.350kHz
Power gain
typ. 20 dB
Noise figure
typ. 6, 5 dB
I. F . su ppress ion
Ima ge rejection
~SO
November 1976
~).
80 dB
dB
~ -~~-~~ __________,As
---
AP2157 /01
3122 ].)7 15230
F . M. TUNER
11
Repeat spot suppression (RSS) 1)
i!
Double beat suppression (DBS) 2)
i!
75 dB
Cont in uous heat suppression (CBS) :l)
2!
60 dll
Shift of oscillator frequency

at a change of the supply voltage
from 15 to 12 V
:s
lOO kf-I z
75 dB
at a change of the amb ient temperature

from 0 to +SS oc
:s 5 kH z;oc; typ. 2.5 kH z/C
after resistance to moistur e tes t

(IE C 6 8- 2-.30. tes t Db . 21 da ys . 40 oc ;
recover y time 1 h)
:s 1250 kH z ; typ. 600kHz
R e duct i(m of powe r gain at a change of the

supply voltage from 15 to 12 V
Oscillator radiation and os cillator
terminal voltage
:3. 5 dB
according to C .1. S . P. R. r ec omm e ndation no. 24 /:l : meas ured according

ro I . E . C . 106.
1 ) Supprc;;si on of a s igmll arising by conversion of harmonics of the osci ll ator sigmll and
those o f a strong aerial signa l. Reference vo lt age: lOfJV (aerial e. m. f.): aerial
impedance: 75 ~>. .
2
) Suppression of a signa l arising from t wo s tro ng aerial signals. Reference voltage :
lO f.! V (aerial e. m. f.): aerial impedance : 75 Q.
3
) Suppression of a signal arising from the harmonic o f t wo strong aeri<~l signa l s with a
frequency difference equal to the inte rmediate frequency.
A6
lovcmhcr 1976
3122 137 152.30
F . M. TU l ER
AP2157 /01
--
"'
I l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
- - q-- - - - - - - J
"-----~~___J
November 1976
AP2157 /01
F.M. TUNER
122 1.17 15230
11
ADDITIONAL INFOR MATION
Ali!,'lling of the i. f . circuit
The tuner is fu lly h.f. and i. f. aligned in the factory.

However. if nn ad~ptation to the receiver i s necessary . aligning should be done in tl1e
following way .
l. Adjust the tuning volwgc to +S,:l5 V.

2. Apply a genetator s ign ~ I ( :OS 100 mV, 10,7 MJ-Iz 2kH z) to th e i. f. injection point
(Fig . 1) via rhe circuit shown in Fig ..3 .
---
r\
I. F.
GENERATOR
R; =son
~son
':"~
i.f.
inj ect ion
point
7Z74429
Fig . :l
\
:!. Adjust the i. f. coils in SCC]uencc I to -l (Fig. -lj to ma x imum output.
-J
0
0
L ~ Hf~~~~~~-I- ~ I16 15 14
10
I- f-H----If---'1
6
1
7Z741..27
rear view
Fig. -I
-1. Applv a generator signal (lOO m V, 10. 7 Mllz 500 kHz) to the i . f. inject ion point [or
checking the i. f. bandwidth; top of the curve a t 10.7 MHz 5 kH z .
Check the i. f. bandwidth 0 dfl) and S 300: th e ir val ues m ust be as specifie d i n
"Ele ct ric a l Data".
A8
Nnv~mh"' 1-'l :l n- - '
3122 137 152 30
AP2157 /Ol
F . M. TUNER
11
Measurement of power ga in
0
0
L_r16 15
0
0
oo
0
0
Vo
-+
(i.f) '
==
r-r-_j
r- r- r10
--
00
0
0
14
+-
7Z68768 . 2
WR;7Sfl
E aerial
Fig. 5
The r.f. input signal: 51 mV (r.m.s.)
h
.
i. f. vo ltage across R (= .390 Q)
T e gam = 20 1og
aer ial e. m . f.
November 1976
AY _ _ __
AP2158
.} 122 1.17 15410
11
F.M. TUNER
with diode tuning
Supply vo ltage (d . c.)
1S V
Frequ ency range
87,5 -lO SMI-lz
Inte rme diate fr equ ency
10, 7. MI-l z
APPLICATION
This tuner is intended for use in hi -fi ra d io sets.

Th e r equired r:.mge can be obt<J in e d by limit-ing the tuning volta ge .
Th e tun e r ha s been provid ed with a two -fold i. f. circuit.
ovc mbe r 1976
1 ~-~11 _
All
AP2158
3122 137 15410
F.M. TUNER
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
,..,__ _ _ _ _ _ _ 87,5 max
- - - - - - - --+
i.f. injection
point
15
0,02
M2,5
L11.4
0,2
-~-<>--++-~ - t
I
02 2x
1. -
front view
I___j
12,5
0,1
._14+g.3 _..
50,1
.
oo
q
olo
o
7Z &8769.2
rear view
Fig . 1
Note: The left and right sides are identical.

Mounting
The tuner can be mounted in any position.
Marking .
The tuner is marked with the 12-digit catalogue number and the production code.
A12
November 1976
3122 137 15410
I.
AP2158
F.M. TUNER
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
Unless otherwise specified all electrical values apply at art ambient temperature of '
25 5 oc, a relat ive humidity of 60 15% and a supply voltage of 15 1 V .
Semiconductors
r . f. amplifier
mixer
oscillator
tuning diodes
BBllOB (2x), BBllOG
A mbient temperature range

operating
storage
0 to +55 C
- 20 to +70 oc
BF324
BF.'324
BF324
'
Supply voltage (d.c . )
+ 15 1 V
Current drawn from + 15 V supply
typ. 8, 75 0, 5 mA
+.3 to +27 V
Frequency range
87,5 to 108 MHz
voltage
(V d. c.)
frequency
(MHz)
3,00
3, .30
4,00
4. 80
87
88
90
92
94
96
98
~.so
6,95
8,35
voltage
' '
(V d. c . )
frequency
(MHz)
10,05
12, 10
14 .65
17,80
21,80
27,00
102
104
106
108
11 0
'
30QkH,
lOO
f <300 '"'
10,7 MHz
The oscillator frequency is higher
I. F. bandwidth (3 dB)
220kHz
s .'300
typ. 16 dB
Input impedance, asymmetrical
75
Output impedance
.300 Q
Padding deviation
s .350kHz
Power gain
typ . 30 ell
Noise figure
typ. 6, 5 dB
I. F. suppress ion
Image rejection
~50
80 dB
dB
'
November 1976
~-~~11 _
AP2158
3122 137 154 10
F.M. TUNER
11
R e peat spot suppress ion (RSS) l)
<: 75 dB
Double heat su ppress ion (DBS) 2)
<: 75 dB
Conti nuous bea t suppress ion (CBS) :l)
;:: 60 dll
Shift o f oscillutor frequency

at a change of t he supply voltagl:
from 15 to 12 V
$ lOO kHz
at a cha nge of the ambil:nt temperature

from 0 to +55 C
$5 kll z/OC ; t yp. 2,5 kH z/C
ufter res ista ncl: to moi sture test

(IEC6S-2-:HJ, test Oh. 21 da ys, 40 oc;
rec overy time l h)
1250 kllz; typ . 600 kHz
:l, 5 dll
Reduction of power gilin at n change of till:

supply vollugc from Vi t o 12 V
Oscillator radiiltion a nd oscillator
terminal voltagl:
accordin g to C.I.S . P.R.recommen dation no. 24j:l; me<lsu r e d accordi ng

to l.E . C . 106.
1
) Suppress ion of a s ign al a ri s ing by convers ion of ha rmon ics ~f the osc illa tor s ign al a nd
those of a stron g ne ri a l s igna l. Reference volt age : 10 ]-IV (aeri a l e . m. f.): aerial
impe dance : 75 Q .
2 ) Sup~ression of a signa l a risi ng from two str ong ae rial signals. Reference voltage :
10]-IV (ae rial e.m . f.}: ae rial impe da nce: 75Q.
:3) Suppression of a s ig11 nl ar is in g from the harmonic of two stron g aer ia l s ignals with a
fr eque nc y differenc e equa l to t he inte rm ed iate fr e qu e ncy.
A 14
No ve m ber 1976 . -
,-
- - - -.- ---1-r!
I
I
I
I
AP2158
F . M . TUNER
3122 137 15410
~~
11
11
~I
<0
I
I
I
I
I
"- +
-
I
I
I
I
I
Fo~
"'0..
I
I
I
I.
I '-
I
I
]
>
.:t..
"' -+
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
__ T ______ j
1opao
November 1976
------
! I
..!..
A15
AP2158
3122 137 15410
F.M . TUNER
I
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Aligning of the i. f . circuit
The tuner is fully h.f. and i.f. aligned in the factory.
However. if an adaptation to the receiver is necessary. aligning s hould be done in the
following way.
1. Adjust the tuning voltage to+ 8, .15 V.
2. Apply a gen erator sign:.~ I (!0 lOO mV, 10.7 MHz 2 kHz) to the i. f. inj e ction point
(Fig . 1) via the circuit shown in Fig ..3.
----
SnF
a---
I. F.
GENERATOR
R;
2son
=son
i.f.
injection
point
7Z74419
Fig . .1
.1 . Adjust the i . f. coils in sequence 1 to 2 (Fig. 4) to maximum output.
I
0
0
Lr16 15 14
0
o
d
do
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
~8
r-r-U
6
1
7274428
rear view
Fig . 4
4. Apply a generator s ignal (lOO m V, 10, 7 MHz 500 kH z) to the i . f. injection po int for
checking the i. f. bandwidth; top of the curve at 10. 7 MHz 5 kHz.
Check the i. f. bandwidth (8 dl1) and S .100: their va lu es must be as specified in
.. Electrical Data".
'
A 16
November 1976
3 122 137 15410
AP2158
F . M . T UN ER
11
Measuring the power gain
0
Ll-
0
0
g'
>
+
>-
l l
>
I
>
+
1-_j
10
>-
0
0
16 15 14
0 0
0
0
0
QQ
~
+-
Vo -+
(i .f.)
717358?.1
Fig.5
The r.f. input signal: :!0 1 mV (r.m.s.)
Tl1
i . f. vo ltage across R (= 820 Q )

e gam = 20 1og
aerial e. m . f .
November 1976
~ ~~-........___L 1 _
A17 _ _ ___.
4312 020 80020
FDl
4312 020 80030
FDlA
11
F.M. TUNERS
with diode tuning
F , M. tuners for European and Ame rican ba nd
Tuner FD 1 without a. f. c,
Tuner FD lA with a. f. c.
Supply voltage (d. c . )
12 V
Frequency range
87,5 to 108 MHz
GENERAL
These tuners are intended for use in hi -fi radio sets, The advantage of these tuners is
the excellent big signal handling.
The wanted range can be obtained by limiting the tuning voltage.
The tuners are equipped with silicon transistors and silicon variable capacitance diodes.
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
_
_ _ _ 53 ,5 _ _ ___
52,5
oj
slot for
50,1 _ _____,
polarizing
49 ,8
1,5 X 9,6
,~!'~::.: ~ +
j__ 16 .......
:!:0,2
7Z73HIO
Fig.1
The tuner can be. fixed in a connector or soldered directly to a printed-wiring board.
May 1975
----
FDl
FDlA
F.M. TUNERS
4312 020 80020
with diode tuning
4312 02 0 80030
ELECTRICAL DATA
Semiconductors
2X
1X
4x
1x
Ambient temperature range, operating

storage
BF324
BF451
BB104
BB106 (only for FDlA)
0 to +50 C
-20 to +60 C
+ 12 1 V
Supply voltage
Current drawn from + 12 V supply
9mA
Tuning voltage range (Fig. 2)
+3,8to+28V
Frequency range
87,5 to 108 MHz
10,7 MHz
I. F. bandwidth
270kHz
Input impedance, asymmetrical

symmetrical
60Q
240 Q
Output impedance for critical coupling
470
Gain at 98 MHz
min. 27 dB (typ. 30 dB)
Noise figure at 98 MHz
max. 7, 5 dB (typ. 6 dB)
Reflection factor at 98 MHz
0,35
I. F. suppression at 98 MHz
Image rejection at 98 MHz
Repeat spot suppression (RSS, Fig. 3)
1)
Double beat. suppression (DBS, Fig. 3)
2)
Continuous beat suppression (CBS, Fig. 4) 3)
62 dB
Minimum input signal (e . m. f.") at a

sl;lift of the oscillator frequency
of max . 20 kHz
1V
.Shift of the oscillator frequency at a

change of the supply voltage of 1 V
max. 30kHz
1) Suppression of a signal arising by conversion of harmonics of the oscillator signal and

those of a strong aerial signal.
2) Suppression of a signal arising from two strong aerial signals.
3) Suppression of a signal ar ising from the harmonic of two strong aerial signals with a
frequency difference equal to the intermediate fTequency.
FDl
F.M. TUNERS
4312 020 80020

4312 020 80030
FDlA
with diode tuning
Temperature coefficient of the oscillator
see Fig. 5
Oscillator radiation
according to VDE 0872.7

and 0872.8
A. F. C. sensitivity (only for FD lA)
see Figs. 6 and 7
Graphs
'
30
--
7Z73177
FD1/FD1A
tuning
voltage
(V)
20
~~
10
::::l
Jl
-~
~~
-" ~ ~
~~ ~
0
85
90
95
100
110
105
frequency (MHzl
Fig. 2. Tuning voltage as a func tion of signal frequency.
'
..
May 1975
.11
A '>1
FDl
FDlA
F.M. TUNERS
4312 020 80020
with diode tuning
43 12 020 80030
?Z73 178
FD1/FD1A
s,
52
RSS
and
DBS
(dB)
50
DB 53
RSS1 DB 5 2
DBS,T RSS2
100
85
90
95
. c
100
110
105
frequency ( MHz)
Fig. 3. Location of transmitter frequenc ies, repeat spots and double beats. Reference
signals s and S2: 10 !JV .
1
7Z73179
FD1/FD1A
;,
CBS
(dB)
50
c:'Bs
100
85
90
95
100
~~
105
110
frequency (M Hz)
Fig. 4. Location of transmitter frequencies and measuring frequency for measuring the
continuous beat suppression (CBS).
A22
4312 020 80020
F.M. TUNERS
4312 020 80030
with diode tuning
FDl
FDlA
oscillator
temp. coeff.
{ kHz /C) '
1--+-+--t-t-t--1--11-t-t-t-+-+-+-++++-+~;>:>.:
~+-+-+-+-~++-r-+-+-+-+~-1~~
90
110
105
frequency {M Hz)
100
95
Fig. 5. Oscillator temperature coefficient as a function of signal frequency, measured in

the temperature range 15 to 25 oc
d etu ni ng
1kHz)
1-t--t-+--t-++++-+--+-+--+-t--1--1-1-t-t-t--l--t--b++--t
90
95
100
110
105
frequency IMHz)
Fig. 6. Detuning as a function of signal frequency at a control vo ltage change from 0 to

+400 mV.
May 1975
. A2.'l
FDl
FDlA
detun i ng
(kHz)
F. M. TUI\lERS
4312 020 80020
with diode tuning
4312 020 80030
1-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-H
frequency IMHz)
Fig. 7. Detuning as a function of signal frequency at a control voltage change from 0 to

- 400 mV.
A24
11
_ _ _ II
,_. """
,_.
"""
"'""
"->
N
L9
'<
,_.
MP1
"->
"'
"'
-...]
:3
00
0
0
0
0
RJ
I IR4
I
I
I
I
I
I
:;:.....
'Tl
R9
I BB104G
L2
"->
00
,-
i.f.
C10
C15I
I IR6
p-
RB
+
C22J;
_ _ _ _ _ _ _L
v Vtuning
&
0.. ;s:
8:~
(D
c::
. ~
s :::<'
oq en
'1'~2~
I
R13
! JC21
I
FD1
a.f.c .
C25
+--I --+---{="1-~
FD1A
., ..,
..,
"
--
)>
cc
Fig. 8
)>
LIJJJJ.I
11- - -
loudspeakers
' '
Survey
Introduction
Data sheets
page B2
page BS
page Bl7
LOUDSPEAKERS
GE ERAL
11
SURVEY
The lJutl~peaker~ are listed in order o r their <.:<Jtalogue number. Conversion of catalogue
number to type number is g iven in th e list on page B I.J.
HIGH POWER(;;> I 0 watt) to DIN45500 requirements for hi-fi loudspeakers
~ize
cone
di,tml'ter
(inches)
overall
diameter
(mm)
shcqw
flf
fhmge
l).j
:il
round
l'O uncl
round
ro und
;;;)
squt.l re
-1 /K/ 15
.=, ~
-1 /H
-1 /H
-1 /H
-1 /H
166
round
squan:
octagotwl
octagonal
octagonal
0Cl<.lg"fli1;J I
.~
20S
ncUJ gon;_J]
s
s
20 .~
octagon ell
octagonal
t).j
J:).j
.~~~
129
129
](l(J
10
20:i
. 20.~
2SLJ
](]
2(11
12
12
;) ];)
;) ] .~
OCli.lg"Oil t.l i
round
l'ottnd
round
1'0\llld
impedance
mnximum
VCI~Si<ll1
powe 1
.J ji\
H/15
-1/H
-1 /K/ 1.5
.j
-1 /ii
-1 /:-1
-1 /H
.j
-1 /K
-1 /H
-1 /H
-1 /K
-1 /H
bus ic part
()f
(\V)
type number
20 / .JO
20/SO
.10
20/ -10
20/ .JO
10
JO
.JO
10
.JO
ADO I.JO(l- .
AD0162/T .
AD02 I OjSq.
AD2090/T .
AD2290/T.
AD2071/T .
AD227 1/T.
ADSO!JO/Sq.
AD :i061 fS(I
AD/066/MFB
AD7066/W.
ADH06 1/W.
ADH066/W.
ADH067 / Ml'13
ADH067/W.
ADI065/W.
ADIO IOO/W.
ADI265/W.
AD I 2 100 / W .
:l :>
:l()
.JO
:iO
.JO
:>o
-Hl
;l()
.JO
page
Ill/
1!21
132\l
B.J:l
B.J:l
B:l7
frl 7
fll l /
fll2.)
B ll:l
ll179
ll201
ll20.S
ll209
ll215
l l2:l.~
ll2:ll)
B2.J7
B2SLJ
HIGH POWER (;;> 10 wa tt) : FULL R ANGE
~~
Ill
12
12
12
I
ll2
12\l
166
166
166
2 17
261
:l iS
:n5
:liS
ocwgonal
()<.:tagonal
>t:tagonal
()t:fctgonul
round
round
ro und
round
l'OUncf
-1 /H
-1 /H
10
' ;l[)
-1 /H
-1 /H
;JO
10/20
10
-1 /H/ 15
.J j :l j l.)
-1/H
-1 /H/ I.S
~11._~
I()
20
so
2:i
ADS06 1/ M.
AD7060/W'.
t\07062/M .
AD706:ljM.
9710/MC
i\01065/M.
AD !265/M .
AD 12 I 00 / IIP.
AD 12100 / M.
__
.11
812 I
Bioi
lll6.~
13169
ll227
ll2:3 1
B2.J:l
ll2S I
8255
LOUDSPEAKERS
SURVEY
GENERAL
11
MEDIUM POWER (approx.2-10 watt) double cone
si ze
cone
overall
diameter
diameter
(inches)
(mm)
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
5
X
X
7
7
9
7
7
8
102 X 154
102 X 154
129
13.) X 18.'3
1.1 .'3 X 183
161 X 2.'3 4
166
166
206
shape
of
flange
impe dance
version
ma ximum
power
(Q )
(W)
ova l
oval
round
oval
oval
oval
octagonal
octagonal
octagona l
4 /8/25
4 /8/ 15 / 25 /800
4 /8/ 15/ 25
4 /8/ 15/ 25
-1 /8
4 /8
4/8
4/8/800
4 /8
6
4
6
6
4
6
6
3
8
basic part
page
of
type number
AD46 81/ M .
AD4691 / M .
AD50 81/ M.
AD57 80/M.
AD5790/M .
AD69 80/M.
AD 70 80/M.
AD7091/M.
AD 80 81/ M.
13 89
13 10 1
13 129
ll ].)7
13 145
1315.'3
Ill R.3
1319 1
13219
--:
~
MEDIUM POWER (approx:2-10 watt)
3
3
3
X
X
5
8
8
4
4
4
4
4
4X 6
4x6
4 X 6
4 X 6
4X 8
5
5 X 7
5X 7
6 X 9
7
7
8
Octobe r 1976
76 x 1.31
82 X 205
82 X 205
105
105
105
105
105
102 X 15-1
95 X 155
102 X 154
95 X 155
96x2 10 '
129
133 X 1S:l
133 X 183
161 X 234
166
166
206
oval
oval
oval
round
squa r e
round
squ a r e
square
ova l
oval
ova l
oval
oval
r ound
oval
oval
oval
octagonal
octa gonal
octagona l
4 /8/ 15/25/ 50 / 400

4 /8/ 15
-1 /8/ 15/ 25 / 70 /800
4 /8/15 / 25
4/8/ 15
4 /8
4/8
4
-1 /8/ 15/ 25
4/8/ 15/ 25
4 /8/ 15/ 25
4 /8/ 15/ 25
4 /8/ 15 / 25
4/8/15/ 25
4 /8/ 15/ 25
4 /8
4 /8
4/ 8
4 /8/800
4 /8
3
4
4
.'3
3
3
3
8
6
6
4
4
8
6
6
4
6
6
.3
8
AD.3590/X.
AD3 880/ X.
AD.3 890/X .
AD40 80/X .
AD44 80/ X .
AD40 85/X.
AD44 85/X .
AD44 81/X .
AD46 81/X .
AD46 82/X.
A.D469 1/X.
AD4692/X .
AD4 890/ X.
AD50 81/ X .
AD5 780/X.
AD5790 / X.
AD69 80/ X.
AD70 80/X.
AD 709 1/X .
AD 8081/ X .
1357
1361
1365
13 73
1373
1377
1377
13 85
1393
139 7
13 105
13 109
13 113
B1.1.3
13141
13 149
131!)7
131 87
13195
1322 .3
1 1.~-~~J I _r,n-J
LOUDSPEAKERS
SURVEY
GENERAL
11
Lo'WER POWER (.;; 2 watt)

size
cone
overall
diameter
d iameter
(in ches)
(mm)
l~
,)1
2
2~
.3
:3
4
4
4
50
64
81
81
105
105
105
s hape
of
flange
impedance
version
maximum
power
(2)
(W)
round
round
round
r ound
square
r ound
squa r e
round
25
25
4/8/ 15/2 5
4/8/ 15/25
4/ll/25 / 150
4/8/ 15/25
4/8/ 15/25
8/ 15
0,2
0,3
0,5
1
1
1
1
2/0,6
bas ic part
of
type nu mber
AD 0199/Z.
AD2099/Z.
AD2070/Z .
AD3070/Y .
AD3370/Y.
AD4070/Y .
AD 4470/Y .
AD4090/ X.
page
1325
1349
B3.3
BS.1
1353
1369
1369
B8 l
PASSIVE RADIATOR
8
205
octagona l
IAD8000
13199
basic part of
type number
page
ADF 1600/.
. ADI'2 -1 00/.
ADF500/4500 / .
1326S
13267
13269
CROSS-OVER NETWORKS
dimens ions
Jxwx h
(mm)
cross-over
fr equency
(Hz)
l OO
1600/ 1800
2400
500 / 4500
70
45
lOOx 70 x 45
105
70
-15
impeda n ce
version
maximum
power
(Q)
(W)
4/8
20
20
40
4 /8
4/H
RECOMMENDED LOUDSPEAKER COMBINATIONS

Tab le of Joudt;peaker c om bi nations see page 13272.
ll
LOUDSPEAKERS
GENERAL
11
INTRODUCTION
CHOICE OF TYPE
A correctly chosen loudspeaker is essential to obtain adequate acoustic results from

electro-acoustic equipment.
The follo win g fact ors should be considered whe11 c hoos in g a loudspeaker:
-Shape, size and attac hment with reference i:o the ava ilable space;
-Qua lity a nd sen s itivity, a compromise between fidelity of reproduction and price;
- The fr e qu enc y response character is tic in relation to the kind of application; ,
- Imp edanc e and power handling capac it y, wh ich shou ld be adapted to the output stage of
the equipment ;
- Appearance an d finish.
To ass is t customers In making their choice, our l oudspeakers have been di vided in to
three main groups :
- High power
(2: 10 watt) : (hi-fi/full ra nge)
- Medium power (2- 10 watt)

- Low power
(S 2 watt)
The high power series comprises t op-qu a lit y woofers, squawkers a nd tweeters intended
for use in specia l combinat ion s with appropriate filters and enclosures . Their excell ent
s ound r epr oduqion conforms in every respect to the high fid e lity standard s IEC 268 and
DTN45 500. The system power handlin g capacity is from 10 W to 250 W - the latter for
theatres a nd out-do or applicati on s. Full ra nge high power l oudspeakers are also
available. These speakers also conform to IE C 268 and DTN45500 but have been designed
to meet so mew hat less stringent requirements. They are specia ll y for juke boxes,
musical instr ument s . monitoring and public address systems.
The med ium power series (2 W to 10 W) may be subdivided according to t he applicat ion
into round a nd oval versions, usually for radio , audio and telev is ion . Loudspeakers
having a Ticonal magnet system - which keeps stray magnetic fields low - are pa rticularly recommended .for te levis ion .
The low power t ypes (< 2 W) are mainl y used in small radios, intercoms and portab le
te levis ion.
October 1976
--c:::::
--- -
LOUDSPEAKERS
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
TYPE NUMBER SYSTEM

ADxxxxxjxx
Nominal con e s ize (in inches) and

shape of flange
00 = 3/4
0 1 = 1 to JJ.
02 =2
10= 10
12 = 12
20 =2 to 2
22 =2 to 2
.)0 = 3
33 =.3
35 = 3 X 5
38 =3 X 8
40 = 4
44 =4
46 =..J X 6
50 = 5
57 =5 X 7
69 =6 X 9
70 = 7
80 = 8
~-.- L
Rated imp edan ce (in Q )

Version
dome
dome (round)
dome
round
round
round
s quare
round
s quar e
oval
oval
round
sq ua r e
o va l
octagona l
oval
oval
octagona l
octagonal
=Notably higher sens it ivit y

ar ound a respon se pea k at
about 3 kHz
=N otabl y higher response

level in the reg ion 2 to 6 kl-Iz
= Sa me as Y , but a wider
fr equenc y range
= Smooth response over wide

frequency r a tlge
= Woofer; extremely low r es on anc e freq uency
= T weet e r; high freq uency

ra nge
Sq
= Squa wke r ; for mid-range

frequencies
HP
=High power -handling capacity
MFB = Motional feedback

Magnet syste m
10 = Ferroxdure, 102 m m c/J
= Ferroxdure, 60 mm c/J
=Ferroxdure, 72 mm c/J
40
60/6 1/62/6.1
65 / 66 / 67
70 / 71
80 /8 1/82
85
90 /9 1/92
99
100
= Ferr oxdure,
90 mm c/J
30 mm c/J
53 mm c/J
= Ferroxdure.
46 mm c/J
= Sinterpol, Ticonal , 18 mm
=Sinterpot, Ticon al ' 10 mm
= Ferroxdure. 130 mm c/J
= Ferroxdure,
= Ferroxdure,
Example: AD0 162/T8 = 1 -inch dome . 72 mm
86
c/J
c/J
c/J
F e rroxdurc magn e t , tweeter, 8 Q
_H~' ~-~JI
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
LOUDSPEAKERS
RESPONSE CURVES
For the medium and l ow power ra nge a curve of <~n unmounted loudspeaker. showing the
sound pressure-as a function of t.he frequency is given in the data sheets .
For the high power range curves are given of a l oudspeaker mounted on an IEC baffle
or mounted in an enclosure and, for the squawker. and tweeters. a directional response
curve is also g iven.
TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

"Unmounted": The loudspeaker is placed in a clamping set-up which does not influ enc e
its rad iation characteristics.
"Mounted in encl osure": The l oudspeaker with the gas ket outs ide the enclosure of dimensions specified on the data sheet (flush mounted or front mount ed as specified) .
"Ba ffle": The loud speaker is fitted to a baffle or dim en sion s specified on the data sheet
(flush mounte d or front mounted) .
"Half free field": The acousticai conditions on the forward side appr oach thbse of free
space .
"An ech oic room : The acoustical conditions approach those of free space.
(IE C Publication 268, Pa rt 5. Section 1).
"Oper<~ting power": Is the sine-wave power input to t he loudspeaker wh ich corresponds
w ith a sound level of 96 dl3 with respect to 2 x w - 4 phar at a microphone distance of 1 m.
This sound leve l is the average level over the r<~ted frequency range of the loudspeaker.
October 1976
LOUDSPEAKERS
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
1
TEST METHODS AND MEASUREMENTS
The atmospheric conditions for m easure ment are:
Temperature
:
15 t o
35 oc
Relat ive humidity:
-15 to
75%
Pressure
: 860 to 1060 mbar
1
Impedance
Tl!e impedanc e is the modulus of the l owest va lu e of the electrica l impedance in the
freque nc y range above the bass resonance frequency of the loudspeaker as determined
by the method specified in para. :J below.
l. I Measuring apparatus
- Audio-frequency s in e -wave genera tor with a constant output voltage over the
range 0 to 20000 Hz.
- Linear a mplifier w ith a n output impedance not grea ter than 1/.'3 of the rated louds peake r imp edan ce and a power output of approx . 0,1 x the power-handling capacity
of the I oudspea ker.
-A 1 Q resis tor c onnected in ser ies with the loudspeaker.
- An electroni c voltmeter shunted across the 1 ~2 re,sistor .
l. 2 Condition s
- Th e loudspeake r is unmoun ted.

-The power input to th e loud s peake r will not exceed 0.1 x the power-handlingcapaci~ y as determined in para. -1 below.
l. 3 Me<tsuring.result
R<tted impedanc e is stated on the data sheets . The measured impedan ce will not be
lower tha n 20% of the rated impedance .
Voice coil resistance
Th e voice coil r es is tanc e is th e (d. c.) r es ista nc e of the voice coil.

2 .1 Measuring,lpparatus
Low current d. c. ohmmeter.
2 . 2 C ondition s
The d. c. power input to the l oudspeaker does not exceed 0, I x the power -handlin g
capacity.
2 . .'3 Measuring result
The r a ted resistance is g iv en on the data sheets, tolerance 10%.
Octobe
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
[\LOUDSPEAKERS
11
3.
Resonance frequency
The resonance frequency is that frequency where the modulus of the electrical impedance has its first principal maximum in an ascending scale , the electrical input
being such as to have no significant effect on the resonant frequency.
3. l Measuring apparatus
Same as for "Impedance". See para . l.

3. 2 Conditions
- The loudspeaker is measured unmounted.
- The resonance frequency is determined after applying to the loudspeaker for a
duration of 5 s a test signal equal to that required to test the power handling capacity.
3 . 3 Measuring result
=
3
The re sonance frequency is that frequency at which the voltmeter indicates the first
minimum deflection as the frequency is swept slowly from 0 Hz, the output voltage
of the amplifier being such that the voltmeter reads for the resonance fr .e quency:
40 to 60 mV for loudspeakers with a rated impedance
less than 20 Q;
15 to 25 mV for loudspeakers with a rated impedance
between 20 Q and lOO Q;
4 to
6 mV for loudspeakers with a rated impedance

greater than lOO Q.
The rated resonance frequency is stated on the data sheets.

4
Power handling capacity

The power handling capacity is the nominal power which the loudspeaker will
factorily handle as checked by an accelerated life test.
sat~s
4. l Test apparatus
- Generator supplying test signal in accordance with IEC268, para. 9. 3.
- Power amplifier with an output impedance not greater than 1/3 of the rated impedance of the l oudspeaker.
-Voltmeter indicating the r. m. s. value of the voltage.
October 1974
9- - - - - - - '
--
LOUDSPEAKERS
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
11
4 . 2 Conditions
- A test voltage is applied to the loudspeaker for an W1interr upted period of 100 hrs .
The r . m . s . value of this voltage correspond s with the specified power handling
capacity of the loudspeaker .
- The test voltage has a frequency distribution corresponding with that of the output
of a filter as speci~d in IEC Publication 268 , part 5 para . 9 . 3 when fed from a
white noise sourc e .
-If the loudspeaker is designed to operate in a restricted frequency range, the cor responding ne twork ( filter) which is cormected to the loud s peaker during the test,
i s specified on the data s heet . The test voltage i s measured at the input terminals
of the network.
- The method of rnoW1ting i s as specified on the data sheet.

4. 3 Test res ult
To pass this test the loudspeaker ha s to fW1ction properly at the end of the test period .
Deviation from the specified resonance frequency i s allowed .
5
Total non-linear distortion

This i s the ratio between the r . rn . s . value of the harmonic content of the sow1d pres sure to the value of the total sound pressure over th e frequency range of the loudspeaket.
The differe nc e in dB between fundament a l s a nd ha rmonic contents, c a n be converted
into a distortion perce nt age with the a id of following nomogram.
7Z72191
100
Ojo
......
so
......
......
...... ~
20
.........
10
"'
......
I" '
2
......
10
20
Differe nce in dB converted into
BlO
...... ~
30
I'-
dB
'
40
%distortion
Oc.t obe
74
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
LOUDSPEAKERS
11
5. 1 Conditions
- The loudspeaker is mounted as specified on the data sheet.
- The power input to the loudspeaker is the operating power.
- The microphone distance is as specified on the da ta sheet. (See also definition of
"Operating power")
5. 2 Measurin,g result
The distortion curve with its limit of high power loudspeakers i s given on the data sheet.
6
Sweep voltage
The sweep voltage test involves the loudspeaker to receive a sinusoidal test signal of
specified constant amplitude. The frequency of this signal is swept through the specified frequency range.
6. 1 Test apparatus
- Audio-frequency sinus-signal generator with a constant output voltage over the
range from 0 to 20 000 Hz.
/
- Linear amplifier with an output power appropriate to the loudspeaker under test
and an output impedance not greater than 1/ 3 x the r a ted loudspeaker impedance.
For power see 6. 2.
- An e le ctronic voltmeter with high input impedance.
6 . 2 Conditions
- The loudspeaker i s tested unmounted.
- The input voltage is
a) for the medium and low power range- such that the power input to the
is 0, 5 x the specified power handling capacity .
b) for the High power range as specified on the data sheets.
,j
louds~aker
- If the loudspeaker is designed to operate in a restricted frequency range , the cor-
responding network (filter) which is connected to the loudspeaker during the test ,
is specified on the data sheet. The test voltage is measured at the in put terminal s
of the network .
6. 3 Test result
To pass this test the loudspeaker has to function 1~roperly during the test.
7
Flux density
This is the magnetic flux density measured in the air gap .
7. 1 Measuring apparatus
- Differential search coil
- Galvanometer
October 1974
Bll
---
LOUDSPEAKERS
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
""'""
7. 2 Conditions
- The distance between the centres of the two coils is equal to .the air gap height
minus 1 mm.
- The two coils are put Jnto the air gap symmetrical with respect to the poleplate .
7. 3 Measuring result
The minimum flux density as measured on production samples is stated on the data
sheet.
8
Frequency response
The frequency response is the graph representing the sound pressure as a function
of frequency applying to the loudspeaker a constant sine-wave signal v.
8.1 Measuring apparatus

-
Microphone
Microphone amplifier
Cathode follower
Sine/random generator
Level recorder
Bruel
Bruel
Bruel
Bruel
. Bruel
& Kjaer ,
& Kjaer ,
& Kjaer,
& Kjaer,
& Kjaer,
type
type
type
type
type
4131,4145
2606,2607,2608
2619
1024
2305, 2307
The apparatus is set as follows:

-Writing speed
- Paper speed
- Range potentiometer
- Lower limiting frequency
- Rectifier response
- Writing width
,- Compressor speed
125 mm/s
3
mm/s
50 dB
10 Hz
r.m.s.
100 mm
300 dB/s
8. 2 Conditions
vv:;-:z;
- Sine-wave signal V =
where
- for anechoic rqom measurements W = 50 mW, unless otherwise stated on the data
sheets.
V = test voltage
Zr = rated impedance as specified on the data sheet
- Microphone position: in axis of loudspeaker on a distance of

50 cm for anechoic room measurements
- Curve a is measured in a anechoic room; loudspeaker unmounted
- Curve b is measured in a half free field; loudspeaker mounted as specified on the
data sheet
- Curve d is measured -in a anechoic room; loudspeaker unmounted
Bl2
October i974
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
LOUDSPEAKERS
11
8. 3 Measuring result
A description of the sensitivity and the frequency response curve(s) are given on
the data sheet.
Direction of magnetization
The magnet is so magnet ized that the centre-pole is south for systems wit h a ring
magnet, and north for systems with a slug magnet.
10
Polarity
The cone of the loudspeaker will move outwards when a d. c. voltage is app lied to
the terminals so that the red terminal is positive.
The voltage applied does not exceed the "sweep voltage",
October 1976
B13
LOUDSPEAKERS
CONVERSION LIST
GENERAL
Con vers ion of cata logue number (for order ing) to type number.
cata logue number
type
cata l ogue number
type
2422 256 30BO 1

30B02
30B03
30804
3200 1
32002
32003
.32005
32006
32007
34.'30 1
.'34302
.3600 1
36002
.3600.'3
36004
36005
.) 7001
37002
37003
.'37004
.'37005
.)7008
37009
AD4692/X4
XB
X15
X25
AD2090(f4
TB
T15
AD2290(f4
TB
T 15
AD4090/XB
X 15
AD5790/M4
X4
MB
MI5
X8
AD709 1/M80 0
X800
M40 0
M4
X4
XB
M8
2422 257 22001

22002
2370 1
2.'3702
23703
2:l704
23801
2.) 802
2.'3803
2.'3804
2420.'3
24204
24.)0 I
24.?02
24.'3 11
243 12
30.30 1
30302
30.303
3040 1
AD207 1(f4
TB
AD3070/Y4
Y8
y 15
Y25
AD2070 / Z4
ZB
Z15
Z25
AD4070/Y 15
Y25
AD4085/X4
X8
AD4485/X4
X8
AD38BO/X4
XB
X 15
AD4681/X4
240:3256 1200 1
AD0 199/Z25
24 03 257 2200 1
22002
2370 1
23702
23704
23705
AD227l(f4
TB
AD3370/Y4
YB
Y25
Y 150
2404257 2420 1
24202
24203
24204
3430 1
34302
34303
4600 1
46002
AD4470 / Y4
YB
y 15
Y25
AD44BO/X4
X8
X 15
AD7062 / M4
MS
24042 5 8 4820 I
AD8000
2-1 22 256 2220 1

ao:w 1
.'30.'302
30303
.30304
30305
30.'307
3050 1
30502
.'30503
30504
30505
30506
.)060 1
30602
30603
30604
306 12
30613
.?06 14
306 15
306 16
3070 1
30702
30703
30704
AD2099 / Z25
AD3590/X4
B14
xso
X400
X8
X 15
X25
AD3890 / X4
XBOO
XB
X15
X25
X70
AD469 1/X4
XB
X 15
X25
M4
MBOO
MI5
MS
M25
AD4890/X4
XB
X 15
X25
October l971i
GENERAL
CONVERSION LIST
LOUDSPEAKERS
11
catalogue number
type
catalogue number
type
2422 2S7 30402

30403
30404
30409
304 11
304 I 3
3060I
30602
30603
30604
3 I20l
3 1202
.3 I30 1
3 1302
32001
32002
3320 1
33202
.13.3 12
33313
3430 1
.34302
3430.3
.34304
34.1 11
.1S401
3S402
3S40S
35406
3550 1
35502
35701
35702
35703
.15704
.15705
35706
35707
.15708
.3610 1
36102
3610.3
36104
36 I05
36106
36107
.16108
AD46S I /XS
XIS
X2S
M4
MS
M2S
A04682/X4
2422 2S7 3780I

37802
3780.3
37804
3780S
37906
37907
37911
379I2
38211
.182 12
38213
.18214
3840S
38406
38S0 1
.38S02
3S60 1
3S602
.1S60S
3910I
39 102
3910.3
39104
4100I
41002
41003
4110 1
41102
41103
41201
41202
41301
41302
47001
47002
47005
48101
51001
51002
51003
51101
51102
AD70SO/X4
October 1976
X8
XIS
X2S
AD126S/W4
W8
AD106S/W4
W8
Ab0210/Sq4
Sq8
ADOI40/f4
T8
AD0162/TS
T15
AD4080/X4
xs
X1S
X2S
AD4481/X4
ADS060/Sq4
Sq8
ADS061/Srt4
Sq8
M4
MS
ADSOS1/X4
X8
X15
X25
M4
MS
M 15
M25
A05780/X4
X8
XIS
X25
M4
MS
MI5
M25
xs
M4
MS
MI5
AD7063/M4
MS
AD7060/W4
W8
AD808l/M4
M8
X4
X8
AD8061/W4'
W8
ADS066/W4
ws
ADS067/W4
W8
MFB
AD69SO)x4
xs
M4
M8
AD 106S/M4
MS
MIS
AD126S/M4
MS
M15
AD10100/W4
WS
AD12100/W4
WS
AD7066/W4
W8
MFB
9710MC
AD12100/M4
MS
M15
AD12100/HP4
HPS
BI5
I LOUDSPEAKERS .
GEN ERAL
CONVERSION LIST
I
cata logue number
type
4304 078 72 500

72720
72820
72840
72850
72860
ADF500 / 4500/8
ADF 1600/ 4
ADF 1600 /8
ADF500 / 4500 / 4
ADF2400 /8
ADF2400/4
I '""
~
!::
'
'
'
13 16
AD0140/T.
11
11
1 in ch HIGH POWER DOME TWEETER LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION
For the reproduction of audio frequencies from 1600 Hz to 22 000 Hz in multi -way highfidelity loudspeaker systems. Minimum recommended cross -over frequency 1600Hz
with 12 dB/octave slope.
.
version
TECHNICAL DATA
TB
T4
4
3,4
6,3
Rated impedance
Voice coil resi stance
1600 to 20 000 Hz
Rated frequency range
Power ha ndling capacity,

measured with filter: 12
5
8
3, 2
lotidspeake, unmounted
Hz
1200
Resonance frequency
J-IF
pF
J-IF
J-IF
0. 35 mH
0, 2 mH
0. 5 mH
0, 35 mH
20
40
20
40
Operating power
Sweep vo ltage (500 to 20 000 Hz)
4, 5 V
Energy in air gap
m]
59
Flux density
0,9
Air-gap height
mm
.2, 5
Voice coil height
.3, 2 mm
2, 4
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
25
mm
Ferroxdure
61
o. 1
mm
kg
0,25
Mass of loudsreaker
w
w
w
w
kg
The loudspeaker has a polycarbonate dome and a vo ice coil of alu minium wire.
Connection to the loudspeaker is by means of 3, 2 mm (0, 12 inc h) Fastons or soldering .
~____,
O,_,c=
tober
1976
11
11
1317
--
AD0140/T.
1 inch HIGH POWER DOME TWEETER

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimen s ions (mm)
94,2
m ox
56
61,5
max max
-'--- - - - - - 87 0,1 ----;;JZ:;;,.o;;,.,;-;-,,--.!
Fig.l
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection
Baffle hole diamete r 75 mm.
Face of loudspeaker s hou ld lie in lin e with pbne o f baffle.
AV AI LAB LE VERSIONS
r- (0 = stamped on loudspeaker magnet,

1
not to be used for ordering . )
AD0140/T4, catalogue numbe r 2422 257 .3:32. 1

AD0140/T8, catalogue number 2422 257 :332.2
t::::: 26
= for bulk packing )

= for single unit packing
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CURVES

Curve b:
Sound pressure measured in half free field, input at operating power.

Loudspea ker mounted on baffle , dime nsions 50 x 50 mm .
Curve c : 2nd and 31-d harmonic distortion , measured at the operatin g power of 4 Win
anechoic room. Loudspeaker unmounted.
) Minimum packing quantity 9 per unit.
i318
---------~----------------~~~ ------~O~c~t~o b~e~r~l~9~7~6
_____
AD0140/T.
LOUDSPEAKER
--
1-""'
..-:
CD
0
Lll
0
,._
N
,._
.,-
.......
.-
r-
<
>
U'1
_o\ .....
'T"""'
N-
-c
<..)c:::::
<.......
-- -
l"i::
I-
.....
1--
- -
_..
,./
.-
f...
r-~--.
---
r-
I
0
0
"
U'1
oil
ii: '
0
0
N
0
0
.-
0
U'1
0
N
.-
0
0
~
October 1976
(])
"0
0'>
CO
['-.
lD
_il
U'1
Bl9
~~~~!~!~i~d~v~ ~o! dev~o~~:m~J~s ma~!!!
for evaluation. It does not Conn part bf our data handbook: system and
does not necessarily imply that the device wUl go into production_
AD0162/T.
1 inch HIGH POWER DOME TWEETER LOUDSPEAKERS
APPLICATION
For use in direct and indirect rad iating systems for reproduction of audio frequencies
from 2000Hz to 22 000 Hz with very low distortion in multi-way high fidelity loudspeaker
systems in accordance with DIN45500. Minimum recommended cross - over frequency
1600Hz. The loudspeaker has a very high sensitivity.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
Rated impedance
'
T15
15
6,3
12 ,5
2000 to 22 000
Resonance freque"ncy
Power handling capacities ajb (see Fig. 1)
at2000HzC= 8f.!F L=0,5 mH
C = 3, 3 fJF L = 1 mH
at 4000Hz C = 3,2 fJF L = 0,35 mH
C = 1, 5 fJF L = 0 , 8 mH
20/4
4,5
75
Air gap height
2,5
Mass of loudspeaker
1,2
Magnet material
diameter
mass
5,5
50/6
F lux density
Core diameter
50/6
w
w
w
w
20/4
Energy in air gap
Voice c oil height
2,4
Hz
Hz
1000
Operating power
Sweep voltage
frequency range: 500- 20 000 Hz
high pass filter : 8 fJF - 0, 5 mH
T8
--
mJ
T
mm
3,4
mm
25
mm
Ferroxdute
72
0,24
mm
kg
0,5
kg
The loudspeaker has a polycarbonate dome and a diffusor integrated in the cover.
Connection to the loudspeaker by means of 2, 8 mm (0, 11 inch) Fa11tons or soldering.
Augilst
1976~~~ --~'--/~--~~ --_.:;B2: .: .1: . ._--JJ
AD0162/T.

LOUDSPEAKERS
c
loudspeaker
unmounted
iZ7S0\4
Fig. 1. Measuring circuit.

a = system power handling capacity
b =loudspeaker power handling capacity.
Dimensions (mm)
69
73,5
max max
Fig.2.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.

Face of loudspeaker should not lie behind plane of baffle.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r - (1 =stamped on loudspeaker ' magnet,

J
not to be used for ordering)
AD0162/T8 , catalogue number 2422 257 333.2

AD0162/T15, catalogue number 2422 257 333. 3
t=
3 = for bulk packing ':<)

7 = for single unit packing
':<) Minimum packing quantity 9 per unit.
B22
Augt!St 1976
AD0162/T.
LOUDSPEAKERS
(see Fig. 3)
Curve b: Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker unmounted.

Above 1000 Hz, over the width of one octave, the sound pressure may be a
maximum of 2 dB lower than indicated.
Curve c: 2nd and 3rd harmonic di stortion , measured at the operating power of 2 W in
anechoic room, loudspeaker unmounted.
August 1976
B2.1
AD0162/T.
1 inch HIGH .POWER DOME TWEETER

.
LOUDSPEAKERS
::.
( 1-
('J
I<
~~
.--
'" l)
.....
"D
"0
......
~~
V
1- ~
-- _...
M
"0
!"'--- r-...... _;J~
--- --
.....
r-....
1-1-
'
N'
['....
0
0
LD
:--....
.,;
b{)
''
it:
' I'- ~
1'--.
I'
0
0
('J
......
0
0
LD
0
('J
0
0
B2 4
Ill
en
"0
11
eo
0
t--
LD
lD
11
August 1976
11
AD0199 /Z25
llf.t inch ROUND LOW POWER LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
1l1e absence of magnetic stray field due to ticonal sinterpot magnet system, makes this
loudspeaker suitable for use in portables, intercoms and di ctation equipment where vcr~
small dimensions are required .
TECHNICAL DATA
version Z25
25
>2
19 , 8
>2
Rated impt;dance
Resonance frequency
700
Hz

measured without filter
loudspeaker unmounted
0,2
Sweep voltage
1,6
Energy in airgap
5,3
m]
Flux density
0,5
Airgap height
2 ,5
mm
Voice coi.l height
2,3
mm
10
mm
Ticonal
10
0,006
mm
kg
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Weight of loudspeaker
0,017
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and s ur ro und.
October 1974
1325
:
:
l:i inch ROUND LOW POWER
AD0199/Z25
LOUDSPEAKER
Dimens ions(mm)
r--
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
T-
-I- - - - - -
1
1B
mox
27
I
I
I
I
L
,_
4,5
--
Fig .1
16 max - .
7Z68ll2S
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase, connection .
r---( 0
AVAILABLE VERSION
= stamped on loudspeaker magnet,
not to be used for ordering )
AD0 199/Z25, ca talog ue number 2403 256 120.1
L___ 2 = for bulk packing

L___ 6 = for s ingle unit packing
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CURVE
.
Fig . 2
_ _ _ _ _R,?h
'
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker unm ounted .

Between 2000 Hz a nd 3000 Hz the measured response curve may not deviate.
Input power 50 mW .
11
October 1974
AD0199/Z25
1! inch ROUND LOW POWER

LOUDSPEAKER
..:t
l- 1-
..:t
Cl)
"'
.....
t- 1- I-
......
I- I-
I- I-
1-'.....
""""'
::r
..><
r-..
..
..
'
r\
\
I
~loo.
:r:
1""-- '-
0
0
lt>
0
0
N
I- 1-I-I1--1-I- 1-I- 1-I-I1--1--
0
0
LO
N
0
0
.........
en
en
0
lt>
<(
l
ID
"C
0
0
en
0
CO
.....
"'
""
11
1327
-~
AD0210/Sq.
11
11
2 inch HIGH POWER DOME SQUAWKER LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION
For the repr oduction of audio. frequencies fr om 500 to 5000 Hz with very low di stortion
in mu lti-way high-fidelity lou dspeake r systems according to DIN45500.
The lou dspeaker has an excellent spherical r a diation pattern.
version
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedance
Sq8
~>.
6, 6
~>.
3,4
Resonance frequency
370

Power handling capacity,
measured with filter 36 IJF - 1, 2 mll
18 IJF - 2, 4 mH
w
60
Energy in air gap
Mass of lou dspeaker
w
V
6 ,3 V
m.J
0,8
Air- gap height
Magnet ma teria l
diameter
mass
20
4,5
Flux de nsit y
Core diameter
Hz
60
Operating power
Voice co il he ight
Hz
550 to 5000
Power handling capacity of speaker only
Sweep vol tage (100 to 10 000 Hz, filte r 36 IJF - 1, 2 mH

18 iJF - 2, 4 mH)
.....,
.....,
.....,
Sq4
T
mm
5
3,3
3,6 mm
50
Ferroxdure
102
0,42
mm
mm
kg
kg
The loudspeaker ha s a paper dome, textile rim and a sealed pot; no acoustic isolation
required .
Connection to the 1oudspeakeris by means of 5, 1 mm (0, 2 in c h) Faston s or solder ing .
October 1976
::::::l
AD0210/Sq.
2 inch HIGH POWER OOME SQUAWKER

LOUDSPEP,.KER
-~
.
Dimensions (mm)
r- - - - - 1260,2 ----~
r- - - - - 134,2 max ---,,.-,, ,,-.~
Fig . 1,
1
) Baffle hol e diamete r 110 mm
On e tag is indicated by a re d mark for in-phase connection
AV AILABLE VERSIONS
r-- (0
,
.,
1.
AD0210/Sq4, c;Ha 1ogue num ber 2422 2 ::> 7 ,, 20 1

AD02 10/Sq8 ; catalogue number 2422 257 320.2
= stampe d on loudspeaker m<tgnet,

not to be use d for ordenng)
2 =for bu l k packing
FREQU ENCY RESPONSE CU RVES

See Fig. 2
Input po~er 50 mW
Curve b: Sound pressure meas ured in anechoi c room, loudspeaker mounted on DIN baffle
at operating power.
Curve c: 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion, measure d at t he operating power of 5 W in
anechoic room . Loudspeaker fr ~>nt mounted on DIN baffle.
- - - - -rl330
October 1976
2 inch HIGH POWER DOME SQUAWKER
AD0210/Sq.
LOUDSPEAKER
('J
(~
rD
rD
..:.:.
......
.--
......
--
I
0
0
l[)
L_
oil
~
1\.
....,
.D
' 1'-
~-
-- v ~
1'-
r--- r---
I'>
'
('J
I<
I
I
1\
0
0
"0
y
0
0
.--
"0
i'-..'
['..
::::,.. -
t--
...
'
......_
l[)
,' ...
0
('J
0
0
0
Octobe r 1976
ro
"'0
0
0'>
0
<X)
t--
0
ID
.Ir
0
l[)
RQ I
AD2070/Z.
11
11
r
2% inch ROUND LOW POWER LOUDSPEAKER

APPLI CATION
For portable receivers and intercoms
TECHNICAL DATA
versi on
Z4
28
Z25
::::
15
25
Vo ice coil res istance
3,5
7, 1
13,7
22,8
Resonance frequency
360
, 360
360
360
Hz

loudspeaker unmounte d
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
1, 4
1, 9
2,5
Energy in a irgap
12,7
12 , 7
12,7
12,7
mJ
F lux dens ity
0 , 74
0 ,74
0 , 74
0, 74
T
mm
Ra ted impedance
Sweep voltage
Airga p he ight
Voice coil he ight
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
we ight
October .19..7.;,
4 _ _ _11
2, 5
2, 5
2,5
2,5
2, 7
2,2
3,6
mm
mm
10
10
10
10
Fxd
31
0,02
Fxd
31
0, 02
Fxd
31
0,02
Fxd
31
0,02
0,064
0,064
0 ,064
0 , 064
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and surround.
215
m m\Z'l
kg
kg
AD2070/Z.
2! inch ROUND LOW POWER

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
I
I
I
I
I
I
f.-
I
I
I
I
----L-
r---f-
I
---
f--
I
I
I
I
I
I
-::::
f.-
--
I
I
I
1.5 m in
D31,4max-
.---- - - - - - - 64max
58
ma X
I._
!..-
- 9,2
-------~ 1
mox
._ 19,8 m a x---..
Fig. 1
7Z6S949
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone -movement at the s pec ified power
handling capacity.
O~e tag is indicated by a red m ark for in-phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r - - ( 0 =sta mped on loudspeaker magnet ,

AD2070/ Z4 , catalogue number 2422 257 238~ 1
AD2070/ Z8 , ca talogue number 2422 257
:ha. 2
AD2070 / ZlS , c atalogue number 2422 257 238.3

AD2070/ Z25 , c at alogue number 2422 257 238.4
'
'
f---- 2 = for
bulk pac king ':' )
L__ 6 =for single unit packing
FREQUENCY RESPO NSE CU RVE
Fig. 2
'~ )
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room , loudspeaker unmounted.

Above 1000Hz the sensitivity may be, over the width of one octave, maximum
2 dB lower than indica ted. Input power 50 mW.
Minimum packing quantity 5 per unit
- - - ---"-'3.4
October 1974
2!6inch ROUND LOW POWER
AD2070/Z.
LO UDSPEAKER
,..,... V
'
~
0
,..,...
Lf)
"'
,/'
,/'
I
..Y
Lf)
U)
::;;
"'
'
1./
'
/
~.,..
Lfl
!...--' f.-
'r--.. r--..
~ 1--
"
--__,
~
!--....
I".
r-...
r'\ f\.
'
1\
0
0
I}
"'.;>,'l
Lfl
"'
(t- t-
t- t- t-
r- I- I-
0
0
,.
0
0
~
'
'
0
Lfl
'
0
~
0
0
~
en
'0
0
a>
CO
t--
lD
0
Lfl
..
October 1976
11
B3S
'
AD2071/T.
AD2271/T.
11
2~ inch HIGH POWER TWEETER LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION
Application in acoustic enclosur~s.

Rated frequency range 1500 Hz to .10 000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
vers ion
T8
T4
Rated impedance
3,5
7, 1
Resonance frequency
1000
1000
10
10
1,4
Power handling capacity ,

m easured with a series capacitor
of 5 !JP and a signal ace. DIN45573
Sweep voltage
Energy in airgap
-~
Hz
'~)
12,7
12,7
mJ
F lux dens ity
740
740
mT
Airgap height
2,5
2,5
mm
Vo ice coil height
2,7
2,2
mm
10
10
mm
Magnet m ateri a l
diameter
weight
Fxd
31
0,02
Fxd
31
0, 02
kg
0 , 07
0,07
kg
Core dia meter
m mr;D
"') With a cross-over frequency at 2400Hz.
October 1974
"-----~~~ _.lhl,I3T!t ..._.--
AD207l/T.
AD2271/T.
2-! inch HIGH POWER TWEETER

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
.....-_
52, 2
ma X
.__f.-
0 31,4max
57, 7 ma x
....
1...
2, 7m~x
-+-17,9max-.
28,4max
----____,~ 1
_____... 7l68222
52 ,2
m ox
'---1--
D31,4max 680,05 - - - - - -
-~
..-2,7max
-17,9max-.
......-- 28 4 max _....
Fig. l
1zsaz2J
'
Baffle hole dia meter: 52 mm (front mounting)

One tag is indicated by a red mark for in -phase connection.
-1338
October 1974
2! inch HIGH POWER TWEETER
AD2071/T.
LOUDSPEAKER
AD2271/T.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
Round flange version
r-- (0 = stamped
AD 2071/T4,
I_
catalogue number 2422 257 220. 1
AD 2071/TS,
cata logue number 2422 257 220. 2
Square flange version
on loudspeaker magnet
not to be used for ordering).
AD 2271/T4,
AD 2271/TS,
c at alogue number 2403 257 220. 2

~2 for bulk pack ing ~')
L__6 for single unit packing.
Fig. 2. Input power 50 mW.

Sound pressure me asure d in a nechoic room, louds peaker unmounted. The
characteristic may be, over the width of one octave, maximum 2 dB lower than
ind icated.
'~)
Minimum packing quantity 25 per unit .
October 1974
B39
AD2071/T.
2-i: inch HIGH POWER TWEETER
AD2271/T.
LOUDSPEAKER
f
...-;
.,...
U)
L,...oo
,..,..- ,..-
< X)
U)
0
N
~~
J:
....
N
.,...
'J
......
Ll>
I
N
\
1\
I
"""
1"- "-
r- t- ~
J:
0
0
Ll>
0
N
I-- I-~~
0
0
r-:r-:
----
I-- I-- ....................

I-- I-- r---t"-I-- I-- oN
Ill
NN
I-- I--
DD
<{<{
'
0
~
m
~
01
CO
N
.,...
.:0
11'1
11
0
N
October 19J
zt inch
HIGH POWER TWEETER

LOUDSPEAKER
AD2071/T.
AD2271/T.
--F ig. 3 Directional curve.

Sound pressure me as ured in anechoic room a t 10000 Hz, loudspeaker unmounted.
October 1974 _ _ _
I I~-~--------------"..:.____
;;.
B4o;,.:l;....._ _ _ __
'
AD2090/T.
AD2290/T.
2 inch HIGH POWER TWEETER LOUDSPEAKER
A PPLICATION
F o r reproducti o n o f au dio fr equ e nci es up to 20 kllz with very low di s to rtion in multi- way
high fide lit y l o ud s pea ke ~ sys te ms in a cco rda nce with DI N 45500. Due to a bRen ce o f s tray
fi e ld fr o m th e twee te r ma gne t sys te m , thi s lou dspea ker may be use d in te lev i s io n set s .
TECHNIC AL DATA
Ra te d impedan ce
Vo ice co il r es is ta nce
T4
ve r sw n
T8
Tl5
15
.1 , :l
6, 6
1.1
Reso nance fr eque11c y

Ra 1e d fr equ e ncy r ange
Powe r ha ndlin g ca pa cit y,
lo uds pea ke r in se ri es with ca pac ito r o f
:3000 to 20 000
12
Ope tatin g power

Swee p vo ll a ge (600 to 20 000 Hz)
loudspeake r in se ries with ca r a cito r of
En e r g y in air gap
F lux de nsi t y
t\ it -ga p he ight
Vo ice co il height
Co r e di a me te r
Mag11 e t ma te ri a l
di a me te r
ma s s
Mass o f louds pe a ke r
Hz
1:30o
2
5
2, 7
4
5
.19
0. 85
J-LF
4, 7
2, H
12
llz
5,5
2, 7
V
JlF
mJ
T
.1
mm
2, 8
mm
18
mm
Ticona l
18
0 , 027
0, l
mm
kg
kg
The loudspeake r has a pa per cone and s urround.
Octobe r 1976
1343
----
AD2090/T.
AD2290/T.
2 inch HIGH POWER TWEETER .

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm )
-1
33
----.111
mox . .,______
51 mox
29 max - - - . . 1z6ez11.1
Fig. la
1+-- - - - 040,5 -------<~ 1

1.-- - - - -- 0 5 3 - -- - - --
Fig. lb
Baffle hole diameter 44 mm
One tag is indica ted by a red mark for in-phase connection.
- - - - -1'!44
Occtnhf'r 1CJ7n
2 inch
~IGH
POWER
TWEET~~
~
LOUDSPEAKER
AD2090/T.
AD2290/T.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
,----(0 = stamped on loudspeaker magnet

l
not to be used for ordering).
320~
AD2090/T4 ,
catalogue number 2422 256
AD2090/T8 ,
catalogue numbe r 2422 256 320.2
AD2090/Tl5, catalogue number 2422 256 320 . 3

AD2290/T4,
AD2290/T8,
AD2290/Tl5 , catalogue number 2422 256 320.7

1-1----2 for bulk packing
~')
L - - -- 6 for single unit packing
Curve a: Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeake r unmounted. The

characteristic may be over the width of one octave , maximum 2 dB lower than
indicated. Input power 50 mW.
Curve c: Total non-linear distortion, measured at the operating power in anechoic room
(microphone distance l m); loudspeaker mounted on baffle.
Curved: Direction curves at different frequencies, see Fig. 3 to 5.
'~)
Minimum packmg qu a ntity 25 per umt.
Octobe.u2.7..i.
AD2090/T.
2 inch HIGH POWER TWEETER
. AD2290/T.
LOUDSPEAKER
1-V
I - f-1-
....:
.....
I
.::
'
CO
(D
.....
I
'
Lf)
1\
'
---
_()D
N
V
......
M
'0
t--... !"'--
.. ..
~
!"'--
--
['
r---
......
0
0
LD
,,
"'-~"
u.
0
0
N
'
0 .
LD
0
N
0
0
(])
CO
(!)
0
Lf)
97
AD2090/l.
2 inch HIGH POWER TWEETER
AD2290/T.
LOUDSPEAKER
Directional curves at different frequencies (AD2090(T8)
Fig. 3
Fig.4
Fig. S
October 1974
' -~------------~"~1347~
11 AD2099/Z25
11
2 inch ROUND LOW POWER LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
The absence of magnetic strav field due to Ticonal sinterpot magnd :;ystem, makes this
loudspeakc11. suiwble for use in ponables, intercoms and di ctation equ ipment ll'hc:re vc:r)
small dimen sions arc required .
TEC HNICAL DATA

Rated impedance
25
12
Voice coil resi.stance
19 , H
12
Resonance frequency
420
1-iz
Power handling capac ity

Jouclspc<~ker unmounted
0, .'3
Sweep voltnge
2, 5
Energy in air gap
.),:3
111.1
Flux clensiry
0,5
Air-gap hei ght
2,5
111111
Voice coil he ight
2, .)
111111
10
mm
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Mas s of lop dspeaker
Ticonal
10
0.006
kg
0, 021
kg
...,
-==
mm
I
The loud,pca ker has a paper cone and su 1rm~ncl ,
I
October 1976
IL ___~Il-~849_..
AD2099/Z25
2 inch ROUND LOW POWER

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions(mm)
r
I
I
I
I
I~
I
I
- - I-
.045,5 1)
---
I
I
I
I
L
- - - - - - 50max - - - - - --1
I~
- -
18
ma x
46 , 2
ma X
7
mox
- -1Bmax-+-
7Z68t..26
Fig .!
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a 'red mark for in-phase connection .
AVAILABLE VERSION
1 (0
I
= stamped on loudspeaker magnet,
i\02099 /Z 25, catalogue number 2422 256 222 .1
f-- 2
L 6
= for bulk packing

Fig. 2
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, l oudspeaker unmounted.

Above 1000 I-lz the sensitivity may be , over the width of one octave, maximum
2 dB lower than indicated .
Input power 50 m W.
October ...,lc<.9_,7""
_, 4 _ __
AD2099/Z25
2 inch ROUND LOW POWER
LOUDSPEA KER
~~
(I-
-~
-t-"'
0
N
-~---
I
.:1::
.......
I)
_,.,...-
'
;:::;;;;
.......
.......
I-- I-1-"
....
lD
.........
:::
---
.......
'\
\
N
\:
1-
--
lD
1- 10
0
N
0
0
lD
0
N
0
0
0
October 1976
Cl)
\J
CO
['-..
lD
0
lD
11
BSl
.~
AD3070/Y.
AD3370/Y.
11
3 inch LOW POWER LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION

TECHNICAL DATA
version
Y4
Y8
Yl5
Y25
y 150
15
25
150
3,5
7,1
13,7
22 , 8
127
Resonance frequency
250
250
250
250
250
Hz
Rated impedance

loudspeaker unmounte d
1,4
Sweep voltage
2, 7
Energy in airgap
12,7
12' 7
12 , 7
12' 7
12,7
mJ
Flux density
0 , 74
0, 74
0 , 74
0,74
0, 74
Airgap height
2,5
2,5
2, 5
2,5
2,5
mm
Voice coil height
2,7
2,2
3, 6
3, 5
mm
10
10
10
10
10
mm
Fxd
31
0, 02
Fxd
31
0,02
Fxd
31
0 , 02
Fxd
31
0,02
Fxd
31
0, 02
Weight of loudspeaker, round flange 0,069

square flange 0,075
0 , 069
0,075
0,069
0,069
0,075
0,075
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
we ight
-T he loudspeaker has a paper cone and surround .
, , October 1974
11
3,5
8, 7
mm(tl
kg
kg
kg
-~
AD3070/Y.
AD3370/Y .
Dime nsions (mm)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0 72 11-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
- D 31,4ma x 1 .------------ S l ma x ----~----_. 1
~~
a
0
ov
-- f- - f.-
If
'-
16,7 ma x ._
4- 2,
7 2 ma x - .
Fig. la Round flange version
51
71 ,6
mo x ma X
7Z6S947
/
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o 31,4max -
1--- - - - - - - - - 0 81 ma x - - - - - - - - -_.1
Fig . lb Square flange version
f\
\Jr---
-- I-
ov
,---
-I-
'--
51
71,6
ma x ma X
If
'-
1,5 min1I__.
16,7 ma x ._
..._272
ma x ~
'1Z6 S9t..8
handling c a pac ity .
Octobe r 1974
AD3070/Y.
AD3370/Y.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
Round flange version
~(0
AD3070/Y4,
catalogue number 2422 257 237! 1
AD3070/Y8,
c atalogue number 2422 257 237.2
= sta mped on louds peaker magnet,
not to be us ed for ordering)
AD3070/Y 15 , cata logue number 2422 257 237 . 3

AD3070/Y25, catalogue number 2422 257 237. 4
Square flange version

AD3370/Y 4
catalogue number 2403 257 237 . 1
AD3370/Y8 , catalogue number 2403 257 237.2

AD3370/Y25, catalogue number 2403 257 237.4
AD3370/Y 150 ,cataloguenumber 2403 257 237.5
1-1---
2 =for bulk packing '')

Fig. 2 Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, louds peaker unmounted .

Above 1000Hz the sens itivity may be, over the width of one octave, maximum
2 dB lower than indicated.
Input power 50 mW.
~' )
Minimum packing quantity 5 per unit
October 1974
11_~~-11_
RSS.~-----'
AD 3070 / Y.
AD3370/Y.
1-"
1- !-"
N
L/l
1--I- 1-
en
L/l
<D
!-"
r- p
_:y;
!-"
!--.
r-
I..- 1-
I- f-1-'
r- t---.
U"l
r-
1le::: 1......
p~
1,...--
I'
I't'--. '
I....._
r--..
~
~
N
I
0
0
U"l
1\
.::.c
1!..
-- -----
0
0
r-
0
0
_ _ _ _gc;,;
U"l
0
N
0
0
(J)
CO
<.0
0
U"l
October 1976
AD3590/X.
3X5 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION
For use in portable radios , tape recorders and, due to absence of stray magnetic field .
this loudspeaker can al so be used in television sets. High, sensitivity.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X8
X4
Rated impedance
Resonance frequency .
Powe r handling capacity,
Sweep _voltage
Energy in air gap
F lux density
Air- gap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Mass of lc;JUdspeaker
'
Xl 5
X25
X 50
25
50
Q
Q
15
3,4
7, 2
13,8
22 , 6
45
180
180
180
180
180
Hz
w
'
2, 4
3, 5
4, 7
6, 1
8, 7
39
39
39
39
39
0 ,8
0 .8
0 ,8
0 ,8
0.8
1,8
2, 55
2 ,8
2,9
mm
18
18
18
18
18
mm
mJ
T
mm
Ticonal Ticon al T iconal Ticon a l Ticona l

18
18
18
18
18
0 , 027
0 . 027
0,027
0 , 027
0 , 027
0, 13
0, 13
0 , 13
0 , 13
mm
kg
0, 13
kg
The loud speaker has a paper su rround and a foam plastic gaske t on the flange .
t
'
October 1976
RS 'Z
.--
AD3590/X.
3 x 5 inch OVAL ME DIUM POWER

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
Baffle hole
130,9 124,5
ma x 0,2
-+-
l--.45 max
.... 16,5 ,:_

ma x
-+-- 42,9 ma x __..
75,9 ma x -
7Z68218.1
Fig.l
One tag i s indicated by a r e d mark for in-phase connection
AVAI LAB LE VERSIONS

I
1.
(O = sta mped on loudspeaker magnet,

AD 3590/X4 ,
catalogue number 2422 256 303.1
AD 3590/XS,
catalQgue number 2422 256 303.4
AD 3590/XlS ,
AD 3590/X25,
AD 3590/XSO,

-~
f--- 2 for bul k packing )
L 6for singl e unit packing
Fig. 2.
Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker unmounted , Above
100Hz the sensitivity may be , over the width of one octave , maximum 2 dB
lower than indicated..
'~) Minimum packing quantity 12 per unit.
B58
October 1976
AD3590/X.
3 x 5 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER
LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
Cl)
r-
~..--' ........
Cl)
1---"f..--
!.--"
.:t:
<D
--
r-
1\..
lD
f\.,
--
vV
"I'.
"I'-
!'-...
I'.
'\
r\.
I
0
1\
'
'\
......
0
0
N
I'I'-
0
0
0
lD
0
N
0
0
0
October 1976
CO
-o
(J)
CO
[:'-..
\D
lD
11
B59
-~
AD3880/X.
3x8 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER LOU DSPEAK ER
APPLICATION
For use in portable radios and tape recorders
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X4
X8
XIS
15
3, 4
7, 1
13,8
Resonance frequency
120
120
12b
Hz
2,8
5,5
5,5
55
55
55
mJ
mm
2,4
3, 1
2, 5
mm
mm
Rated impedance

meas ured without filter,
Sweep voltage
Energy in airgap
Flux dens ity
Airgap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
~
:::::
=-
18
18
18
Magnet material
dia meter
weight
Fxd
Fxd
Fxd
53
0,1
53
0, 1
53
0, 1
mm
kg
0,3
0,3
0,3
kg
The loudspeaker has a treated paper surround.
March 1974
1_
136_1
_.
AD3880/X.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimens ions (mm)
-50,2max34,1r'nax27,3
max
,;asx-... I,._
205,4 197
max max
184
0,2
t i
54,5 60
max max
!
baffle hole
_I I_
- - 74max-
72 ._
1min 11
7Z69094
Fig.1
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at specified power handling
capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in -phase conn ection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r---- (0 =stamped on loudspeaker magnet,
AD3880/X4, catalogue number 2422 257 303 . 1

2 = for bulk packing ~')
= for s ingle unit packing
t= 6
See Fig.-2. Input power 50 mW

Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker unmounted .
Above 1000Hz the sound pressure may be, over the width of one oc tave,
max imum 2 dB lower than indicated.
~') " minimum packing quantity 6 per unit.
_ _ _ _ B62
_ll ~-~11
March 1974
3 x 8 inch OVAL ME DIUM POWER
AD3880/X.
LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
I' ~
"'
C7l
C7l
. ..,. ~ ~
ID
.....
..
:I:
0
~
1\
'J
IJ
Ill
[)
----
(
1\.
-:::
"'
"'
1""'oo
lt"
....
.....
''
::t:
0
0
"'
'r\
0
0
N
\
1--1-I-- I--
1--1-1--1-t--'I--
""'1'-.1'-."""' .......
X
0
(()
(()
0
0
.....
"
~
0
"'
C"")
1--1--
0
<{
0
N
0
~
October 1974
ID
"0
N
C7l
N
CID
N
N
.....
ID
"'
136:3
.~
~
AD3890/X.
11
11
3x8 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION
For use in portable radios and tape recorders.

The absence of stray field due to ticonal sinterpo~ magnet system, makes this loudspeaker
a ls o suitable for use in television sets.
TECHNICAL DATA
--
vers ion
X4
Rated impedance
xs
X IS
X25
X70
xsoo
15
25
70
800 Q
Voice coil resistanc;:e
3,4
7,1
13,5
22,7
58
600 Q
Resonance frequency
12 0
120
120
120
120
120 H z
2,8
5,5
7,1
11, 8

me asured without filter ,
Sweep voltage
Energy in airgrap
Flux density
Airgap height
Voice coil height
Core dia meter
Magnet material
diameter
we ight
40 V
39
39
39
39
39
0.8
0, 8
0,8
0 ,8
0,8
3 mm
2,4
2,8
2,5
2 ,8
4,8
5, 1 mm
18
18
18
18
18
18 mm
Ticonal
18
0 , 027
Ticona l
18
0, 027
Ticonal
18
0,027
Ticonal
18
0, 027
Ticonal
18
0 , 027
Ticonal
18 mm
0 , 027 kg
0 , 21
0, 2 1
0, 21
0, 21
0 , 21
39 mJ
0,8 T
0, 21 kg
The loudspeaker has a treated paper surround.
October 1974
HAS
AD3890/X.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
- s 2 . 4 max -
205,4 197
max max
184 .
:t0,2
.____ 74 max---.
Fig. 1
l) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone move ment at specified power handling
Capacity.
~
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
I I
AD:3890/X4,
AD.1890/X8,
AD3890/Xl5,
AD3890/X25,
AD3890/X70,
AD3890 /X800 ,
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
c atalogue
catalogue
number
number
number
number
number
number
2422
2422
2422
2422
2422
2422
256
256
256
256
256
256
(0 =stamped on loudspeaker magnet,

not to he used for ordering
305 . l
305. 3
:305 . 4
.105. 5
305.6
305.2
1--- 2
=for bulk packing ~')
L _ 6 =for single unit packing

See Fig. 2 . Input power SO mW

Above 1000Hz the sound pressure may be, over the width of one octave,
ma.ximum 2 dB lower than indicated .
~') Minimum packing quantity 6 per unit
~11
Oct ober 1974
LOUDSPEAKER
AD3890/X.
....
en
0
en
<D
....N
~~
....
0
N
J7
I
.X
1\
"
[,o-11
ll
L(l
=
-
::::::
::::::
"
"""'
I"'
'
1\
0
0
N
"'---
--
r- r--
'
'
.......
""
en
CO
L(l
('I")
I-- -
.~
p:..
0
0
L(l
~
rI--
:I:
4:
I
N
0
~
([)
"0
0
N
en
N
CX>
....
N
N
<D
N
Ll'l
'
October 1974
AD4070/Y.
11
AD4470/Y.
APPLICATION

TECHNICAL DATA
vers ion
Y4
Y8
y 15
Y25
15
25
3,5
7, 1
13,7
22,8
Resonance frequenc y
200
200
200
200
Hz
1,4
2,7
3,5
12.7
mJ
T
Rated impedcince

Sweep voltage
Energy in a irgap
12.7
12.7
12 .7
Flux density
0,74
0,74
0, 74
0, 74
Airgap height
2,5
2,5
2,5
2 ,5
mm
Voice coil height
2, 7
2,2
3,6
mm
mm
10
Hi
10
10
Fxd
Fxd
Fxd
Fxd
31
0,02
31
0, 02
31
0, 02
31
0,02
Weight of loudspeaker, round flange version 0,079

square flange version 0, 087
0,079
0,087
0,079
0,087
0,079
0, 087
Core dia meter

Magnet material
diameter
weight
mm!ZI
kg
kg
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and surround .
October 1974
J369
:::
---
AD4070/Y.
4 i'nch LOW POWER LOUDSPEAKER
AD4470/Y.
Dimens ion s (mm)
- 95,6
m ox
I
I
I
I
I
-E
031.4max
1.-----------
I IL-+--+--'-
__1_
1,5 min 11
105max ----------- .
-.. 18max ,._
._.
28,5max
1Z6S91.5
~5,6
m ox
031,4max
1.-- - - - 0 105 max ----------- .
Fig. Jb Square flange vers ion
._.l_.
1,5 min 11
- . 18max ..-
._.
28,5max
7Z65946
1) Baffle hole and c learanc e depth required for cone m ove me nt at the specified power
han dlin g capacity.
On e ta ge is indi ca te d by a red m ar k for in-phase conn ec tion.
n7n
11
October 1974
AD4070/Y.
AD4470/Y.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
Round fla nge version
r---(0 =stamped on loudspeaker magnet,
not to be used for order ing)
I
AD4070/Y4
AD4070/Y8
catalogue number 2422 .257 242 .2
AD4070/Y 15
catalogue .number 2422 257 242.3
AD4070/Y25 , catalogue number 2422 257 242. 4
Square fla nge version

AD4470/Y4
c atalogue number 2404 257 242. 1
AD4470/Y8
AD4 470/Y 15 , c atalogue number 2404 257 242 . 3

AD4470/Y2 5 , catalogue number 2404 257 242.4
l _ _ 2 =fo r bulk pac king '~)
l _ _ 6 =for single unit packing

Fig. z' Sound press ure meas ured in anechoic room , l ouds pea ker unm ounte d.
Above 1000Hz , the sound pressure may be, over th e width of one oc tave ,
maxi mum 2 dB lower than indic ated .
Input power 50 mW.
* ) Minimum packing quantity 5 per unit
October 1974
AD4070/Y.
AD4470/Y.
"'
"'
"'"'N
......
V
I(
,..
0
N
I/~
.:.:;
0
lL
c~---'
!"-..
--
]'.t)
N
<""
I'-
r---.
"1'\.
I
0
0
1\
V
r-
---
0
0
N
1-
I-r- r-
t- t-
0
0
0
0
B72
CD
"0
CJl
CO
0
<D
October 1976
11
AD4080/X.
AD4480/X.
4 inch MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION
For portable receivers, small tape recorders and intercoms.
TECHNICAL DATA
X4
Rated impedance
version
XIS
X8
X25
15
25
3,4
7,1
13,8
22,6
Resonance frequency
165
165
165
165
Hz
2,45
3,5
4, 75
6, 1
55
55
55
55

l oudspeaker unmounted
Sweep voltage
Energy in a irgap
F lux density
Airgap he ight
Voice coi l height
Core diameter
m]
mm
2,4
3, 1
2,55
2,8
mm
18
18
18
18
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
0 , 25
0,25
0,25
0, 25
kg
The loudspeaker has a pa per cone and surround.
October 1974
II37_3
----
AD4080/X.
4 iooh MEDIUM POWER UJUDSPEAKER
AD4480/X.
Dimensions (mm)
~~
0
0
--
--
V)
...
1ZII1lU.1
43max
J.-_ _ _ __,10""5..,2_ma_x_ _ _ __
7"-9=-.ma_,'+----14--
~39max
Fig. la Round flange vers ion
8 0
,-o,z
~~ -
~~
r r
I\J
I~
IV
19
I
,_ _ _ _ 0 105,2max - - - -
61
95,6 103,4
11
7261300.1
4,3max
~7, 9max
17,2
max
Fig. lb Square flange version

Baffle hole diameter 96 mm.
54.5
max max max ma X
1-
.....___ 39max .-..
One tag i s indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection .
October 1974
AD4080/X.
AD4480/X.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
Round flange version :
r---- (0 = stamped on louds peaker Jillagnet

1
AD4080/X4
catal ogue number 2422 257 343. 1
AD40 80/X8
cata l ogue number 2422 25 7 343 . 2
not t o be used fo r ordering)
AD4080/Xl5, cata l ogue number 2422 257 343 . 3

AD4080/X25, c.a talogu e number 2422 257 343 . 4
Square flange vers ion :
AD4480/X4
AD4480/X8
cata logue number 2404 '257 343. 2
..-.
AD4480/X 15, catalogue ~umber 2404 257 343 . 3
t=
2 = for bulk packing ':')


F ig. 2
Input power SO mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, l oudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000Hz, the sound pressure m ay be, over the width of one octave,
maximum 2 dB l ower than indic ated .
.,.
) Minimum packing quantity 9 per-un'it.
'
October 1974
1375,_~---~~
AD4080/X.
AD4480/X.
....
0
en
N
CO
ID
, ..,.,..
....
,. -
-~-- i""""
~~
0
N
~~
J:
~
....
IJ
;,. <
--
\
~
Ill
~~
r-....
""""
c~
r-....
I')
~
l"'oo..
l'olo..
' 1'\
"
I-- 1-f---- rI-- f---I-- f---I-- f----
f---- I--
'~
~ l'o..
0
N
I"' ~
-xx
'
oo
CX)CX)
o..j'
0
Lll
.;:t..;:j
Cl Cl
<(<(
0
N
B76
en
N
00
N
....
..,
N
N
Ill
October 1974
AD4085/X.
AD4485/X.
11
4 inch MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKERS
APPLICATION
For audio equipment in general. Frequency response up to 12 kHz , high sensitivity in

bass r e gion .
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X8
X4
Rate d impedance
3,4
7, 1
Resonance frequency
measured without filter,
lou dspeaker unmounted
Operating power (sound l evel 90 dB, l m)
Sweep voltage (75 to 20 000 Hz)
Mass of loudspeaker
0, 7
w
V
3, 5
mJ
T
1, 1
mm
2, 5
Air-ga p height
Magne t material
diameter
mass
Hz
38
Energy in air gap
Core diameter
150
2,5
Flux density
Voice coil height
Hz
80 to 14 000
4,1
3,5
mm
mm
14
Ferroxdure
46
0,053
mm
kg
kg
0, 16
The loudspeaker has a paper rim. Connections to the loudspeaker can be made by mean s
of Faston s or by soldering.
October 1976
B77
-:
AD4085/X.
AD4485/X.
4 inch MEDIUM POWER

LOUDSPEAKERS
Dimensions (mm)
\:~ -~
- ..-"
0
a
46
52 95.6 103.4
max max max ma
J J
1
...
- - - - 105,2max - -
4. :3max
...
17.2
max
Fig. la. Round flange type AD4085/X.
14
36.3max -
~~~-~
_. m
0
9
1-
- - - - 105,2max - - - --.
Fig.
1?.
Square flange type AD4485/X.
46
52 95,6 103,4
max max max ma
7Z7516l
l.-4,3max
17,2 ,__
max
- 36,3max
Baffle hole diameter 96 mm.

One tag i s indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
B78
October 1976
AD4085/X.
AD4485/X .
4 inch MEDIUM POWER

LOUDSPEAKERS
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
Round fl ange t vpe
r--- (0 = s ta mpe d on lou dspcake1 magn et,
AD4085/X4, catalogue _number 2422 257 24:3. 1

AD4085/XS, cata logue number 2422 257 243. 2
'
1----

2 = for bul k packing*)
L _ . 6 = for s ingl e unit packing

Square fl ange type
~
A D4485/X4 , c a ta logue number 2422 257 243. l

AD4485/XS. catalogue numbe r 2422 257 243 . 2
(l
= s tamped
not
to
on loudspeaker magnet ,
be used for ordering)
3 = for bu lk packing*)
7 = for s ingl e unit packing
----
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CURVES (see Fig. 2)

Cune b: Sound pre ssu re measu red in anechoic room , louds peaker mounted on baffle
according tq IEC268-5, par. 4. 4.
Curve c : 2nd <llld 3rd ha r 'monic di s tortion measu r e d at the operati ng powur of 0, 6 W in
anechoic room . Loudspeaker front mounted on IEC baffle.
) Minimum packing qu a ntity 9 per un it.
October 1976
879
AD4085/X.
AD4485/X .
4 inch MEDI UM POWER

LOUDSPEAKERS
0
N
>
~
~ 1-- ~
""""
,:,{_
..-
11"
_)
l::>
,)
'
>
.....
I~
',-
.......
......
<::
_.;.
.s
1-- 1-- b
1'-
......
I
0
0
Ln
<..._
I"
' '
.,..->
......
'
.D
"0
.......
.....
\.....- /
......
.......
-...
-~
,.....
..- -;:
,
k r:-
"')
' ["-..
i'-
0
0
0
0
..-
"".,,
"'.~
r- ......... \
r-... .......
0
~
........
.......
\
Ln
r-..
'
.......
::r- r- 1-.......
,,
r--- r- "-
'
0
N
0
0
0
B80
01
CO
0
lD
0
Ln
Octobe r 1976
AD4090/X.
11
11
APPLICATION
For portable rece ivers.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X15
X8
Rated impedance
15
7,2
13,8
Resonance frequency
190
190
Hz
2, 8
3,9
39
39
rnJ
0,8
0,8
mm
1, 8
2,55
mm
mm
Power handling capac;ity,

Sweep voltage
Energy in airgap
F lux density
Airgap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
we ight
We igh0 ot loudspeaker
18
18
Ticonal
Ticonal
18
0,027
18
0, 027
mm
kg
o. 125
0,125
kg
\
\
\
October 1974
1381
---
AD4090/X.
Dimensions (mm)
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
..:
I
I
I
,I
I
-~
1-4--------
lA
'
I\
(\
--
I
I
32,2 49,4 95,6

max max mOX
7247121.3
3,2 _. 1...
max
... 14,4 .....
max
.,..17,6_..
max
105 max - - - - - - - - - . 1
Fig.1
-370max--.
I
1 ) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.

AV AlLABLE VERSIONS
r--- (0
1
AD4090 /X8
stamped on loudspeaker magnet

-
AD4090/Xl5 , catalogue number 2422 256 343. 2
2 = for bulk packing .':' )

6 ='for single unit packing

Fig.2
~')
Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000Hz the sound pressure may be, ovE<r the width of one octave,
maximum 2 dB lower than indicated.
Minimum packing quantity 9 per unit.
B82
October 197 4
AD4090/X.
I
....
0
~~
....
"'....
Cl)
,~
ID
N
t"-
'
1,.
-..... """"
~
L/1
---
~ .
r>
~ loo..
'
f.- I -
'
:I:
0
0
"'
' ' 1'"-
r--.. r....
0
N
~
0
0
0
0')
..j"
!--
October 1974
\.
...._
....
"'
.
X
r-...
re:: r--.
f- r-f.- r--
I 'I;;
t>
r-... r....
,...._ -
I-- ~ '""""
~
"'
ID
"t:J
....
"'
....
Q)
....
t"-
.... ....
0
....
"'
ID
11
13!l.1
AD4481 / X4
11
11
APPLICATION
With its !excellent power handling capacity very suitable for car radios.
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedance
Resonance frequency
Operating power (sound level 90 dB, 1 m)
Sweep voltage (80 to 20000 Hz)
Energy in air gap
Flux density
Air gap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Mass of loudspeaker
The loudspeaker has a textile surround.
August 1976
3,4
90 to 14000
Hz
140
Hz
0,8
' 3, 5
50
0 , 95
3
m]
T
mm
4, 4
mm
18
mm
Ferroxdure
mm
54
0, 1
kg
0 , 25
kg
--
AD4481/X4
4 inoh MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKER
\'
Dimensions (rrim)
4minll
-,..------:::::::::::=!:::::::::::::~~~/)"' s_8,z -,1""'-----------.
n
u
54,5 103 ,4
max max
09611 I
~~--~-.--+-~"~..~..~,
_...
--.
0105,2 max - - - --
4-43max
17,2 .,__
max
- - - 39max-
Fig. 1
handling capacity.
A V AILABLE VERSION
r-- (1 = stamped on loudspeaker magnet,

AD448 1/X 4, catal ogue number 2422 257 343. 1
'
c=

Curve b: Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker mounted on baffle

according to IEC268-5 , par . 4. 4.
Curve c: 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion, measured at the operating power of 0 , 8 W.
Loudspeaker front mounted on IEC baffle.
'-') Minimum packing quantity 9 per unit .
1386
Amrust L97f\
4 inoh MEDIUM PDWER LOUDSPEAKER
AD4481/X4
~r-~r~-.~-r-r-r,-~~r~-.~~,-~~~~~~~-.-.-r~~
~r-~~~-+-+~~1~~~--+~4r~~1-+-+-+-~~-+-+-+~~1~
,_V
~
~~~~=+=+=t~~~~i=t=t=~~=i=t=t=t:tj====~tj~
r-...
0
0
'
l[)
.~
I(
0
0
_o\
u/
N
"U
........
......... ......
-~I
"'"U
.......
u
.........
.........
"
'\
........
0
0
0
l[)
'
........ ',
.........
'
......... '
.........
' '
.........
......
0
N
0
0
AlH!'US
976
"
11
0
Ol
0
a:>
0
["'..
0
<.0
0
l[)
AD4681/M.
11
11
4 x 6 inch OVAL M ED IUM PO WER LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION
A full range loudspeaker for car and domestic radios, tape recorders and portable re cord players.
This speaker has an extended frequency response up to 20kHz .
TECHNICAL DATA
version
M4
MS
M25
25 Q
'3,4
7,1
22,7 Q
Resonance frequency
.135
135
2,8
55
55
Airgap height
3 mm
Voice coil height
3,9
4 mm
Rated impedance

Sweep voltage
Energy in airgap
135 Hz
6
7, 1 V
55 mJ
T
Flux density
Core diameter
Magnet materia l
diameter
weight
18
18
18 mm
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53 mm
0, 1 kg
0,26
0 , 26
0,26 kg
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange .
f"'\.-.t- .... h...,. ....
1 07 4._
II_ __
AD4681/M.
4 x 6 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWE R

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
2min 1l
Baffle hole
-.1,-
l.-141:h
r
I
I
.I
I
Ir
'k
I
I
I
r-
t r
f- 54.5 59 ,5
_l
154 117,5
max 0,2
mox mox
I
I
I
I
I
::::::
::::::
I
I
I
920,2
F ig . 1
J_5max
-. m24
ox
102max
I._
- 4 7,5 max -.
7Z6B 220
1) Baffle hole and c learance depth required for cone movement at spec ified power hand ling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in -phase connection .
_ II
11
AD4681/M.
LOUDSPEAKER
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r-<O = stamped on the loudspeaker mag-
I_
net, not to be used for ordering)

AD468 1/M4, catalogue number 2422 257 304.9
'===2 =for bulk packing ':')
.
~(1
I'
AD468 1/ M8, catalogue number 2422 257 304. 1
=stamped on the loudspeaker magnet, not to be used for ordering)
AD468 1/M25, catalogue number 2422 257 304.3

'===3 = for bulk packing "')
7 =for single unit packing
Fig.2 Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker unmounted.
2 dB l ower than indicated .
Input power 50 mW.
':') Minimum packing quantity 7 per unit.
October 1974
139
AD4681/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
I""'
C7>
.....
f\:
Cl)
"'
N
.....
,,.,_
~ 1--
I--
:z:
.X
C>
<;
c~
lt
<:
~~
' I'..
'
:z:
0
0
Lt>
'\
1\
I-- 1-1-- 1--
892
~ r-.....
,__
1-- 1-1-- 1-I-- 1--
' r\.
0
C>
N
0
0
,...,
--~
CO
<D
0
Lt>
..;:t
Cl
<(
lXI
"C
N
C7>
N
Cl)
.....
..,.
N
C>
N
Lt>
11
nrrnh,:.,.. 1 0'7.A
AD4681/X.
11
11
4 x 6 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
For car a nd d omestic radios. tape recorders and portabl es. Frequency range up to 12 kHz.
High sensitivity at 3000Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
Xl5
X8
X4
Rated impedance
X2 5
Q
15
3, 1
7,1
13,5
Resonance fr equency
140
140
140
140
Hz
3, 5
4, 9
6, 7
8, 7
55
55
55
55

Sweep voltage
Energy in airgap
Flux den sity
25
22, 7 Q
V
m]
Airgap height
Voice coil height
mm
3,9
3,2
mm
18
18
18
18
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0,1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
0,26
0,26
0 , 26
0 , 26
kg
Core diameter
The loudspeake r has a pape r cone and s urround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
October 1974
1 ~--~11 _
1191
AD4681/X.

LOUDSPEAKER
Baffle h ole
Dimensions (mm)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
154 117,5
max 0,2
1.-141
......--
1-
_!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
--
t ::
...
--
102max
Fig. 1
:h
54.5 59 ,5
max mox
! l
If
1..-smax
24
max
1. .
47.5max - -
7Z68220
1) Baft1e hol e and clea r ance depth required for cone movement at specified power
han dling capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSIO NS
1(0
1_
AD 46Sl/X4,
catal ogue number 2422 257 304 . 1
AD 4681/X8,
= stamped on
l oudspeaker magnet,
AD 468l/X15 , catalogue number 2422 257 304. 3

AD 4681/X25 , catalogue number 2422 257 304. 4
~ 2 for bul k packing'-')
.
L_ 6 for singl e unit packing
F REQU ENCY RESPONSE CURVE
Fig.2.
Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room , loudspeaker unmounted. Above
1000 Hz t he sensit ivity may be , over the widt h of one octave, m aximum 2 dB
lower than indicated.
- -- - - -
"') Minimum packing quantity 7 per unit.
!.,______1394~11 _~~~''
October 1974
AD4681/X.
LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
.;~V
I.- 1.---
~~
j..;'
J:
.X
0
....
L.ooo'
l...o'
(
I'
~I--"
11'
'
1/
I\t""- r--..
~
1- ~
'
'-
l"''o...
N
'
:I:
0
0
'1\f\
"'
"
0
0
N
~~
~~
1-- 1-1-- 1--
e.- 1--
October 1974
.
X
.............
r-...
"'"'
0
0
CD
<0
..:t
"'
Cl
~
N
CD
l _ _ _ _ _l _
NN
"'
l 'lS
DEVELOPMENT SAMPLE DATA
AD4682/X.
This information is derived from development samples made available

for evalUation. It does not fo rm part of our data handbook system and
does nOl necessarily imply that the device will go into production
3% x 6 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKERS
APPLICATION
For car and domestic radios, tape recorder s, portable record players and intercoms.
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedance
Vo ice coil resistance
X4
version
X 15
X8
X25
15
25
3, 1
7' 1
13,5
22,7
Power handl ing capac ity,

Joudspea ker unmounted
Operating power (sou nd level 90 dfl, 1 m)
Sweep
voltag~
(70 to 20 000 Hz)
Hz
HO to 13 000
Resona nce freque ncy
140
Hz
w
w
0, 7
3,5
4,9
Energy in a ir gap
6, 7
8, 7
55
V
m.J
Flux density
Air-gap height
mm
Voice coil height
4,4
Core diameter
Magnet mater ial
diameter
mass
Mass of loudspeaker
3,9
3,2
mm
18
mm
Ferroxdure
54
0, 1
mm
kg
0,25
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper r im a nd a foam plastic s urround.
October 1976
11
____ lj _
_.B~
97
::::::i
::::::l
3i x 6 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER
AD4682/ X.
LOUDSPEAKERS
Dimensions (mm)
155
Baffle hole
140
- 54.2 59,2
max max
max 0,2 0,5
11
,___ _ 800,2 _ __
.......
2mm
11
+-5,2
1--- - - - 95max - - - -- .1
27max
, . _ 51 ma x - . .
7Z7Son
Fig.l
1) Cl earance depth required for cone movement at the specified power handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection .
AV AI LABLE VERSIONS
~
AD4682/X4,
AD4682/X8,
AD4682/Xl5,
AD4682/X25,,
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
number
number
number
number
2422
2422
2422
2422
257
257
257
257
306. 1
306. 2
306. 3
306. 4
f.---
(0 = stamped on loudspeaker magnet,

2 = for bulk packing"')
L__ 6 = for singl e unit packing

according to IEC268-5, par. 4. 4.
Curve c: 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion, measured at the operating power of 0, 7 W in
anechoic room. Loudspeaker front mounted on IEC baffle.
*)Minimum packing quantity 7 per unit.
139H
August 1976
AD4682/X.
3~ x 6 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER

LOUDSPEAKERS
0
('J
C"l
......
~~---
.::s:
0
..-
,)
"'
......
f"
<: IJ
I-,.
I"'-~
r-....
~ ......
/
1/
I
0
0
L[)
11
0
0
('J
~~~
I\. r-....
"0
u,....-: ~
........
.......
f-;::
0
0
..-
C"l
"0
.........
u
,, '
.......
........
........
...... ~'
I" ~'
.......
0
L[)
1'--.
--
r...... ........
'-........_
0
('J
..-
August 1976
Cl)
"0
.~
0
0
CO
I'-
lO
0
L[)
11
1399
AD4691/M.
11
11
APPLICATION
A full r ange loudspeaker with an e xtended frequenc y response up to 20 kHz. Due to absenc e of stray ticon a l s interpot magnetic field , this loudspeaker can be used for bl ack
and white as well as col our television sets.
TECHNICAL DATA
--
version
M4
MS
MI5
15
25
800
3,4
7, 1
13",5
22 , 7
600
Resonance frequency
135
135
135
135
135
Hz
2,8
5, 5
7, 1
40
39
39
39
39
39
mJ
0,8
0,8
Rated impedance
Power handling ca paci ty,

measured without fi lter
Sweep voltage
Energy in a irgap
F lux density
0,8
0 ,8
0,8
Airgap height
Voice coil he ight
3,9
3,2
Core di ame ter

Magnet m ater ial
dia meter
we ight
18
18
18
3
4
18
T ic omll
18
0,027
Ticonal
18
0 , 027
Ticonal
18
0, 027
Ticonal
18
0, 027
0 , 16
0, 16
0, 16
0, 16
::::::!
MSOO
M25
T
mm
5, 1
mm
.18
mm
Ticonal
18 mm
0, 027 kg
0, 16
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and s urround and a foam plast ic gasket on the flange.
October 1974
J_Qj,_ _ ____.
AD4691/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
Baffle hole
o~g
I
I
I
I
I
I
r--
I
154 117,5
max 0,2
-fI
--
I
I
I
I
...-
102max
Y+
-. I
32,2 59 ,5
max mOX
,___ _j
I
I
920,2
1..-141
If
/_5max
24
m ox
1. . .
----51 ,3 ma x -
7 Z68 219
Fig. 1
. 1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the spec ified power
handling capacity.
11102
October 1974
AD4691/M.
LOUDSPEAKER
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
AD469 1/M4,
r---( 1 =stamped on loudspeaker m agnet ,

not to be us ed for ordering)
catalogue number 2422 256 306 . 2
AD469 1/M8 ,
1 ,.,
AD469 1/M l5 , catalogue number 2422 256 306 . 4
AD469 1/M25, catalogue number 2422 256 306 . 6

AD4691/M800, catalogue number 2422 256 306 . 3
~ 3 = for bulk packing ,;, )
L _ 7 =for s ingle unit packing

Fig. 2 Sound pressure meas ured in anechoic room, loudspeaker unmounted .
Above 1000Hz the sensitivity may be , over the width of one octave, maximum
2 dB lower than indicated .
Input power 50 mW
':') Min imum packing quantity 7 per unit.
AD4691/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
.,..
N
CO
CO
ID
.~
....
...... ......
0
N
J
N
::t:
..:.:
......
_,. I'"l
~""'
'
/
-
-E
(
""'""
''
......
~
1"-
"\
I\
~
''
r-.rr- r- ::::E
r- r- ..r- r- (1)
U)
- r- ..j
--
- -
0
0
N
'
0
0
"""
0
11'1
0
<{
0
N
13104
lXI
"'0
"'
GO
....
N
N
ID
N
1.0
AD4691/X.
11
11
x 6 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION
Due to absence of stray magnetic ticonal s interpot field, the l oudspeaker can be used in
black ru1d white as well as colour television sets.
High sensitivity at 3000 I-Iz . Frequency response up to 12 kHz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X4
_ Rated impedru1ce
X8
X15
X25
15
25
Voice coil resistru1ce
3,4
7,1
13,5
22 , 7
Resonance frequency
140
140
140
140
Hz
2,8
5,5
7, 1
39
39
39
39
mJ

measured without filte r ,
Sweep voltage
Energy in airgap
Flux density
0, 8
0,8
0, 8
0,8
Airgap height
mm
Voice coil height
3, 9
3,2
mm
18
18
18
18
mm
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Ticona l Ticonal Ticonal Ticona l

18
18
18
18
0,027
0,027
0,027
0,027
0, 16
0,16
0, 16
0 , 16
mm
kg
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and s urround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
______Dctober 197 4
11
---
--
AD4691/X.

LOUDSPEAKER
Baffle hole
Dimensions (mm)
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
lk ~
154 117,5
max 0,2
-. i
r-
32,2 59 ,5
max mox
I- --
-'
I
I
I
I
I
I
--
l.-1 41 : n
_j
1--
If
...
I
I
I
...
920,2
102max
Fig. 1
l.. smax
24
max
--
1.-
51,3max ~
7Z68219
handling capacity.
One tag is _indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AD 4691/X4,
catalogu~ number 2422 256 306 ~

AD 469 1/XS, catalogue number 2422 256 306.2

AD 4691/Xl5 , catalogue number 2422 256 306. 3
AD 4691/X25, catalogue number 2422 256 306 . 4
.
L 2 for bulk packing'')
6 for sin_gle unit packing
Fig.2.
Input power 50 mW
Above 1000Hz sensitivity may be, over the width of one octave, maximum
':' ) Minimum packing quantity 7 per_unit.
!3106
October 197
AD4691/X.

LOUDSPEAKER
..::t
ell
ell
"'r-N
::;;,o
~
......
I)
IJ
--
11 ~
I\
~
['..
~ IJ
"
!'-...
.....
"'b()
:I:
- iZ
11'1
1\
''"'
0
N
I'~
f-- I-f-- f--
I-- I-I-- I-I-- I-f-- f--
X
..............
0 ')
<D
0
11'1
..j
0
<t
0
N
0
.....
October 1974
m
"'0
N
0>
11
N
CID
r--
"'
11'1
11
Il l 07
~~~~:~l~l~d~v~ ~o!dev~o!~.!:~~~ ma?.a~l~!

I
JY7
AD4692/X.
for eValuation. It does not fonn part of ou r da ta handbook system and

does not necessa rily imply that the device will go into production
x 6 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKERS
APPLICATION
For colour television sets. Low stray field and high sensitivity .
::l
---==
TECHNICAL DATA
X4
Rated impe dance
version
X15
X8
8
15
25
3,1
7,1
13,5
22 , 7
80 to 13 000
Hz
140
Hz
Resonance fre quency

measured without filter"
Operating power (sound level 90 dB , 1 m)

2,8
5, 5
Energy in air gap
7, 1
39
Flux density
1\ir gap height
Voice coil height
X25
Core diameter
Mas s of lou dspeaker
mJ
0,8
T -
mm
3, 2
3,9
Magnet material
diameter
mass
mm
18
mm
T i conal
18
0 , 027
mm
kg
0 , 14
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper rim and a foam plastic gasket.
August 1976
13109
3"~ x 6inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER
AD4692/X.
LOUDSPEAKERS
Dimensions (mm)
155
m ox
m ox
so0,2- - -...
-5.2
1.-- - - - 95max - - -- ...l
27max
.,....__ 54,8 max------+- n7so1s
Fig.1
1) Clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power handling
capacity .
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
AD4692/X4,
AD4692/X8,
AD4692/X15,
AD4692/X25,
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
oa<ioi!"e
number
number
number
nombe<
2422
2422
2422
2422
256
256
256
256
r-:--
308. 1
308.2
308. 3
(0
stamped on l oudspeaker magnet,

308~
2 = for bulk packing *)

6 = for singl e unit packing
Curve b: Sound pres su re measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker mounted on baffle

according ..to IEC268-5 , par. 4. 4.
Curve c: 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion , measured at the operating power of 1 W in
anechoic room. Loudspeaker front mounted on IEC baffle .
.,..,.-::-;:--,----
*) Minimum packing quantity 7 per unit.
131 10
August 1976
AD4692/X.
3! x 6 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER

LOUDSPEAKERS
l.--- ~
/
)
[S
!.- 1--
ll"'p
f'.
--
t-
I< !::::>
I-I)
/
1\
N
I
0
0
U"l
Jr11
.oil"'
1
...
r-....
""'""
... v
"
.......
~ ~
0
0
N
0
CO
0
0
!"--.
j--....
........ ........
r-..::. t-::.:
0
CJl
17v
~
""-::
August 1976
...
['-..
"'Cl
1/
"'Cl
ro
bC
~
j!/
r-... 1--
0
0
--
....... j--....
r--..
- - --
r- r-:
0
<D
U"l
r--
r-.... .......
0
U"l
1 _~_11 ~
B lll ~--
1-
AD4890/X .
4 x 8 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKERS
APPLICATION
I
For colour television sets. Low stray field, low resonance frequency, high sensitivity in
bass region.
TECHNICAL DATA
X4"
Rated impedance
version
XIS
X8
3,4
7, l
ss

Resonance frequency
Operating power (sound level 90 dB , 1
m>
13,5 22, 7
to 13
cfoo
Hz
110
Hz
w
w
0, 7
4
5, 7
Energy in air gap
7,8
10
0,8
Air gap height
mm
3
4, 5
3,9
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Mass of loudspeaker
3,2
18
Ticonal
18
0,027
0 , 23
V
m]
39
Flux density
Voice coil height
X25
25
15
mm
mm
mm
kg
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper rim and a foam plastic gasket.
August 1976
Bl13
AD4890/X.

LOUDSPEAKERS
Dimens ions (mm)
210
max
197
32,5
max
170
max 0.5
60
max
- i - 2 mm0
-..
!--max
5.2
--+-
31 max
I...._
J._s7.8max--
.,-~ ~
Fig.!
1
) Clearance depth required for cone move ment at the specified power handling capacity.

AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r - (0 = stamped on loudspeaker magnet,

AD4890/X4,
AD4890/X8,
AD4890/Xl5,
AD4890/X25,
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
number
number
number
number
2422
2422
2422
2422
256
256
256
256
307. 1
307. 2
307. 3
307. 4
1--
2 =for bulk packing*)
L _ 6 = for single unit packing

Curve c: 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion , measured at the operating power of 0, 7 W in
13 11 4
August 1976
AD4890/X.

LOUDSPEAKERS
--
LJ')
<I)
e--
..... ~
c--
I- .-
...... ~
('J
I
~
0
'
.....
,./
I
.......
,,......
......
~ ;:
-(
I= >
.-
r-
1-= ~ ~
>
I
}
'
I
0
0
l[)
-~
I
.D
,_
v
V
0
0
('J
'
"0
u,..-
.......
/
.....
""""
.,.
--
........ vf--
f.-
~~~
::.0
0
M
"0
' '
'
r---.
r-...;
l[)
'
r--
~~
'
''
...
"'
.......
0
('J
0
0
August 1976
0
(J)
a:>
0
lD
0
l[)
I.
AD5060/Sq.
11
11
5 inch HIGH POWER SQUAWKER LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
For the reproduction of audio frequencies from 500 to 4500 Hz with very low distortion in multi-way high-fidelity loudspeaker systems in accordance with DI'N45500 . The loudspeaker has an excellent spherical radiation pattern . Rated frequency range 500 to 5000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
Sq8
Sq4
Rated impedance
:::::l
3,4
6, 4 . Q
Resonance frequency .
210
210
Hz
40
w
w
V
V

measured with filter: 72 1-1F -2,1 mH (4Q)
361-'F -4 ,5 mH (BQ)
40
Operating power
Sweep voltage
frequency range : 400- 5000Hz
filter high pass : 72 iJF- 2,1 mH (4Q)
36 iJF - 4, 5 mH (8Q)
3,5
Energy in air gap

Flux density
140
140
0,93
0 ,93
Air-gap height
mm
6,8
mm
25
25
mm
FXD
72
0,23
FXD
72
0,23
mm
kg
0,8
0, 8
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
mJ
T
6,8
Voice coil height
Mass of loudspeaker
kg
The loudspeaker has a rubber surround and a sealed pot; no acoustic isolation r equired .
Connectiop. to the loudspeaker is by means of 6, 3 mm {0 , 25 inch) Fastons or soldering.
October 1976
,, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 11
--
Bll 7
AD5060/Sq.
5 inch HIGH POWER SQUAWKER

LOUDSPEAKER
2min 1 '
- 1._
096
11
107max
-l__l___
,o
_.9__
max
1190.2
1 - - - - - - 128,4max ---------<~ 1
107max
--------<~ 1 7Z61795.1
Fig.l
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth r equired for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
(0 = s tamped on loudspeaker magnet

not to be used for ordering )
AD5060/Sq4, c atalogue number 2422 257 354. 1
AD5060/Sq8, catalogue number 2422 257 354 . 2

6 = for s ingl e unit packing
(see Fig. 2)
Curve b: Sound pressure measure d in half free field at operating power of 4 W in

anechoic room, l oudspeaker mounted on l EC baffle.
Curve c : 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion , measured at the operating power of 4 W in
anechoic room .
'-') Minimum packing quantity 6 per unit.
R1 1R
_ll~--~11
October 1976
AD5060/Sq.

LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
~ 1--"
~ :;::.
:r
.X
0
<lli
~
IJ
cp
~
\
:/
. . .v
1~
I
.a
N
"'C
lr ~
""'
CT
(J)
...... ......
\=........
......
""'~o...
l{)
..... .....
...... ..... ....
<{
"'
0
0
"'
0
0
: r-
-......~--..
'
..... .....
...-..
-,:_
"",-o ',
u, I
, !.D
- r-- 0
/"
...........
.~
N
:r
0
0
I'
r-....
"'
"'.::t
-az
0
0
I--
... ,~"
I.J
--
J'
r-- r-I-- r-- I--
('::
"'
~--
r-...
0
N
0
October 1974
en
N
CD
....
N
<D
"'
"'
13119
j:I;
AD5061/M.
11
11
5 inch HIGH POWER FULL RANGE LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
A full range loudspeaker for s m all sealed enclosures of m aximum 7 litres a nd

s uitable for use in bookshelves enclosures .
Exte nded frequency respon s e 75 - 20 kHz in 7 litres enclosure s .
TECHNICAL DATA
version
M4
Rated impeda nce

Vo ice coil re s is t ance
a l ~o
MS
4
3, 4
Res onance fr equency
85
85
Hz
Power ha ndling capacity

m eas ured without fil ter .
loudspea ker unmoun ted
10
10
Opera ting power
Sweep volt age
3. 2 '
4. 5
E nergy in a irgap
127
12 7
mJ
o. 87
o. 87
6,5
,6 , 5
mm
25
25
mm
Fxd
72
0. 26
Fxd
72
0 , 26
mm
kg
0,665
0 , 665
Flux de ns ity
Airgap height
Voice coil height
Core dia m eter
Magnet m aterial
di ameter
weight
The loud s peaker has a textile surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
October 1974
T
mm
kg
---
AD5061/M.
5 inch HIGH POWER FULL RANGE

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
----1--
75
107
ma x
max
7Z68214 .1
_..,/.-4,95 max
-24,4max l.- - 5416 max--
1.------------121ma x
Fig . 1
1) Baffle hole and clearanc e depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r1,
(0 =stamped on l oudspeaker magnet

AD 5061 /M4. catalogue number 2422 25 7 355. 1

AD 5061/MS, catalogue number 2422 257 355 . 2
t--------2 for bulk packing':')
'----- - - 6 for single unit packing
Curve b : Sound pressure measured in a nec hoic room at input power of 2 W.

Loudspeaker mounted on IEC baffle.
'~)Minimum packing qu ant ity 6 per unit.
13122
October 1974
AD5061/M.
LOUDSPEAKE R
-11
[";;;
.oil
~~~'~+-+-~~-+-+-+~~~+-+-~~-+-+-+~~8
\~
~~~~~~~~~-~~j:t=t=t=~~==t=t=t~==t=~~
I'.
October 1974
BJ:,n
l. AD5061/Sq.
5 inch HIGH POWER SQUA WKER LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION
For the reproduction of audio frequencies from l:lOO to 5000 Hz with very low di s torti on
in mul ti-way high-fidelity loudspeaker sys tems in acc o rdance with DI N45500. The loudspeaker has an excellent spherica l radiation pa ttern.
TECH ICAL DATA
,Rated imped:mcc
version
Sq4
Sg 8
:::::l
~2
3,4
~~
Resonance frequency
680
Hz
Rate d frequency range
1300 tO 5000
Hz

measured with filter: 24!-l F - il , -1 mH
12!-lF - 0 , 8 mH
loudspeaker un mounted
10
w
w
10
Operating power
Sweep voltoge
fr equency r ange : .300-5000 Hz
high pass filt e r: 24 !lF - 0, 4 mH
12 !lF - 0 , 8 mH
Energy in a ir gap
F l ux den-sity
Air- gap height
Voice coil height
Co r e di a meter
Magnet mate rial
dia meter
mass
Mass of lou ds peake r
3, 5
5
140
V
V
mJ
0 ,93
5
mm
6 ,8
mm
25
mm
Ferroxdure
72
0 , 23
mm
kg
0 ,8
kg
The loudspea ker has a sealed frame and a textile r im.

Connection to the lou dspeaker is by means of 2, 8 mm (0 , 11 inch) Fastons or solde ring.
Octobe r I 976
Dl25
AD5061/Sq .

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
1TI
'""'
I
I
I
I
I
--
iI
r---1
--
76
96 12 9
max max ma
I
I
I
I
I
.L
7Z75164
1-4------ 116,5 0,05 - - - - - - 1
'--5max
20,1
max
I_
-49,5max -
Fig.l
1
) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling ea pacity . .

r----- (0 = stamped on lou dspeaker magnet
AD506 l /Sq4, catalogue number 2422 257 354 ! 5

AD506l/Sq8 , catalogue number 2422 257 354 . 6
not to be' used for or der ing)
r---

L___ 6 = for single unit packing
'
Curve b: Sound pressure measured in half free field at operating power of 2 W in

anechoic r oom, loudspeaker mounted on IEC baffle.
Curve c : 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion, measure d at the opera ting power of 2 W in
anechoic room.
Bf26
October 1976
AD5061/Sq.

I
LOUDSPEAKER
L.if"
- -..,.
.JJ
tl
~I)
L{)
L)
'-....
..,....
..
[7
::.
,_
'
"' ""'~
---
t>
..... -~~ .....

F-
" ""'r-...
'I'-~
f'..,
I-
..0
I
0
0
L{)
,-~
1'-
. .-- t-- - ..
,.,
1'-I'-
"0'
I"
--
i'...
"
t-
r-..... ~
f-..
('J
0
0
.......
0
L{)
0
('J
0
0
0
0'>
CO
0
tD
0
L{)
127
DEVELOPMENT SAMPLE OAT A
AD5081/M.
This information is derived from development samples ma de ava ilable

for evaluation. It does not fo nn part of our dar.a handbook s ys tem and
does not necessarily impl y that the device will go into production
5 inch ROUND MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKERS
APPLICATION
Double cone loudspeaker for car and domestic radios, tape recorders, porta ble r ecord
players and intercoms.
TECHNICAL DATA
M4
Rated impedance
version
M8
M15
M25
15
25
3,4
7, 1
13,5
22 , 7
Rated fr equency range

Resonance frequency
Power handling ca pa city ,
measured without filt er,
Ope rating power (sound level 90 dB , 1 m)
Sweep voltage (70 to 20 000 Hz )
Hz
70 to 20 000
3, 5
135
Hz
0, 7
4, 9
Energy in air gap
6, 7
8, 7
55
mJ
Flux density
Air-gap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
ma s s
Mass of loudspeaker
mm
3
4, 4
3, 2
3, 6
18
Ferroxdure
53
0, 1
0 , 25
mm
mm
mm
kg
kg
The loudspeake r has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
8129
AD5081/M.
5 inch ROUND MEDIUM POWER

LOUDSPEAKERS
Dimensions (mm)
105,6 120
max 0,2
7Z15016
1 . - - - - 0940,3 ----11
1 - - - - 0970,3 - - -- 1
Fig.!
handling capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
AD508l/M4, catalogue number 2422
AD5081/M8, catalogue number 2422
AD508l/Ml5, catalogue number 2422
AD508l/M25,
''"'''""' nmnbe< 2422
r--
257 357 . 5
257 357. 6
257 357.7
257

m~
2 = for bulk packing*)

Curve b: Sound pressure measured in anechoic room , loudspeaker mounted on baffle
according to IEC268-5, par . 4. 4.
Curve c: 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion, measured at the operating power of 0 , 7 W in
13 1:30
11
Aug!!st 1976
AD5081/M.
I
(X)
""
0
N
1.--"v
en
.;:t
c-N
c--
LOUDSPEAKERS
./
I
.:;{.
f...
f
I-
-,.
li)
'
"""'I
==
......,
'
)
)
I
0
0
li)
I"
1- f.-
_o)
, '
/
0
0
N
I
I
'
~~
"0
~
7
,u
'\
rr
0
0
........ .......
''
-f-
I
I
... ...
~~
--- u
"""0
...
_
... ...
li)
~""--
.........
........
r-.
...
---
0
N
I
0
0
~
August 1976
oil
~
ro
"'0
(]l
CO
1:'-
(!)
0
li)
11
131 :n
DEVELOPMENT SAMPLE OAT A
AD5081/X.
This infonnation is derived .from development samples made available

for ~aluation. It does not form part of our data handbook system and
does not necessarily imply that the device will go into production
5 inch ROUND MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKERS

APPLICATION
For car an d domestic radios, tape recorder s, por tabl e record pl ayer s and int e rcom s. :
TECHNICAL DATA
X4
Rated impedance
version
XIS
X8
8
15
25
3,4
7, l
13,5
22 , 7
Hz
60 to 14 000
Resonance frequenc y
Operating power (sound level 90 dB, l m)
X25
140
Hz
w
w
0, 7
3,5
4,9
6, 7
8, 7 -
ss
Energy in air gap
m]
Flux density
Air-gap height
Voice coil height
Mass of lou dspeaker
mm
3
4, 4
3,2
3,9
Core diamete r
Magne t material
diameter
mass
mm
18
mm
Ferroxdure
53
0, 1
mm
kg
0,25
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper rim and a foam plastic surround.
October 1976
11
-=
AD5081/X.

LOUDSPEAKERS
Dimensions (mm)
5,2:!:0,1
'
60
105,6 120
max max 0,2
7Z75016
1---- 094.:!:0.3 - - - - .q
1---- - 0970,3 - - - - 1
-
31,7max
..__ 48,5 max __...
Fig.l
handling capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
AD5081/X4, catalogue number 2422

AD5081/X8 , catalogue number 2422
AD5081/X15, catalogue numbe r 2422
AD5081/X25,
'"""'""' nmnbe< 2422
r----
257 357.1
257 357 . 2
257 357 . 3

257 357b

according to IEC268-5 , par. 4. 4.
Q:urve c: 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion , measured at the operating power of 0, 7
w in
13134
August 1976
AD5081/X. ,

LOUDSPEAKERS
0
N
...... ~ V
1-
I
..X:
17
If
Lfl
1'- 1- ~
,\
~
1..,-
r-.... ...... ~
~
_. ~
1-- 1--
::::
N
1-- .......
........
I
0
0
Lfl
I/
[/
.0)
'
v- ~ v f/
vv- ~v
"0
.......
17
I'..
August 1976
l-':
0
a:>
Lfl
t- t-
"'
0
~":.:,
(j)
-~
"'- !""'I !'-...
"0
"~
t---
0
0
N
t-:::.: ~
'
t- tr-.;;:
t-
r.:: r.::. r.::.
0
(!)
0
N
0
Lfl
13135
;:::
AD5780/M.
11
11

APPLICATION
A full range loudspeaker for car and domestic radios , tape recorders and portable
record players .
Due to its dual-cone construction, this loudspeaker has an extended frequency response
up to 20 kHz.
TECHNICAL OAT A
M4
version
M15
MS
M25
15
25
3,4
7, 1
13, 5
22,7
Resonance frequency
100
100
100
100
Hz
2; 8
5, 5
8, 7
Rated impedance

Sweep voltage
Energy in air. gap
Flux density
53
53
53
53
Q,98
0,98
0, 98
0,98
V
mJ
T
Air-gap height
mm
Voice coil height
3,9
3,2
mm
Core diameter
18
18
18
Magnet material
diameter
mass
18 , mm
FXD
53
0, 1
FXD
53
0,1
FXD
53
o. 1
FXD
53
0, 1
mm
kg
Mass of loudspeaker
0,32
0 , 32
0, 32
0,32
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange .
October 1976
Rl:n
:::
--
AD5780/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimension s (mm)
182,5
mox
-_:.. 1.._5,3 ma x
-+ 33,Sma xl.._
I..-----132,Smax - - - -..1
...._ 57max __.
7Z68217.1
Fig.!
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a r ed mark for in-phase connection .
AD 5780/M4 ,
/ ( 0 =stamped on loudspeaker magnet,

AD 5780/M8 ,
1_
AD 57 80/MlS , catalogue number 2422 257 361.7
c2
AD 5780/M25 , catalogue number 2422 257 361.8
"
for bulk packing')
6 for singl e unit packing

Fig. 2 .
Input power 50 mW
Sound pressu:re measured in anechoic room , loudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000Hz the sensitivity may be, over the width of one octave , maximum
'~ ) Minimum packing quantity 4 per unit.
131:3 8
,_ _ _o- ..
c _tober 1974
AD5780/M.
x 7 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER

LOUDSP EAKE R
1..' ~
"'
CiD
"'.....N
CO
0
N
...
loo""
:r
:.0:
0
"'I
~
I<
111
"' ~
i'l
1,... l,...o-
......
" '--
'
'
"
f- ff-- f-
.........
f-- f--
CO
f- f-
0
0
f-- f--
f-- f--
1\
"~
..... loo..
!".
r--
""
LC')
Cl
<{
0
N
0
.....
'
October 1974
al
"C
N
C7>
11
N
CO
....
"'
""
11
81:39
AD5780/X.
11

APPLICATION
For car and domestic radios , tape recorders and portable record players.
High sensitivity at 4000 Hz. Frequency range up to 10 kHz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
XIS
X8
X4
Rated impedance
X25
15
25
Q
Q
3, 4
7, 1
13,5
22, 7
Resonance frequency
llS
llS
llS
llS
Hz
3,4
3, 5
4,8
6, 1
55
55
55
55
0,98
3

measured without filter ,
Sweep voltage
Energy in airgap
V
mJ
0,98
0,98
0,98
Airgap height
Voice coil height
3,9
3, 2
mm
18
mm
Flux density
T
mm
18
18
18
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
0,32
0,32
0,32
0 , 32
kg
Core diameter
The loudspeake r has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
October 1974
11
8141
AD578Q/X.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
182,5
max
..... l....
s,3max
--.. 33,5maxl....
.._ 57max --
I--- - - - 132,Smax - - - -..1
7Z68217.1
Fig. 1
handling capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
I
I.
AD 5780/X4,
AD 5780/XS,
(0
= stamped on
loudspeaker magnet,
AD 5780/X15, catalogue number 2422 257 361.3
c2
AD 5780/X25 , catalogue number 2422 257 361. 4
fo r bulk packing*)
6 for single unit packing
P ig.2.
lnput power 50 mW
t.') Minimum packing quantity 4 per unit.
Bl42
11
_ _ _ II
October 1974
AD5780/X.

LOUDSPEAKER
CO
Cl)
..,
V
1.-o"'
Cl)
.....
~
1-
,_
0
N
~~
:r
.X
0
~
"'
v j..)
!"-.. !'-...
r\
f'
1..... ~
.... .....
~
........
'-
1"\.
:r
0
0
...,
\.
~
f\
0
0
N
I\
1'f-- f-f-- f-f-- f--
f-- f-f-- f-f-- f--
-X
0
0
r--... ......
CO
"""'0
...,
['
Ln
0
<{
0
N
0
~
October 1974
"0
N
0>
11
N
CO
r--
..,
""
11
13143
AD5790/M.
11
11
APPLICATION
Due to abs ence of s tray magnetic ticonal sinterpot field, the loudspeaker can be used in
black and white as well as colour television sets . High sensitivit y at 3000Hz.
TECHN ICAL DATA
version
M8
M15
15
3,4
7, l
13,5
Resonance frequency
100
100
100
Hz
2, 8
5, 5
M4
Rated impedance

Sweep voltage
Energy in airgap
Flux density
39
39
39
0,8
0,8
0, 8
m]
Airgap height
m1n
Voice coil he ight
3,9
3,2
mm
18
18
18
mm
Ticonal
18
0,027
Ticonal
18
0 , 027
Ticonal
18
0,027
mm
kg
0 , 22
0 , 22
0 , 22
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
weight
kg
The. loudspeaker has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
October 197 4
Bl45
AD5790/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
-.
182,5
- 32,5
m ox
m ox
_+
-+- 1... 5,3max
1------132,5 max
-+-
------<~1
33,5 maxi
-s1.Smax-
7Z68216 .1
Fig. 1
handling capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r-- (0 = stamped on the loudspeaker magnet,

1
Not to be used for ordering)
AD5790/M4, catalogue number 2422 256 360. 1

t=

Fig. 2 Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspe\ ke:r unmounted.

Above 1000Hz the sensitivity may be, over the width~f one octave, maximum
1
2 dB lower than indic ated .
\
Input power 50 mW
\
I
13146
October
a97 4
AD5790/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
"'
CO
CO
ID
0
N
I
.:Jt.
0
N
r-
1/
~~
)~
~
\~
"""""
"""""
"
\.
:I:
0
0
1\.
' ' 1\
"'
...
'
'~
'
I-- 1-1-- I-I-- 1-I-- 1-I-- 1--
1-- I--
0
0
1">1..
"'-
0
N
'
.......
..........
~
0)
["--
"'
L{')
0
<{
N
0
October 197 4
ID
"'0
"'
N
CO
N
ID
"'
Bl47
.~
AD5790/X.
11
11
. APPLICATION
Due to absence of stray magnetic Ticonal sinterpot field, the loudspeaker can be use d in
black and white as well as colour television sets . High sensitivity at 3000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X8
X4
Rated impedance
3, 4
7,1
Resonance frequency
Power handling capacit y,
measured withoot filter ,
Operat ing power
Sweep voltage
' 115
Hz
0, 7
2, 45
Energy in air gap
Flux den sity
0,8
Air - gap hei ght
mm
Voice coil height
3,9
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Mas,s. of l oudspeaker
V
in]
39
mm
18
mm
T iconal
18
0, 027
mm
kg
0,22
kg
The loudspeaker has a treated paper .su rround and a foam pl astic gasket on the flange.
October 1976
11
B149
-:
AD5790/X.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dime ns ion s (mm)
--. \
182,5
max
- 32,5
max
_+
1)
,+~o
~sL .
'
max ,
_. 33,5max l..
--61.5max-
-----1100,2 - - -
------132 ,5 max
-..
------<~1
1. . . 5,3
. I
-160-
Fig . l
1
) .Baffle hol e and clearance depth r equ ire d for cone movement at the specified powe r
handling capacity .
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in - pha:;e connection.
AV AILABLE VERSIONS
AD5790/X4. cata l ogue number 2422 256 360.2

AD5790/X8. cata l ogue number 2422 256 360 . 5
(0
= stamped on
lou dspeaker ma gnet ,
not to be use d fo r orderin g)
2 for bulk packing* )

FREQUENCY RESPONSE CURVES( :;ee Fig. 2)
Curve b : Sound pressu re measured in anec hoic room at input powe r of 2, 2 W.

Lou dspeaker mounted on IEC baffle .
Cu rve c: 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion , measured at input power of 2, 2 W in anechoic
room. Loudspeaker mounted on IEC baffle .
13150
October 1976
AD5790/X.

LO UDSPEAKER
~
~ 1---'
N
('J
~~
a>
CD
I.D
I
.Y
<-
./
<
L[)
""'
........
~~
<~
........
'
('J
<::::: )
...... ......
<
IC:::
le:::::
I,-)
I
0
0
f'...
L[)
..D)
l/
c::::
1-- 1--
v
...- :.,...-
0
0
"0
t)
('J
.......
--
......
"0
t)
'
........
1"---
!'...
,
-t
'........
,-
',
-'
''
,,
0
0
-- -- .r---..
" I'
, ,
'
---
L[)
-- - -
0
('J
c:i
0
01
CO
October 1976
eo
iL:
0
lD
0
L[)
Bl51
AD6980/M.
11
11
6 x 9 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKER,

APPLICATION
A full range loudspeaker for car and domestic radios, tape recorders and record players.
Due to its dual-cone construction , this loud speaker has a n extended frequency response
up to 20kHz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
M4
Rated impedance
M8
4
Voice coil. resistance
3, 4
7, 1
Resonance frequency
77
77
Hz
3, 5
4. 9

Sweep voltage
Energy in a irgap
Flux density
Airgap height
Voice coil height
53
53
0 ,98
0 , 98
V
mJ
T
mm
3,9
mm
18
18
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
53
0. 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
Weight of loudspe.aker
0 , 36
0,36
kg
Core dia meter
The loudspeaker has a papet s urround a nd a foam plastic gasket on the flange .
October 1974
B153
AD6980/M.
6 x .9 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER

LOUDS PEAKER
Dimens ions (mm)
Baffle hole
3min11
_.. 1-
R144
'~+
~
t
54,2 72 ,5
max
--
max
7Z68221
1-
----
117,50.2
_I
_.. j_5 3mox

-- 43,4,mox l-+-
160,6mox - - - - - - <.. 1
-s6,75mox_.
F ig.!
1) Baffle hole a nd clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capa.c ity.
One tag is indicat'ed by a red m a rk for in-ph as e connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
~
1~
(0 = stamped on loudspeaker magnet

AD 6980/M4, catalogue number 2422 257 39 1. 3

AD 6980/MS, catal ogue num ber 2422 257 391.4
f-~--- 2 for bulk packing '~)
' - - - - - 6 for single unit packing
F ig . 2. Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room , loudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000Hz the se ns itivity m ay be . over the width of one octave, max imum
2 dB l ower than indicated.
!) Mi nimum packing qu ant ity 3 per unit.
- - - - HLE.<i
October 1974
AD6980/M.

LOUDS PEAKER
0
N
....
j,...ooo
J.l'
0:
c;;
;;;
t~
"'.....N
.:.:
C)
~
.,.
!'\
~
~I>
'~
::;j
::;j
l"o...
I/
it
' I""K
N
N
I
0
0
"'
1\
I\
.
f-- f--
f-- +--
0
CO
i - +--
.....
" ..... ~ .....
i - +-
N
0
0
0
1,.
--
I- +-
'
0
0
N
lD
I-
"'C
October 197 4
"'
~t--
<(
ID
0
N
en
N
CO
.....
"'
"'
.11
8 155
.~
""
AD6980/X.

APPLICATION
For c ar and domestic radios , t ape recorders a nd record players. High sensitivity.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X4
Rated impedance
X8
4
3. 4
7. 1
Resonance frequency
90
90
Hz
3.5
4,9

Sweep volt age
Energy in airgap
Flux density
Airgap height
Voice coil height
53
53
0.98
0,98
m]
mm
3,9
mm
18
mm
Magnet m aterial
diameter
weight
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
0,36
0,36
kg
di amete:~;
18
Core
....
The loudspea ker has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
October 1974
11~-~~11 _
815 7 _ _ __
AD6980/X.
x 9 inch OVAL MEDIUM POWER

LO UDSPEAKER
Baffle hole R
Dimensions (mm)
144
'
R~6~ - ' . ,tg

. ~It
220--=r-
233,6
54,2 72,5
max
m ox
---
max
7Z68221
c:::::
F ig. 1
,,.__ _ _ 160,6max
-+- --s,3max
-+- 43,4 maxi.-4-66,75max-+-
------<~ '
1). Baffle hole a nd clearance depth required for cone m ovement at the s pecified power
ha ndling capacity.
One tag is indic ated by a red m ark for in -phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
Loudspeaker with foam plastic gasket on fl ange :
r-:--- (0 = stamped on l oud s peaker m agnet

AD 6980/X4 . catal ogue number 24 22 257 391. 1
n ot to be used for ordering).
AD 6980/XS, catal ogue number 2422 257 391. 2
1------c- 2 for
bulk p acking ':')
L___ 6 for single unit p acking

Fig. 2 . Input power SO mW

Sound pressure me a sured in a nechoic room. loud speaker unmounted.
Above 1000Hz the sensitivity m ay be, over the w idth of one octave, m aximum
2 dB lower than indic ated.
~' )Minimum
lll_58
packing quantity 3 p er unit .
October 1974.
AD6980/X.

LO UDSPEAKE R
N
0>
CX)
' <D
N
....
-- -- _,
,...I-'
--::.
1-
0
N
...
:r
.
0
)
,..._
Ll>
j....o ~
f'. ~
<~
--"'
==
~~
~)
!oo..
...
0
0
Ll>
.:r
"~
-~
I\
~
-
- - - -- - -
.
X
0
0
N
'
0
0
'
............
0
CO
!-.....
0)
(0
0
<(
....... .......
....... ......
"'
'
N
0
October 1974
m
"'C
N
CID
....
N
"'
........
U'l
--~~~n
~ls 9
______
AD7060 / W.
7 inch HIGH POWER WOOFER LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
For high fidelity reproduction in sealed acoustic enclosures.

Maximum enclosure volume 7 litres;maximu"m recommended cross - over frequency
3000Hz .
Rated frequency range 40 to 3 000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
W4
WB
4,3
45
45
Hz
30
Rated impedance
Voice coil resistal}ce
Resonance frequency

mounted in 7 1 sealed enclosure
30
Operat ing powe r
6,3
6,3
Sweep voltage
frequency range 35 - 5000 Hz
3,8
5,3
Energy in air gap
135
140
0,87
0,93
mm
11
11
mm
25
25
mm
Flux density
Air- gap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
m]
Magnet material
diameter
mass
FX D
72
0,26
FX D
72 mm
0,26 .kg
Mass of loudspeaker
0,68
0,68
kg
The l oudspeaker has a rubber surround.

Connection to the loudspeaker by means of 6, 3 mm (0, 25 inch) Fastons or sol dering .
11
B161
AD7060/W.
7 inch HIGH POWER WOOFER

LOUDSPEAKER
D1menswns (mm)
h c---,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0141 11
I~
--
--
I
I
I
I
I
~a
I
I
l j
73,5 94 14
ma x max m ax
7l70289
1... 8,1max
33,9 max i ~
42,7 max
- 4 - 6 7,Sma x--+
1--- - - - - 155,2 max - - - - --+ 1
--
Fig. I
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth r e quire d for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity .
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
~
1
(1
= stamped
on loudspeake r magnet,
AD7060 / W-, catalogue number 2422 257 379 . 1

AD7060/W8, catalogue number 2422 257 379.2
L_
L_

FREQUE CY RESPONSE CURVES (see Fig. 2)
Curve b: Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, input at a n operating power of 6, 3 W.

Loudspeaker mounted in seal e d 80 1 enclosu re, filled with 1 kg of glass wool.
Curve c : 2nd and 3rd harmonic dis tortion, measured at the operating power of 6, 3-W
in anechoic room, loudspeaker mounted in seal ed 80 1 enclosure with 1 kg of
gl ass wool.
Bin2
October 97n
AD7060 / W.
7 inch HIGH POWER WOOFE R

LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
0
0
CD
0
....
....N
17'
!..--'
~
v .....
l)
1<:
1\
i\
...,I/
[)
,' 1-'
/
-~
11
"
0
0
Lll
Lll
-::t
.Cl
~~
ul
1\
"' ~
('),.. ... ,... h ..,. ._ 10/t:..
-o
a>
11
, 1- '
- ,.,
-o
V
,,
0
0
<.0
CD
,
1\
<t
N
0
0
0
1\
['
1--1--
0
LO
~ I/
1-- ~
.,V
~
'- 1-'- '- ~
1-- 1--
:r:
, , !--
0
LO
'
1\..
hi
N
CO
,,
'
\rt---.1--t-......
0
N
o.D
Lll
11
BJ63
AD7062/M.
11
11
7 inch .HIGH POWER FULL RANGE LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
For high fidelity reproduct ion in seal ed acous ti c enclos ures . Maximum e nclos ure vol ume
7 litres . High power ha ndling capac ity with very low distortion .
TECHNICAL DATA
M4
ve rsion
M8
Voice coil r es istan ce
4,3
Resonance frequency
45
45
Hz
Power ha ndling capacity,

measured with out filter,
mounted in 7 l sca led enclosure
30
30
Sweep vo ltage
3,8
5,3
Energy in a ir. ga p
135
140
0 ,87
0 , 93
Rated impedance
Operating power
Flux density
Air- gap he ight
Vo ice coil he ight
Core
diame~er
n
n
V
mJ
T
mm
11
11
mm
25
25
mm
Magnet material
cliamete1
mass
FXD
72
0,26
FXD
72
0,26
111111
Mas s of loudspe a ker
0,68
0,68
kg
kg
The loudspeaker ha s a r ubber s urround and a double cone.

Connection to the l oudspeaker by means' of 6, 3 mm (0 , 25 inch). Fastons or soldering.
.::
-"'"'
AD7062/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
r "'""
h l
- -~
I~
0141 11
-----
--
+-
73,5 94 14
max max m QX
IQ
.......
l
7Z70289
1.-8,1 ma x
33,9 max i-.
4 2,7 max
67,5max
1--- - - - - 155,2max - - - - --
F ig. l
---
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement a t the specified power
handling capacity .
~
(0
/,
= stamped
on loudspeaker magnet ,
AD7062 /M8, catal ogue number 2404 257 460 . 2

~ 2 = for bulk packing '-')
L__ 6
= for
single unit packing
FREQOENCY RESPONSE CURVE
See Fig. 2
Cu rve b: Sound press ur e measured in a nechoic room at operat ing power. Loudspeaker
mounted in sealed 80 l enclosure, filled with 1 kg of glass wool.
Curve c : z!!_<:! and ~ harmonic distortion, meas ured at the operating power of 5 W in
anechoic room, loudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 l e nclosure, fill ed with 1 kg
of glass wool.
~' ) Minimum packing quantity 4 pe r unit.
October 1974
AD7062/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
....
CO
N
0
~~
....
....N
1- ~ ~
le...
~
:r
~
r'
'~
<'\.
,"
...
\\
le
.,..V
'
/ c.: .::
'
'
0
0
Lll
Lll
~
I"
:::: ~
p..
- - - -
>(
<.D
"'
October 1974
.,
!"
... _
f-.-
0
!:'"--
.........
..,
"0
I'
<{
... _.....
\..
'\
0
0
\
- - - -
Lll
~~
...
:I:
0
.0
-~
L,..ooi""
11'
en
N
Cl)
1,...
V
'
~:
--
"
~ '=--
...cI"
__ r,;T
..,
..
Lll
"'"0 I?
..,
....
N
NN
Lll
Bl67
AD7063/M.
11
11

APPLICATION
For high fidelity reproduction in sealed acoustic enclosures . Maximum enclosure
volume 25 litres.
Smooth response from 60 to 8000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
M4
MS
:I
3,4
Resonance frequency
. 55
55
Hz
15
15
2,2
2,2
Sweep voltage
4, 5
6,3
Energy in air gap
127
127
m}
0,87
0,87
mm
6,8
6 ,8
mm
mm
Rated impedance

Operating power
Flux density
Air- gap height ,
Voice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Mass of loudspeaker
25
25
FXD
72
FXD
72
0,26
0,26
0, 745
0 , 745
The loudspeaker has a textile surround and a double cone.

Connection to the loudspeaker by means of 6, 3 mm (0 , 25 inch) Fastons or soldering.
---
mm
kg
kg
AD7063/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimens10ns (mm)
73 .5 94 142
max maxmax
f"""1----...r..---!-j
j
7Z45691 ,4
Fig . l
I.-7,Bmax
-43max+- - 69max -
Baffle hol e diamete r 14 1 mm

One tag i s indicated by a r ed mark for in-phase connecti on.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
(0
= s tampe d
on loudspeaker magnet,
not td be used for ordering)
AD7063/M4, catalogue number 2422 257 379 .6
AD7063/M8, catalogue num ber 2422 257 379.~

(se ~
Fig . 2)
Curve b : Sound pressure m easured in a nec hoic room at input power of 2, 2 W.

Louds peaker mounte d on IEC baffle.
Curve c : 2nd and 3rd ha rmonic -distortion, meas ur ed at input power of 2, 2 Win anechoic
room. Loudspeaker mount ed on IEC baffle.
'"l Minimum packing quantity 4 pe r unit.
AD7063/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
(If
--
I[)
CO
1-- 1-- ~
I[)
<D
,..._
1--
,_
--
I
~
-~
<.
L{)
(
~
(',/
le:;
>
//
----
'
1'.
b
L{)
L{)
biJ
-'
<::.: ~
1\
/
N
"0
........
l'o..
'
-
f-
N
0
October 1974
"""0
-....
--
\t
tD
'\
0
I:'
1".
~
("')
......
.........
0
<(
N
CJ)
N
<0
- - If
'
'
V
,
&::
t7
0
0
0
0
..
_,
0
L{)
......... \.
. .........
'\ ' '
L{)
IJ
.D
1-- , 00
'
'-
"
........
0
N
lO
1317 1
AD7066/MFB
11
11
7 inch HIGH POWER MOTIONAL FEEDBACK LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
For application in small enclosures with very low bass Fesponse down to 40 Hz with
excellent distortion suppression.
The loudspeaker has a built- in acceleration sensor.
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedan~e
4,3
Resonance frequency
39
Hz
Power .handling capacity

without filter
40
Operating power
Sweep voltage
frequency range: 35-3000 Hz
7, 5
Ener gy in air gap
225
mJ
Flux density
1, 1
Air -gap height

Voice coil height
Core diameter
mm
11
mm
25
mm
Magnet material
diameter
mass
FXD
90
0,45
mm
kg
Mass of loudspeaker
1, 15
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and rubber surround.

Connection no the loudspeaker is by means of soldering or Fastons: voice coil 6, 3 mm
(0 , 25 inch) ; acceleration sensor: 3, 2 mm (0, 12 inch).
October 1976
B173
:::
=I
AD7066/MFB
7 inch HIGH POWER MOT JONAL

FEEDBACK LOUDSPEAKER
Dimen swns (m m)
45min 11
~~~-
-,
1..-------------~
I
I
I
I
!ll141 111
91,8
max
94 142
max max
j j
i::
7Z7Sl6S
__. 42,7 max

.......-- 71 ,6 max-+-
<)
BFW11
voice c oil
c:::::::::J
72701120
: r e d ma r k fo r in -phase connection
accele r ation
sen sor
:
""'
ACCELERATI ON SEN SOR
e blue m a rk
Fig .l
1 ) Ba ffl e hole and moun ting clearance depth 1equ ire d fo r cune rr.f>VE'ment at the s pecified
power h<m dl ing capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
I (O =s tamped on lou dspeake r magnet ,
1
not tci be use d for order ing)
number 2422 257 470 . 5
t--- 2 = for bul k packing* )
L_ 6 = for s ingl e unit packing
A D8067 /MFB,
c~ta l ogue
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CURVES (see Fig . 2)

Curve b : Sound pressure measure d in anechoic room at an operating power of 7, 5 W.
Lou dspeaker mounted in sealed 80 I enclosure, f illed with 1 kg of glass wool.
anechoic room, loudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 1 enclosu r e, fill ed wit h 1 kg
of gl ass wool.
*)Minimum packing quantity 3 pe r unit.
'-------B174
~"~~~~11
October 1976
AD706 6/MFB
7 inch HIGH POWER MOTIONAL

FEEDBACK L OUDSPEAKER
-<
......
......
.....
I-Ir- i-" 1~
~ r-
i-"
I
.:::
.-
!-=
"'r---..
N
~
~
I
\
0
0
lD
r.;:
~~
1\
-1'
j_ V
'
--
,..,
r'\.
"0
l)
'
,-
'
1
I
, -- -- -- --
.-
:1
lD
/)
,-;:
_,
"0
l)
>
'
......
0
0
0
0
0
N
0
0
0
n rtnhP_r L971\
aJ
'0
""biJ
a>
CO
['-
0
<.D
0
lD
8175
AD7066/MFB
7 inc h HIGH POWER MOTIONAL
CQIL ACCELERATION RESPONSE CURVE (see Fig. 4)
Test conditions:
Loudspeaker unmounted.
Inpu t at voice coil connections: 0 , 44 V (50 mW I 4 0 )
T est circuit
10kfi
sensor
7Z70e21 ..1
:I'
Fig.3
7Z74432
+20
dB
+10
-10
I
./
'I'-
11
/
-20
-30
10
20
50
100
500Hz
200
10kHz
20
Fig.4
13176
11
Q.ctQber 1276
AD7066/MFB

Phase rel ation between output voltage of acceleration sensor and inEut voltage on voice
coil
-- -: Vout lagging
I
+: Vou t leading
7Z7443 1
-90
I
I
-60
......,
--
-3 0
/
I
0
:::i
'-'
"""
1 //
/ V
+30
1/
+60
+90
I
1/
+120
/
1/
+150
V
+180
1--
10
50
20
100
500Hz
200
1 '
10kHz
Fig.S
Curve 1: loudspeaker unmounted: fres =.19Hz.
Curve 2: l oudspeaker mounted in seale d 9 1 enclosure: fres =lOO Hz .
,....
...... L., .... _
0"1~
11
l3177
20
AD7066/W.
11
11
APP LICATION
For. high fidelity reproduction in sealed acoustic enclosures in accordance with DlN45500.
Maximum enclosure volume 7 1.
Maximum recommended cross-over frequency 2000Hz. High power handling capacity
with very low distortion.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
W4
WB
Rated impedance
4,3
Resonance frequency
45
45
Hz

mounted in 7 1 seal ed enclo su r e
40
40
Sweep voltage
3,8
5,3
Energy in a ir gap
225
207
m]
1' 1
1, 2
mm
Operating power
F lux density
Air- gap height
Voice coil height
11
11
mm
Core diameter
25
25
mm
Magnet material
diameter
mass
FXD
90
0,45
FXD
90
0 ,,45
mm
kg
Mass of loudspea ker
1, 15
1, 15
kg
The lou dspeaker has a rubber surround.

Connection to the l oudspeaker by means of 6, 3 mm (0, 25 inch) Fastens or solder ing.
IJ .
Jl~
B179
'
AD7066/W.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
45 min 11
~,-
---, ~~~---------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
!2l141
I
111
91,8
max
94
142
max ma x
jj
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7Z68781.2
... 42,7 max

.__71,6 ma x----+-
Fig.1
handling capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r--- (0= stamped on loudspeaker magnet,

1
AD70 66/W4, catalogue number 2422 257 470 . 1

AD7066/W8, catalogue number 2422 257 470 . 2
L_ 2
L_ 6
= for bulk packing ':' )

':' ) Minimum packing quantity 3 per unit.
B180
October 1976
AD7066/W.
LOUDSPEAKER
Fig. 2
Curve b: Sound pressure measured in anechoic room , loudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 l
enclosure , filled with l kg of glass wool.
Curve c: Total non -linear distortion, measured at the operating power of 4 W in anechoic
room, loudspeaker mounte d in sealed 80 l e nclosure, filled with 1 kg of gl ass wool.
Loudspeaker front mounted on baffle , dimensions 640 x 540 mm.
:::::l
October 197_4_ _ _ 11 ______________
13181
AD7066/W.

LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
0
(I)
.....
(I)
"'N
.....
..l<
~~
...... 1
.J
---
~~
--
V
./
~)
/V
,.
V
N
~~
'
"'bJJ
0
0
Ll1
Ll1
- I'\
0
0
.0
'
'\
'
......
""""
'-------'"'13
1K2
"'0
"'
(I)
0
Ll1
'
')
....
-o
'
0
0
<(
0
Ll1
['
,..--
3=
r-- r-- ....._
r-- r-- <D
<D
r-- r-- 0
1-- 1--
i\
1-- 1--
r
0
r-- r--
Nf-"'0
,,
0
N
......
"'
~~~ ~~~~~
N
Ll1
October 1974
AD7080/M.
11
11
7 inch OCTAGONAL MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
For car and domestic radios, acoustic enclosures and public .address systems .
Frequency range up to 15 kHz .
TECHNICAL DATA
M4
version
M8
M15
15
3,4
7,1
13,5
Resonance frequency
105
105
105
Hz
2,8
6, 7
55
55
53
mJ
0,98
0,98
0,98
Rated impedance

Sweep voltage
Energy in airgap
Flux density
=
:::
Airgap height
mm
Voice coil height
3,9
3,2
mm
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Weight of 'loudspeaker
18
18
18
mm
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
0, 29
0,29
0,29
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
I
'
1"'"\,.. .. ...,1-..o ,...
107 1.1
11_~-~.11
AD7080/M.
7 inch OCTAGONAL MEDIUM POWER

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimenswns (mm)
3m in 11
_] 1-k- - -----,
I
I
11
0 141 :
54,5 8 3 142
mox mox mox
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
::
--
-r~-
. ...
7Z68212
~ 34,1~ a xl+-
155,2 mox
5emo x _ .
Fig. 1.
1) Baffle h ole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
h andling capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r--- (0 = stamped on the l oudspeaker magnet,

1
not to be used for order ing)
AD7080/M8, catalogue number 2422 257 378.4

AD7080/Ml5, catalogue numher 2422 257 378.5
t=
2 = for bulk packing *)


Fig.2. Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure mea sured in anechoic room , loudspeaker unmounted .
Above 1000Hz the sensitivity may be over the width of one ottave, ma ximum
2 dB l ower than indicated.
* ) Mini mum packing quantity 4 per unit.
Bl84
AD7080/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
"'""00
~~
ID
0
N
.,.,.
.....
{
"""
......
...... ~
~
~"" [>
)
(
.....
\..
J:
"'\
0
0
lt>
''~
\
- - -
r-- -
f--
....
October 1974
-~
0
0
"'
''
(X)
0
0
...._
'
11'1
['
0
<(
ID
"0
"'
"'
00
N
.....
....
....
0
N
Ll>
ID
11
BIBS
AD7080/X.
11
11
7 inch OCTAGONAL MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKER

APP LICATION
For car a nd domestic radios and accoustic enclosures.
High sens_itivity at 4000 Hz .
TECHNICAL DATA
vers ion
X8
X4
Rated impeda nce
3, 4
7,1
Resonance frequency
115
115
Hz
Sweep voltage
3,5
4,9
Energy airgap
55
55
m]
0 ,98
0 ,98
mm
Power handling capac ity.

measured with out filter
Flux density
Airgap height
Voice coil height
3,9
mm
18
18
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
53
0,1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
0.29
0 , 29
kg
Core diameter
nrtnh~r
1 Q7..d
13JH7
---
AD7080/X.
7 inch OCTAGONAL' MEDIUM POWER

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
3 min 11
_]I-
0141
---
83
11
::::
142
max
-~~--51 max
- - - - - 155,2 max - - - - -- '
34,1~ax l_.
~samax~
Fig. 1.
1) Baffle hol~ and clearance depth required for cone movement at the spec ified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indic ated by a red mark for on-phase connect ion.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r--- (0 =stamped on loudspeaker magnet ,

1.
not to be used for ordening)
AD 7080/X4, catalogue number , 2422 257 378 . 1

AD 7080/X8, catalogue number , 2422 257 378.2
C 2
for bulk packing '~)

6 for single unit pac king.
Fig. 2. Input power 50 m W

Sound pressure measured in anechoic room , loudspeaker is unmounted.
Above 1000Hz the sensitivity may be , over the width of one octave, maximum
'~ ) Minimum
8188
packing quantity 4 per unit.
October
74
7 inch OCTAGONAL MEDIUM

LOUDSPEAKER
.:t
"'a;
ID
.....
......
~
_,
AD7080/X.
POWER
,.,.
-""'
..,. ~
~I"""
J:
~
.....
Ln
.... ~
(~
"'-
::;j
--
'
,.,.~
......
~~
t"-
"'
.....
'
"~
:I:
0
0
Ln
[\
i\
0
0
\
r- r-- r-
- -
X
.............
'
.....
0
0
~
......
loo..
0
CD
-,-
.....
"""!"
0
Ln
['
- -
0
N
0
ID
.....
"Q
N
01
N
CID
N
ID
.....
Ln
October 1974
'
11
_ IJ18~
"!
.~
!I..
AD7091/M.
11
11
7 inch ROUND MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
For tel evision sets and record players .
TECHNICAL DATA
version
M400
M4
MS
400
800
Voice coil r esistance
3,4
7, 1
330
600
Resonance frequency
105
105
105
105
Hz
2,45
3,5
24,5
34,5
39
39
39
39
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,8
Ra ted impedance
Powe r handling capacity ,

Sweep voltage
Energy in airgap
F lux density
Airgap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
1,
Magnet material
diameter
we ight
Weight of l oudspeaker
M800
V
mJ
T
mm
2,4
3, 1
4,65
mm
18
18
18
18
mm
Ticonal Ticonal Ticona1 Ticonal

18
18
18
18
0,027
0,027
0,027
0,027
mm
kg
0 , 22
0,22
0,22
0 , 22
kg
October 1974
[3 19 1
AD7091/M.
LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
3 m in 11
-~_1
---~
41 ,9 72 ,4
max max
11.2
max
-7Z6 8J 01
-.. 1+-5.1
1- - -- - - 1 55,2 max - - - ----. 1
Fig.1
1
max 1
- 3l , 1 m o x 1
!._. 3~ma x .1 .,.1.
_.., 42,2 max 1. -.
-
43,5 max
1-
) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone m ove ment at the specified power
handling capacity.

AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r-- (0 =stamped on loudspeaker magnet

1
AD7091/M4
, catalogue number 2422 256 370.4
AD7091/M8
, catalogue number 2422 256 370 . 9
not t o be used for ordering)

t=
2 =for bulk packing ':')

6 =for s ingl e unit packing
Fig.2
Input power 50 mW
Above 1000 Hz the sound pressure may be, over the width of one octave,
maximum 2 dB lower than indicated.
October 19 4
AD7091/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
.....
en
N
CO
~~
ID
.....
If"
'-i-
0
N
1--' ~
....
J:
..ll:
0
,
j
I/
I\~
f\
--
I\.
"""" r\.
~
...._
'' I'-
....
J:
1\
o.n
\
0
0
N
~
t-- t--
I -I t-- t--
I - t-I -I -
--
t-- t--
"'
0
0
l"'oo..
--~
en
~""'
o.n
['
0
~
.....
October 197 4 .
en
ao
.....
...
N
"'
0
N
"'bil
iL:
AD7091/X.
7 inch ROUND MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
For television sets and record players .

TECHNICAL DATA
version
X4
Rated impedance
X8
X800
800
3,4
7,.1
600
Resonance frequency
115
115
115

loudspeak;!r unmounted
S\veep voitage
Energy in a}rgap
Flux density
Airgap height
.Y oice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet materia l
diameter
weight
::'1
Hz
2,45
3,5
34, 5
39
39
39
0,8
0,8
0, 8
mm
2,4
3, 1
4,65
mm
18
18
18
mm
Ticonal
~
~
m]
T iconal Ticonal
18
0,027
18
0,027
18
0, 027
kg
0,22
0,22
0,22
kg
mm
13 195
AD7091/X.

LOUDSPEAKER
DimensiOns (mm)
72,4
142
mox
max
7l68 301
-... I._
'- - - - - - 155.2max - - - - ----+ '
max
-.. 34 1 ma x I'..
_...
Fig. 1
3~ max IJ
_., 42,2 max

-.
5,1
l.!.3.5 max
1I._
) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity .

AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r-- (0 = stamped on loudpeaker magnet

AD7091/X4
/
AD7091/X8
, catalogue number 2422 256 370 . 8
t=
2 =for bulk packing,.)

Fig.2
Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anec hoic room, loudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000Hz the sound pressure may be, ove r the width of one octave,
maximum 2 dB l ower than indicated .
13 196
(),.... t nN::>T" 1 07 A
AD7091/X.

LOUDSP E AKER
0
N
~
~ 1--"
.,ell
N
CD
~
"'
N
..
<~ ~
J:
1-
.X
0
I'
J '"""
/
Ill
I/
"""" ~ ......
'(
.
....
......
"'
(
1---
..
i"'.
'
"'
J:
0
0
Ill
oil
~
~
0
0
N
I-- c--
I-- I--
.
X
........._
--
I-- -
en
I-- I--
I--
\ ~ ....
0
0
......
"""" ....
0
Ill
["--
<(
0
N
0
October 1974
m
"'0
.,
N
N
CD
"'
N
Ill
Bl ':l 7_ _ __
AD8000
11
11
8 inch PASSIVE RADIATOR

APPLICATION
To be used in combination with loudspeaker AD8066/W. in a sealed 35 1 enclosure for an
improved bass response .
TECHNICAL DATA
2,5xl0- 2 m2
Effective area
::::::1
::::
Moving mass:
tune d mass
cone mass
total moving mass
21, 5
9, 8
31, 3
g
g
g
Mass-of tadiator
0,235
kg
8,5m in
11
--~ ~r
~----------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
-, r r
I
I
180 11:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_
'- - - - - - 190,9 ma x - - - - - '
--~- 8,1max
7Z75166
_. 46,8 max
59,3 max_..
64,4max_..
1) Baffl e hol e a nd clearance depth require d for cone move ment.
Octobe r 1976
''-~~-~~ ~.B192t----~
AD8061/W.
11
11
APPLICATION
For high fidelity reproduction in sealed acoustic enclosures . Maximum enclosure volume
25 litres. Maximum recommended cross-over frequency 2000Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
vers ion
W4
Rated impedance
W8
n
n
Vo ice coil resistance
4, 3
Resona nce frc>q uen cy
42
42
1-lz

mounted in 25 1 seal ed encl os ure
30
30
3,4
3,4
w
w
135
140
mJ
0, 87
0,93
Operating power
Sweep voltage
Energy in air gap
Flux dens ity
Air- gap height
Vo ice co il he ight
Core dia m eter
Magnet mater ia l
dia m e te r
mass
Mass of loudspeaker
mm
11
11
m111
25
25
m111
FXD
72
FXD
72
111111
0,26
0,26
kg
0, 8
0,8
kg
The loudspeaker has a rubber surround.

Connection to the loudspeaker by means of 6, 3 mm(O, 25 inch) Fas tons or soldering .
Q? ()l
--
AD8061/W.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
5min 11
-~~-
-r
h..- - - - - - - - - - - - - .
73,5 99,5 179,9
max max ma x
~
7Z68213 .1
r- - - - - - 190,9 ma x
-------.1
-
Fig.!
59 ,25max
.--84max-..
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement a t the specified powe r
handling capacity.
r--- (0 = stamped on loudspeaker magnet,

1
AD8061/W 4, catal ogue number 2422 257 384. 5

AD8061/W8, catalogue number 2422 257 384.6
2 = for bul k packing t.' )

6 = for sin gle unit packing

See Fig.2
Curve b: Sound pressure measured in anech~ic room at operating power. Loudspeaker
mounted in seal ed 80 l e nclosure , filled with 1 kg of glass wool.
Curve c: ~and 3~ harmonic distortion, .measured at the operating powe r of 3, 4 W in
anechoic room, loudspeaker mounted in 80 l enclosure , fill e d with 1 kg of glass
wool.
t.<) Minimu m packing quantity 3 per unit.
October 1974
AD8061/W.
8 inch HIGH POW ER WOOFER

LOUDSPEAKER
..,....
CO
N
c-
.....
N
.....
lt'""'
I<
lJ
0
N
f.- 1-
,/
"' l
.,...v
....
(
0
0
11'1
11'1
..;t
'
--
'
"C
......
N
C7>
\.
..,
.....
<{
0
0
,:
- ___, 0
"C
0
0
N
-- I-3:
- - , .- - lD
- - 0CO
....
I
I
I
I
l..c
ID
0
11'1
N
0
'I
\.
:I:
N
00
_,./
....
.,..,
,. ,.,... .......
I.'
./
VN
~
'
...
"C
i" r--...
k"..... u
,....
.......
N
.....
0
11'1
..,
N
AD8066/W.
8 inch HIGH POWER WO.OFER LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION
For high fidelity reproduction in seale d acoustic e nclosures. Maximum enclosure volume
25 litres. Maximum recommended cross - over fr equency 2500Hz.
Rated frequenc y r ange 30 to 5 000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
W8
W4
4
Ra ted impeda nce
Voi ce coil r esista nce
4, 3
12
Resonance frequen cy
39
39
Hz
40 ,
40
2,5
2. 5
Power ha ndling capac ity,

m eas ur ed witho ut filter ,
m o unted in 25 l seal ed en clos ure
Opera ting power
Swee p voltage
Energy in air gap
229
203
m]
F lux d en s ity
1,1
1,2
mm
Vo ice coil he ig ht
11
11
Il1J11
Core d ia m eter
25
25
mm
FXD
F XD
Ai r- gap height
Magn e t ma te ria l
diame te r
mass
90
90
0, 45
0,45
mm
kg
Mass of loudspeaker
1, 15
1, 15
kg
The loud s peaker ha s a rubber surround.

Conne ction to' the loudspeaker by means of 6, 3 mm (0, 25 inch) Fastons Qr o- oldering.
-----
AD8066/W.
8 inc h HIG H POWE R WOOFER

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensi ons (mm)
Smin 11
J ,lrh.--------.
I
I
91,8 99,5. 179,9
ma x max max
l 1
7170291 .1
- l... s,osmax
'- - - - - - 190,9 max
- 4 6,75ma xl
- 59,25 ma x
88 max.- - -
Fig. l
.1) Baffle lwlc and clearanc:e depth lcquitccl for cone mo vement
hanclling capaci t y,
a~
the specif ied
pO\\Cl'
Onl' tag is indicated bv a rct(mark for in-phase connection .
AVAILABLE VE RSI ON S
.\08066 I W4 , cata logue m mbcr 2422
r--<U
2.~7
:3SS.l
= stumped on louclspeuk<ol' magnet,

not to be us ed for onlc1ing)
,\08066/WS , catalogue numbe1 2422 257 385.2
t=
2 = for bulk packing ~,)

FREQUENCY RESPONSE CU RVES
Sec Fig. 2
Curve b: Sound pressure measured in anechoic room ;~t operating power . Loudspeaker
mounted in sealed 80 1 enclosure, filled with l kg of glass wool.
Curve c: 2nd and 3rd harmon~c distortion, measured a t the operat ing power of 2 , 5 W in
anechoic room, louds.peaker mounted in seal ed 80 l enclosure, filled with 1 kg
of glass wool.
L___B206___LJIL--------------'j
Octobc,r 1976
AD8066/W.
LOUDSPEAK ER
c --
..:t
CO
N
0
.....
.....
f,_
I...-
,.....
(..)
""""
~
0
N
lll
...
~\
t\
'
. . .v
r
V ( ,'
I/
K
'
0
0
' ' f\
:} I
),
~II
1
1\
t- ..........
<D
<D
0
CD
~~
' 1\
1\.
;'
n~tnhPr
'lJ
1 CJ7 4
'lJ
"!-....
'
<{
0
0
lll
0
0
N
1\!
~
-
::z::
..:t
..0
T
I
lll
lll
1-- t-1-- 1--
ao
~ .........
.... ...
l/
0
0
r
'\
~~
....
bf~
~ 1--
--
""
"C
"-~
~ ' 'r-..
N
.....
II~_ _ _ !I~
lll
13207
AD8067 /MFB
11
11
8 inch HIGH POWER MOTIONAL FEEDBACK LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
For application in small enclosures with very low bass response down to 20 Hz with
excellent distortion s uppression.
The loudspeaker has a built-in acceleration sensor.
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedance
Resonance frequency
38
Hz

measured with filter
mounted. in 9 1 sea led enclosure
50
Operating power
11
*>
Sweep voltage
frequency range: 35 -1000 Hz
Energy in air gap
225
mJ
F lux density
0 , 69
Air - gap height

Voice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
5
12 . 7
34
FXD
90
0 , 42
mm
mm
mm
Mass of loudspeaker
1,3
mm
kg
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and rubber surround.

Connection to the louds peaker by m eans of soldering or Fastons: voice coil 6, 3 mm
. (0 , 2 5 inch); acceleration sensor : 3, 2 mm (0, 12 inch).
7Z70822.1
;') Filter characteristic :
t+10d8
~
85Hz
October 1976
B209
----
AD8067 /MFB

FEEDBACK LO UDSPEAKER
---
l l
!:
7Z70826
_. l... s,osmax
1 -----~ 190,9 max - - - - -.. 1
_. 46,75max l
...,..
voice coil {
acceleration { 3
sensor
4
59,25 max -+.,._ 88 mox ___....
red dot mark for in -phase connection
BFW11
.m
(i)
ACCELERATION
SEN SOR
blue dot mark
c:::::::::J
10
Mn
10
kn
Fig.1
7l10 U O
,),;
1) Baffle hole and mounting clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified
power handling capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSION
.
r-<o =sta mped on loudspeaker magnet.

1 _
AD8067/MF13, cntalogue number 2422 257 386.5
f--- 2 = for bulk packing '-' )

L__ 6 =for single unit packing
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CURVES (see F ig. 2)
Cur ve b: Sound pressure meas ure d in anechoic roo m at an operating power of 11 W.
Loudspe a ker m ounte d in sealed 80 I enclosure, filled with 1 kg of glass wool.
Curve c: 2nd and 3rd harm onic distortion , measured at the operating power of 11 W in
ane choic room, louds peaker m ounted in sea led 80 1 encl os ure, filled with 1 kg
of glass woo l.
'-') Minimum packing qu antity 3 per unit.
OctQber .l9J15
AD8067 /MFB
8 inch HIGH POWER MOTIONA L

FEEDBACK LOUDSPEAKE R
0
N
~
N
/,.,. ,
,/
<X)
e-N
c--
,....
'
-f.-
1-
-_'I
...,...!-"'""
--
!-"'""
h.
/V
.....
I--"
....
0
0
"
lf1
lf1
~
1\I
"0
,J
J
I ("
::E
I--
'
ID
lL
I-- ............
["-..
lD
~
!,7
1\
-
1 1..., ~
lE
p
~
........
"
,-
'
, -
CO
'
'
- -""
- ---
-.
0
0
0
lf1
;:::.
...
1-
........
"0
0
N
<(
October 1976
m
u
0
0
N
,., ...
0
N
Q)
CO
<D
-~
N
0
lf1
1\
........ IN
0
0
\.o
I-- r--
,.....,
I - r--
--
lf1
82 11
AD8067 /MFB

FEEDBACK LOUD,SPEAKER
COIL ACCELERATION RESPONSE CURVE (see Fig. 4)

Test conditions :
Louds peaker unmounted.
Input at voice coil connections: 0 , 44 V (50 mW /4 Q)
Test circuit
10kfi
---F ig. 3
7 Z7082S
+20
dB
mV
80
+10
'
.......
r---.
40
tr-- .......
20
(\
-10
I
I
I
10
-20
\
- 30
10
20
50
100
200
500Hz
10kHz
20
Fig.4
B212
11
October 1976
AD8067 /MFB
.8 inch HIGH POWER MOTIONA L
Phase relati on be tween output voltage of acceleration s ensor and input voltage on voic e coil
: Vout lagging
: V out lead ing

7Z70823
-50
I
I
-30
1/
I
"""'-/
00
./.
+30
1/
+ 50
i7
+ 90
I
7
12
fT
:::::;
1/
+ 120
7
7
+ 150
+ 180
-=
r/
10
17
50
20
100
200
500Hz
10kHz
Fig .S
Curve 1 : louds peaker unmounted; fres =26 Hz .
Curve 2: loudspe aker mounted in sealed 9 1 enclosure ; fres
,...._ ... _ .... _ _
, (\"'7J:..
11
= 84
Hz.
B213
20
DEVHOPMENT SAMPLE DATA
AD8067 /W.

for evaluation. It does not form part of our data handbook system and
does not necessa rily imrly that the device will go into production

APPLICATION
For high fidelity reproduction accord ing to DIN45500 in sea led acoustic enclos ures .
Maximum enclosure volume 25 litres , Maximum r ecommended cross - over frequency
3000Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
ver s i on
W4
Rated impedance
4,
ws
8
r2
6,4
r2
Voice co il resistance
3,2
Resonance frequency
32
32
Hz
Power handling capac ity,

mounted in 25 1 e ncl osure
40
40
w
V
Operating power
Energy in air gap
225
225
m]
Flux density
0,7
0, 7
12,7
12, 8
ml11
ml11
Sweep voltage
Air- gap height

Voice co il he igh t
mm
34
34
Magne t material
FXD
FXD
diQu,eter
mass
90
0,42
90
0,42
mm
kg
Mass of loudspeaker
1,3
1, 3
kg
Core diameter

Connection to the loudspeaker by means of 6, 3 mm (0, 25 inch) Fastons' or soldering.
B215
--
AD8067 /W.

LOUDSPEAKER
DimensiOns (mm)
91,8 99,5 179,9
max max max
--
11
7Z70290.1
1-a,05max
1- - -- --190,9 ma x - - - - - - - 1
-- 46,75 max I
--. 59,25 max
eefnaxFig .!
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth 1cquired for cone movement at the speci!ied power
handling capacity .
One tag i s indicated by a red mark for in -phase connection .
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r--(
AD806.7fW4, catalogue number 2422 257 386 .1
0 = stamped on louds? e~k~rmagnet,

not to be used for ordcnng)
AD8067/W8, catalogue nu:-:1ber 2422 257 386 . 2
f - - 2 = for bulk packing '')

L _ 6 = for si ngl e unit packing
See Fig . 2
Curve a : Sound pressure measured in anechoi c room, loudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000 Hz the sound pressure may be, over the width of one octave,
maximum 2 dB lower than indicated. Input power 50 mW (0, 44 V).
Curve b : Sound pressure measured in half free field at operating power . Loudspeaker
mounted in sealed 80 1 enclosure, filled with 1 kg of glass wool.
Curve c : 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion, measured at th e operating power of 6 W in
anechoic room, l oudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 1 enclosure, filled with 1 kg
of glass wool.
Curve e : Maximum distortion accord ing DIN45500, 13lart 7.
'' ) Minimum packing quantity 3 per unit.
8216
AD8067 /W.

LOUDSPEAKER
.,
I
.X
--
f"
--
.......
1-'
v-->
lJ)
-----
'\
f.--
.....;;F-
I(
'
I
0
0
lJ)
-<
lrV
~I\
,.....~
0
0
))
\
N
""0
'
0
0
-- I
''
.
.-
IJ
'-
('
M
""0
""
-- -' -', -- -- -,
rr '
- -- -- ~-- -
'
lJ)
.~
0
N
0
0
0
0
CO
0
<.D
0
lJ)
B217

for e;aluatlon. It does not form part of our data handbook system and
does not necessarily Imply that the device will go into production
AD8081/M.
8 inch OCTAGONAL MEDIUM POWER LOUDSPEAKERS
APPLICATION
A full range loudspeaker for domestic radios, public address systems, and ceiling sets.
Due to its dual-cone construction, this loudspeaker has an extended frequency response
up to 20kHz.
August 1976
1 _~-
__________B_2 ~
19--------~
AD8081/M.

LOUDSPEAKERS
Dimensions (mm)
' - - - - - - - 191,6 max
-------1
. 54,5
180
max
max
--~1-5,3 max
1Z 68215 .1
-... 44 ,4 mox ..__

. . - 58 max ____.
Fig.l
1 ) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
AVAlLABLE VERSIONS
r:--
382b

AD8081/M8. oa"U"'"' aamb<" 2422 257

3 = for bulk packing*)

I

Curve c: 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion, measured at the operating power of 1 W in
*) Minimum packing "quantity 4 per unit.
13220
_1.
11
August 1976
AD8081/M.

LOUDSPEAKERS
.......
1,-
_,... f-
1- .......
N
N
.:.:
::>
,.- ~
1,..---
I\
(I'-
r-...
-'
f.-
~~
......
0
0
L.l1
.l
(
.D
0
0
I/
..,....
"0
.....
,-
........ r--..
........
I
I
~\
0
0
(Y)
"0
L.l1
.I
~~
..-:
~
'I"\
\
- --
I'-- r--..
....... ........
0
0
0
0
August 1976
Cl)
"0
O'l
<Xl
(!)
L.l1
13221
""
AD8081/X.

for evaluation. It does not form part of our data handbook system and
does not necessarily imply th:H lhc device will go into production
8 inch OCTAGONAL M ED IUM POWER LOUDSPEAKERS
APPLICATION
For dome s tic radios , public address systems, and ceiling sets . High sen sitivity at
4000Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X4
Rated impe dance
X8
3, 4
7,1
70 to 11 000
Hz
95
Hz
0, 7
Resonance frequency
Operating power (sound level 90 dB, 1 m)
Sweep voltage (SO to 20 000 Hz)
5,6
Energy in air gap
53
Flux density
mJ
T
0,98
Air gap height
mm
Voice coil height
5,3
Core diameter
18
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Ferr oxdure
53
0, 1
Mass of loudspeaker
0 , 37
mm
mm
mm
kg
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper rim.
August 1976
11
11
B22.1
---
AD8081/X.

LOUDSPEAKERS
Dimensions (mm)
--
. 54,5
max
-~ 1.... 5,3max
' - - - - -- - 191 ,6 max - - - - - - - -'
7Z682l5.1
__... 44,4 max .,.__

,..__ 68 max----+-
Fig. I
handling capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
~
AD8081/X4 , catalogue number 2422 257 382.3

AD8081/X8 ,
(1 = stamped on loudspeaker magnet ,

=""'""" =mb~ 2422 257 382b ;::::::~~~:::':.~king
FREQUENCY RESPONSE 'CURVES
(see Fig. 2)

according to IEC268-5, par. 4, 4.
13224
_ II ~
180
max
August 1976
AD8081/X.

LOUDSPEAKERS
<I'-
('I
,...
~
......
L(')
I~
- r-..
I'
I>
~
I
0
0
L(')
'
./
.Df
0
0
('I
V
..,
t> t-
"'bo
L-- 1--
l)
t--
...,
!',.
!"--.
L..--
- --
0
0
"0 I
u,
\,
')
L(')
"") ~
<---.......
.._
r.::. I'-.- -
f- r-
- -
r-
- ---
0
('I
0
0
August 1976
Ill
"'0
Ol
CO
r--
0
lD
11
L(')
ll22.)
9710/MC
8% inch HIGH POWER FULL RANGE LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION
A full range loudspeaker for stud io monitoring equipment and domestic bass r e fle x
enclosures for high fi delity reproduction from 45 1-lz to 19 kl-l z .
TECHN ICAL DATA
version MC
Rated impedance
Resonance frequency
50
1-lz

loudspeaker mounted in sealed enclos ure < 30 l
loudspeaker mounted in sealed enclos ure > 30 l
20
10
Operating power
1,3
w
w
w
Sweep voltage
5 ,9
Energy in airgap
361
Flux density
Airgap height
Voice coil height
Core diamet er
Magnet mater:ial
diameter
we ight
We ight of loudspeaker
0 , 75
mJ
T
11
mm
mm
34
mm
Fxd
105
0,4
mm
kg
1, 75
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and s urround and a cork gasket on the flange.
Connection to the loudspeaker by means of 6, 3 mm (0 , 25 inch) Fastons or soldering.
October 1974
13227
9710/MC
8~ inch HIGH POWER FULL RANGE
LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions
Smin 11 ~
--w-
h----------~
96
{ll195 11 -
105 192,5
ma x ma x ma x
Jl
r=
1 . - - - - - - 2 16,5 max - - - - - - - . 1
2
max-.l-+- 65 ,2 max-.,.__ 77 max ___...
7Z69092.l
.__ 95,5 max---.
Fig.1
'
handling capacity.
A V AI LAB LE VERSION
~--- (0
=stamped on loudspeaker magnet,

not to be used for order ing )
9710/MC, catalogue number 2422 257 481. 1

6 = for single unit pack ing
See Fig. 2.
Curve b: Sound pressure measured in a nechoi c room, loudspeaker mounted in sealed
80 l enclosure . Input power at ope r ating power of f, 3 W.
Curve c: znd and 3~ harmonic distortion, measured at the operating power of 0, 7 W
in an echoic room, loudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 1 enclosure, fil led with
1 kg of glass wool.
~') Minimum packing quant\ty 2 per unit . .
ll22H
October 1974
8! inch HIGH POWER FULL RANGE

LOUDSPEAKER
9710/MC
I
'
I;; ......
.....
<)'I
...
1-1-11
:r
<
.ll:
0
<
c:.
:::~
11>
~~
....
t--
,...... t-
-:
3-
cf::::
t- !-...
"'
"'0
I/
"'N"'
....
..,v
1"""'
.~
V
le
0
0
"'
.a
:I:
"'
0
0
"'
..:t
z
LO
0
0
"'
~
I-II-I- u
I- 1-~
I-I- ............
I-I- 0
....
"""
["--
en
m
"0
.....
I-I-
0
0
~-
....
"" r\
"
.. ,
-~
.... - -- ~ - -
"'"tJ
"'
1\
"'
CO
"
N
~
N
"0
'
1'--t-t--.
0
N
.....
N
11>
"'
'
October 1974
11
B229
-~
"'
AD1065/M.
11
11
10 inch HIGH POWE R FULL RANG E LOUDSPEAK ER
APPLICATION
A fu ll range loudspeaker with high sensitivity for public adctre ss systems in enclosures
greater than 20 litres.
Smooth response from 60Hz to 18000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
MS
M15
15
Voice coil r esistance
3,4
13
Resonance fr equency
55
55
55
Hz

10
10
10
1, 5
1.5
1,5
Sweep voltage
4,5
6,3
8,7
Energy in airgap
225
225
225
mJ
1, 12
1,1 2
1,1 2
mm
6, 5
6,5
4,5
mm
Rated impedance
Operating power
Flux density
Airgap height
Voic e coil height
Core diameter
:::::::
25
25
25
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
90
0,45
Fxd
90
0,45
Fxd
90
0,45
mm
kg
1,52
1,52
1,52
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper surround and a double cone.

Connection to the loudspeaker by means of 6, 3 mm (0, 25 inch) Fastons or soldering .
October 1974
11
_ _ !I _
M4
B231
AD1065 /M.
LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
D
D
~
--
.- - -1
f.-
c::::
1 - - - -- -
l j
I?
.-
.-5,6
2440,05 - - - -- '
261,1 max
. 91,8 148,5 22 9,3

max max m O X
7Z6518 2. 2
1=[2,4 max
... 9,4max
._64 ,1max~
113ma x -
Fig.l
Baffle hole diameter 227 mm
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r--- (0 = stamped on loudspeaker magnet ,

1

AD1065/Ml5, catalogue number 2422 257 410 . 3
2 = for bulk packing '-')
6 = for singie unit packing
Curve b : Sound pressure measured in anechoic room at operating power of 1, 5 W.
Loudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 1 enclosure, filled with 1 kg of glass wool.
Curve c : 200 and 3rd harmonic distortion, measured at operating power of. 1, 5 W in
anechoic room_. Loudspeaker mounted in 80 1 enclosure, filled with 1 kg of glass
wool.
B232
October 1974
AI?1065/M.
LOUDSPEAKER
N
~
f-"
.__
c:::: r--
r-
~~
\~
"""
::;_
--"'
'
"
c:
"'
?'
"""~
\0
......
Lfl
:::;.~
3:.
<p
-p
.j
1/
...,J.
/ ~
I<
N
I
0
0
-::t
Lfl
1\.
0
0
()
'
N
.
- ::E
- - ..........
-
.......
........
L.{)
lD
0
N
0
0
<(
en
N
CO
,_
.!:
'
.-
' \
::oP
= =-"'
0
0
("')
-o
Lfl
~~
.........
"'
......
- -
...............
'
-o /
.
'
.. == -
Lfl
Lfl
.0
0
0
1- ::t.
0
.-
.......
....,..,
N
lD
0
N
.!oil
~
AD1065/W.
11
11

APPLICATION
For high fidelity reproduction in sealed acoustic enclosures in accordance with DIN 45500.
Recommended enclosure volume 35 litres. Maximum recommended cross -over
frequency 1000 1-Iz. Rated frequency range 40 to 3000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
W8
W4
4
3,2
6,8
Resonance frequency
20
20
Hz

mounted in .35 1 sealed enclosure
30
30
Operating power
Sweep voltage
Rated impedance
Energy in a irgap
F l ux density
Airgap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet m ater ial
di ameter
we ight
Weight of loudspea ker
280
280
0,94
0 ,94
mJ
T
mm
12, 1
13,5
mm
25
25
mm
Fxd
90
0,45
Fxd
90
0,45
mm
kg
1,8
1, 8
kg

Connection to the loudspeaker by mean s of 6, 3 mm (0, 25 inch) Fastens or soldering.
October 1974
13235
AD1065/W.

LOUDSP EAKER
Dimensions (mm)
T
I
I
t
I
I
--
1- - - - - -
r- -,
1--
D
~
------1
I?
~mp.x-.
1-+-- - - - - 261,1max - - - - - - + 1
91 ,8 148,5 2Z9 ,3
max max ma
7Z66842 .J
~~-9,4 max
--s.s
2440,05
'
113m~x-
Fig.1
1 ) Baffle hol e and clearance depth required for cone m6vement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indi cated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r- (0
J ,
= stamped on loudspeaker magnet.
n ot to be used for ordenng)
AD 1065/W4, catalogue number 2422 257 .3 13. 1
'
AD 1065/W8 , catalogue number 2422 257 313.2

~ 2 for hulk packing * )
L _ 6 for single unit packing

Curve b : Sound pressure measured in anechoic room at operating power of 5 W.
'
Loudspeaker mounted in seal ed 80 1 enclosure, filled with 1 kg of glass wooL
Curve c : 2M and 3rd harmonic distortion , measured at operatin g power of 5 W in
anechoic room. Loudspeaker mounted in 80 1 enclosure, filled with 1 kg of glass
wool.
'~ ) M inimum packing quantity 1 per unit.
L__
B236
_ __
October 1974

LOUDSPEAKER
AD1065/W.
N
N
_y
....
.......
Lf)
I~
I--"
1/
/V
,...V
V
/
--
. I
I.
0
0
I
0
Lf)
Lf)
-:!
0
.OD
, I/
,
I
' ...'
I-
""
.........
c.Q
0
........
N
0
October 1974
1\.
.....
,"
(")
-o
\... ........
r-..
r-....
I
I
...
0
0
',
1.{)
1-
I
\
I/
1/
-o
0
0
...
I
/
u
Lf)
I/
I -I -
--
11\.
--
...
--
.....
0
Lf)
0
N
<{
I
Cl)
"0
N
Ol
N
CO
lD
13:!:37
AD10100/W.
11
11
APPLICATION
For high fidelity reproduction in sealed acoustic e nclo sures in accordanc e with DIN45500.
Recommended enclos ure volume 35 litres . Max imum r ecommended cross -over frequency
800Hz . R ate d freque ncy range 35 to 800 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
vers ion
W8
W4
4
Vo ice co il r es istance
3, 4
6,5
Resonance frequency
25
25
Hz

measured with out filter
mount ed in 35 l sealed encl osure
40
40
2,5
2,5
Rated impe dance
Operating power
Sweep voltage
Energy in a irga p
Flux density
Airgap he ight
w
V
m]
820
820
1, 03
1,03
mm
Voice co il height
15
17,2
mm
Core di ameter
50
50
mm
Fxd
130
1, os
Fxd
130
1, 05
mm
kg
3,0
3,0
Magnet material
diameter
we igh t
We ight of loudspeaker
kg
The loudspe aker has a rubber surround .

Connection to the lou~ speaker by means of ~ 3 mm (0, 25 inch) Fastons or soldering.
October 1974
---
::::
ADlOlOO/W.
LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
-rn::~==~~rr -+-..---lrlllll-~~; ~~xs ~~;?
--
'1....--I-+---!j
-~1-9,4max
--s,s
244
261,1 max
j
7Z66990.3
64 ,1 max~
130,8 m a x -
Fig. 1
13ufrie hole diameter 227 mm
One tag is indicat ed by n red mark for in -p hase connecrion.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r--<O =stamped on loud spea~er magnet,
1,
not to be used for ori:lenng)
AD 10100/W 4. cata logue number 2422 257 412.1
AD 10100/WH. catalogue number 2422 257 412.2
2 for bulk packing'~)

Curve b : Sound pressure measured in anec.hoic room at operating power of 2, 5 W.

Curve c : 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion, measured at operating power of 2, 5 W in
anechoic room. Loudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 1 enclosure, filled with 1 kg
of glass wool.
':') Minimum packing quantity 1 per unit..
B240
Octobex:..l 97_6
ADlOlOO/W.
LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
CO
CO
ID
..--
"
'I
1--
,.,....
1.{)
1-- ~~
'I'-
[\..
I'1--
!"-+-.
- ~!>
[/
""'"I
:::::l
. . . v , - - _,
-
...,..l/
.........
..--
-,
0
0
~~
..;:t
.0
'
"0
"'
....
II-
-3
0
0
..--
t--...
"
,.-0
1.{)
t--...
r-
0
0
N
I
I
I
...........
0
0
1--
-~
(T}
1'\
'
\I
r--...
.......
r-... r- . . .
-'
0
N
4:
N
0
..-
en
"0
October 1974
N
(])
N
CO
N
['-
lD
-~
~
---
\
I\
1.{)
r.....
0
0
"0
z-
1.{)
1.{)
---
1.{)
..--
AD1265/M.
11
11
Connection to the loudspeaker by means of 6, 3 mm (0, 25 inch) Fastons or soldering.
October 1974
1324:3
AD1265/M.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
148,5 278,7
max max
7210865
-./l24max
s,6max
-8Smax-.
.-1Q4,4max134max-
.. l...
1+--- - - --
314,5 max - - - - ---'
Fig.l
1
) Baffle hole a nd clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in- phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r- (0 = stamped on loudspeaker magnet,

1
AD1265/M4, catalogue number 2422 257 411. l

t=
2 = for bulk packing '")


Loudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 1 enclosure, filled with l kg of glass wool.
Curve c : 2M and 3~ harmonic distortion, measured at operating power of l, 44 W in
of glass wool.
':') Minimum packing quantity l per unit.
!3244
II_, _~~"
October 1974
AD1265/M.
L OU DSPEAKE R
0
N
...s-
r--
CD
<Xl
.,/
r-N
r--
c~
it'"""
,_
....... ~
..:<:
0
'
.......
~-
tJ)
r- :-1--
lj
l/
-.....
!J
0
0
tJ)
tJ)
-:t
.0
I
0
~
(
~ s;;.
"0
......
- --
..........
- -
.........
-- '
1.0
(!)
...--
i"" ;.::..
--
t'
.......
:-
--- ;::
(T)
"0
<{
,_
- :: -
0
0
-.
-~
,..... /
0
tJ)
<
- c:- "'
'
.......
0
0
I-
- ----
0
N
0
~
October 1974
CD
-o
CJ)
<0
['-.
tJ)
(!)
11
13:.145
.~
AD1265/W.
11
12 incb HIGH POWER WOOFER LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
For high fidelity reproduction in sealed acoustic enclosures in accordance with DIN45500.
Maxi mu m enclosure volume 80 litres . Maximum recommended cross-over f1equency
800Hz. Rat ed frequ e ncy range 40 to 3000Hz .
TECHNICAL DATA
vers ion
W4
W8
4
Voice co il resistance
3.2
6,8
Resonance frequency
20
20
Hz

mounted in 80 l sealed enclosure
30
30
4.5
4, 5
w
V
Rated impedance
Operating power
Sweep voltage
Energy in airgap
F lux density
280
280
0,94
0 , 94
Airgap height
Voice coil height
Core dia meter
5
12 .
m}
T
mm
13 ,5
mm
25
25
mm
\~eight
Fxd
90
0 ,45
Fxd
90
0 , 45
mm
kg
Weight of loudspeake r
1 ,8
1, 8
Magnet material
diameter
kg
T he loudspeaker has a rubber surround .

Co nnection to the loudspeaker by m eans of 6 . 3 mm(O, 25 inch) Fastons or sold er ing.
Octobe
9.1
13247
-::::::
AD1265/W.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
91,8 148.5 278,7

max max max
7Z669e9.1
.... 6,4
1- - - - - - 294 0,05 ..,------..:.~1
1 - + - - - - - - - 314,5max - - - - --
-. ... 9,6max
.... asmax-..
-1D4,4max-134max--
'Fig. 1
handling capacity.
r---
1.
(0
= stamped on
loudspeaker magnet,
not t~ be used for ordermg)
AD 1265/W4 , catalogue number 2422 257 312. 1

AD 1265/W8, catalogue number 2422 257 312.2
~2 for bul k packing ~ )
~ 6 for single unit packing

Curve c : 2llil and 3Dl harmonic distortion, measured at .operating power of 4, 5 W in
of glass wool. Baffle dimensions 500 x 600 mm.
* ) Minim~m packing quantity 1 per unit.
f3_2_4s_
!.___ _
---~~ ~~--~---~-------~~ ~--'October
IJ4
AD1265/W.

LO UDSPE AK ER
N
LO
I'
([)
_:{_
"'N
..-
I'
'
it- ~
t--
c:(' --
--
L!)
f-
=-
.......
/
1--::::
~
.'
0
0
L!)
L!)
..::t
0
'
.D
0
0
'
I
I
0
0
"
"0
/
:._.,
u
I
\...
(")
j".::
r- 1--
1--
3=
....._
r-
tD
,,
~
I.(')
- r-
......
""
, 11' ..
0
0
~
~
L!)
/." "
i"'-
't----
..
I.,
"0
L!)
I
I
V
r
1\
-z
'
I
I.X,
0
N
<(
I
N
0
October 1974
CD
\J
N
Ol
N
<0
lD
~~~~~-~~-n'J<LO -----"
AD12100 /HP.
11
12 in ch HIGH POWER FULL RANGE LOUDSPEAKER

APPLICATION
A dual cone loudspeaker for high power applications such as guitar amplifiers and
electronic organs.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
HP4
Rated impedance
HP8
3, 5
7.2
Resonance frequency
60
60
Hz

measu red without f ilter
50
50
10
14
Operating power
Sweep volt age
Energy in a irgap
820
820
1,03
1,03
12 , 2
12,5
mm
50
50
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
130
Fxd
130
l
mm
kg
3.27
3,27
kg
F lux density
Ai rgap height
Vo i ce coil
l~ght
Core diameter
m]
T
mm
The loudspeaker has a textile surround and a cork gasket on the fl a nge.
Connect ion t o the loudspeaker by m eans of 6, 3 mm (0, 25 inch) Fasten s or solderi ng.
October 1974
R2SJ
---
AD12100/HP.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
lll278
...- - - -
r
133 ,3 27 8,7
mox ma X
~"
'
!
7Z66840
I I- 9,6 ma x.
1 - - - - - - 314,5 max
1 ... 2,4ma x
- - - - --1
_ ,,
-- 91ma x 5 ,4m o x -
F ig.l
Baffle hole diameter 278 mm .

AVAILAB LE VE RSIONS
r--<O ~s tamped on loudspeaker magnet .
AD 12100/HP4 , calalogue number 2422 257 511! 1
.. ''')
t== 2 f or 1 l k p;;cKmg
AD 12100/HPS, catalogue number 2422 '257 511.2
)U
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CU RVES (see Fig. 2)
Curve b : Sound pressure measured in anechoic room at operating power of l W.

Loudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 l enclosure, filled with 1 kg of glass wool.
Curve c : 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion, measured at operating powe r of 1 W in anechoic
room. Loudspeaker mounted in 80 l enclosure, fill'ed with 1 kg of glass wool.
'~ ) Minimum packing quantity 1 per unit.
B25 2
---'' ---~----~----~~~~ ---"'"October
1976
AD12100/HP.

LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
..
l<i
~~
I
..:>:
1--
....,
1-,
U")
1..!
1.- ....
le::: r....
I<
V
1/ I" I'-
KI'-
r--...
, f.- t:>
V
,
II
N
0
0
)...--
U")
U")
1\
\.,
1\
.D
I
0
0
,.
..j'
r<::
I/
) ,...
...., I
.~
~
0
0
,\~...
\I'.
U")
0
0
1'1.:
1-- I-1--
a..:
1'-,....
+-- :r:
'
1- I-- ............
0
0
1-1-
.....
r-....
(T)
['.._
'0
';,
)'...
........
N
I-- I--
October 1974
,,
"
0
U")
'0
Cf
[\
...-0
!'-..
0
N
I
N
_;
0
N
<Jl
CO
N
lD
N~
U")
R2 S.1- - . . . . . . ; - -
AD12100/M.
11
11
APPLICATION
A dual -cone loudspeaker with extremely high sensitivity for power applications such as
public address systems, discotheques and domestic en closures greater than 50 litre s ,
a nd open baffles .
version
TECHNICAL DATA
M4
Rated impedance
Ml5
MS
4
15
3, 2 '
13 , 2
Resonance frequency
45
45
45
Hz

measured without filter.
25
25
25
0,55
0,55
0,6
6.3
12,2
Operating power
Sweep voltage
Ener gy in airgap
Flux density
Airgap height
970
970
970
1, 15
1, 15
1, 15
.V
m]
mm
9, 1
10,3
13,3
mm
Core diameter
33 , 4
33, 4
33,4
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
130
1
Fxd
130
Fxd
130
1
mm
kg
3 ,3
3,3
3,3
kg
Vo ice coil height
--:::::::
The l oudspeaker has a paper surround and a cork gasket on the flange.
Connection to the loudspeaker by me a ns of 6, 3 mm (0, 25 inch) F astons or solder ing.
October 1974
1!255 _ _ _ _ _...
AD12100/M .

LOl JDSPE AK ER
Dimensions (mm)
- ---
t]
0 278
r.
133 ,3 27 8,7
mo x mox
1266840
I ~- 9,6max
l..-2,4 ma x
.__ 91max- - 15 1,4 max
1- - -- - - - 314 ,5 max ------'-t~l

Fig. l
Baffl e hol e diameter 278 mm

One tag is indica ted by a r O! d mark for
in-p h 1~e
AV AILABLE VERSIONS
connection .
r---- <0
1.
AD 12 100/ M-1.
caralogue numbe r 2-!22 257 510. I
AD 12100/MS,
cata logue nurnbe .r 2422 257 .510. 2
=stamped on loudspeaker magnet ,

AD 12100 / Ml5. catalogue number 2422 2:i7 510.:1

l----2 ror bulk packing':')
L_6 ror single unit packing
FR EQU ENCY RESPONSE CURVES (see Fig. 2)
Curve b : Sound pressu r e measured in . anechoic room at ope;ating power of 0, 55 W.
Loudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 I enclosure , filled with l kg of glass wool.
Curve c : 2n d and 3rd harmonic distortion, measured at operating power of 0 , 55 W in
anechoic room . Loudspeaker mounted in 80 I enclosure , filled with 1 kg of
glass wool.
':') Mini mu m packing quantity J per unit.
8256
Octobe r 1976
AD12100/M.
LOUDSPEAKER
I
N
CXl
CD
N
r--
-"'
loo-
1--
!'--..
...,.
0
N
!"":::::
0
0
_s
I
.X
0
~
-~
.,
t-
<
.... ~
1-
<
.;!5
c:
<
f!:
!")
.............
Lf)
.......
,...
"/
//
.::::
I
~
0
0
IJ
Lf)
Lf)
1/
I'.
0
0
.c;t
Lf)
z
0
.0 r'\.
1\
0
0
N
N
'0
r\
......
0
0
- 1- 1- ,.
1--
"
.......... .......
........
(Y')
........
...-
......
"'
u -
'0
"r-... -.
0
0
<{
-.
, :
"!'.... ---- '
--
\
~
0
Lf)
.!::>
>
r==:: ........
0
N
I
N
0)
"0
'<""
October 1974
0
~
a>
<X)
['.
-----
Lf)
tD
11
8257
-~
u..
AD12100/W.
11
11

APPLICATION
For high f ide lity reproduction in sealed acoust ic enclosures in accorda nce with DIN45500.
Recommended enclosure volume 80 litres. Maximum recommended cross -over frequency
700 Hz. Rated frequency range 30 to 700 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
W4
Rated impedance
Resonance frequency
W8
4
3,4
6, 5
19
19
Hz
40
40
Operating power
Sweep voltage
5-

Energy in airgap
Flux density
Airgap height
Voice co il height
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
weight
820
820
1,03
1, 03
mm
15
17 , 2
mm
mJ
T
50
50
mm
Fxd
130
1,05
Fxd
130
1, 05
mm
kg
3,2
3,2
kg
The loudspeaker has a rubber s).lrround.

Connection to the loudspeaker by means of 6,3 mm (0,25 inch) Fastons or soldering.
October 1974
----
AD12100/W.

LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
133,3 278,7
max
----
max
l
7Z70866.1
1-+--- - - - - 314,5max - - - - ---1
Fig.!
l..- 9,6max
--91 max-151,4max-
handling capacHy.
One tag is indi cated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVA ILABLE VERSIONS
r---<0 = s tamped on loudspeake r magnet,
AD 12100/W4 , catalogue number 2422 257 413 ! 1
not to be used for orde ring)
AD 12100/WS, catalogue number 2422 257 413 .2

t = = 2 for bulk packing':')
6 for s ingle unit packing
Curve b : Sound pressure measured in anechoic room at operating power of 2 W.
Curve c : 2nd and 3rd h armon~ c distortion , measur e d a t operating power of 2 W in a ne choic
room. Loudspeaker mounted in 80 1 enclosure , filled with 1 kg of glass wool.
'~) Minimum packing quantity 1 per unit .
B260
October 1976
12 inc h HIGH POWER WOOFER
AD12100/W.
LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
-:
5N
I
..::.::
0
ro
<D
,....
.-
~~
<
~--""
......
~~
--
le:: f:::
1"-... t-
V
v
V
1'-
, --
,
\
0
0
',
L[)
L[)
~
c..
-~
0
0
N
'
f-- f--
,,
1- f--!
"'
<
"'
.of'\
\
I-- I--
0
0
p.,
' IJ
I-- I--
I
L[)
z
1\
I-- I--
,_
'
-0
0
.......
N
.......
0
---
r-....
I\. !--..
N
"0 I--
'
....
.-'I,
h r--.
.-
I'.
.-
"'
M
"0
<t
--.;;;
I'-
0
0
L[)
0
N
I
N
0
N
Q)
N
<0
N
lD
October 1974
B26l
Cross-over networks
ADF1600
11
11
2-WA Y CROSS-OVER NETWORK
APPLICATION
For use in 2-way loudspeaker systems with High fidelity or High quality woofe rs and the
dome tweeter AD0160/T.
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedance
type ADF1600/4
type ADF1600/8
Cross-over frequency
type ADF 1600/ 4
type ADF1600/8
--
Q
Q
4
8
1600
1800
Hz
Hz
20
Slope , low pass

high pass
6
12
dB/octave
dB/octave
Circuit diagram
version
4Q
8Q
+
4!1 (8!1)
tweeter
4!1 ( 8!1)
Ll
L2
Cl
0,8
0,35
12
-0 ,8
0,5
8
Loudspeaker terminal marked with red dot to be connected to+.
March 1973
11
B265
mH
mH
flF
ADF1600
2-WAY CROSS-OVER NETWORK
Frequency characteristics
1Z6S 8 51
attenuation
11
40-
(dB)
an---
...
0
.(
if
-10
--
,, "'
/]
'
1\. '
IJ
-20
1\.
"
'
'\.'
'\.'
'
111
-30
/
10
100
Dimensions (mm)
1000
10000
l
~~;l__~1~!_ @"~ C{P
5,50,5
1-470,1 -!
----~--~------4---~
L2- -
T otal height 42 mm
6 soldering tags for connection
frequency (Hz)
tweeter
L1
i';;put -woofer
.... 251 i..:-=500.1 =-i

I
1:. -- - - 101 max
7Z658L8
Attention : If the + and - signs printed on the board do not correspond with their respective positions in the drawing, the connections must be made in accordance with
the drawing.
CATALOGUE NUMBERS
Type ADF1600/4: catalogue number 4304 078 72720

Type ADF.l600/8: catalogue number 4304 078 72820
8266
March 1973
ADF2400
11
)
2 ~WA Y CROSS-OVER NETWORK
APPLICATIO N
For use in 2-way loudspeaker systems with High fidelity or high quality woofers and
cone tweeters AD2071/T. or AD2090/T.
TECHNI CAL DATA
Rated impedance
type ADF2400/4
type ADF2400 / 8
4
8
Cross-over frequency
2400
Hz
20
Slope , low pass

high pass
6
6
dB/octave
dB/octave
Circuit diagram '
o-- .
-
4il(8il)
l.
-
woof er
-y
Jc
tweeter
version
L
4Q
8Q
0,5
12
mH
}JF
+J '
'-----._4_n_!a_n_'______J 4n 1an)
7Z6623S
Loudspeaker terminal marked with red dot to tie connected to+.
October 1974
13267
---
ADF2400
Fre<:juency characteristic
7Z6Sa50
attenuation
(dB)
-10
'
/
IX _
~
1"1
)
11
V
-20
'\.
'\.
/
1/
-30
10
100
1000
10000
frequency lHz)
Dimensions (mm)
5,50,5
70,5
max
Total height 42 mm
6 soldering tags for connection
~~
..
tweeter
...;.
.:.
.!.
input woofer
7Z65847
Attention : If the + and - signs printed on the board do not correspond with their re pective positions in the drawing, the connections must be made in accordance with
the drawing.
CATALOGUE NUMBERS
Type ADF2400/ 4: catalogue number 4304 078 72860

Type ADF2400/8: catalogue number 4304 078 72850
~8
268 ~11
Mar ch 1973
11
ADFS00/4500
11
3-WA Y CROSS-OVER NETWORK
APPLICATION/
For use in 3 -way l oudspeaker systems with High fidelity or High quality woofers ,
squawkers and dome tweeters.
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedance,
type ADF500/4500/4
type ADF500/4500/8
4
8
Q
Q
Cross- over freq uencies
500 and 4500
Hz
Power ha ndling capacity
40
Slope, low pass

band pass (mid range)
high pass
6
6
12
dB/octave
dB/octave
dB/octave
Circuit diagram
TC1
+
-
4.!1(8.!1)
woofer
4!1(8.!1)
version
4Q
8Q
L2
squawker
tweeter
4.!1 (8.!1)
4.!1(8.!1)
Ll
L2
L3
Cl
C2
2, 1
0, 2
0,2
50
5
7Z68237
3 mH
0,35 mH
0,5 mH
24 !-L F
3,3 !-L F
'
Loudspeaker terminal marked with r e d dot to be connected t o+ .
March 1973
~-~11 _
13269
--
---
ADFS00/4500
Frequency characteristics
7Z65852
11
attenuation
(dB)
40--
so---
......
"'
,-- ...
r.;or,
"till\
"-i'
~~
1/
- 10
lj
,v
. 1/
'f.
1-' I
I
"''
' 'I;
"'
:'
11
V'
10
'
li
V
-30
..
'\' I
//
-20
11/
1'\:'..
100
1000
10000
frequency (Hz)
Dimensions (mm)
Total height 42 mm
Connections with 0, 25 inch Fastons
Attention_: If the + and - signs printed
on the board do not correspond with their
respective positions in the drawing, the
connections must b e made in accordance
with the drawing.
CATALOGUE NUMBERS
Type ADF500/4500/4: catalogue number 4304 078 72840

Type ADFS00/4900/8: catalogue number 4304 078 72500
13270
\[I
March 1973
11
3
Recommended
loudspeaker combinations
lllllrl
RECOMMENDED LOUDSPEAKER COMBINAT IONS
Ol
'-1
"'
"'
11
4 and
'
an
impedance
COMBINATION
no. I
woofer
sq uawker
tweeter
cross-over!network
i'"I
,_.
"''-1
"'
power
handl in g
capacity
AD 5060/W 4 (8)
AD 2071/T 4 (8)
ADP 2400/4 (8)
3 1
AD 5060/W 4 (8)
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
ADF 1600/4 (8)
3 1
lOW
AD 7066/W 4 (8)
AD 0140/ T 4 (8)
ADF 1600/4 (8)
7 1
20
AD 8061/W 4 (8)
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
ADP 1600/4 (8)
20 I
20
AD 8066 /W 4 (8)
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
ADF 1600/4 (8)
20 I
20
AD 806 1/ W 4 (8)
AD 5060/Sq 4 (8)
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
ADP 500/45 00/4 (8)
25 I
40
AD 8066/ W 4 (8)
AD 5060/Sq 4 (8)
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
ADF 500/45 00/4 (8)
25 1
40
AD 10100/W 4 (8)
AD 10100/W 4 (8)
AD 5060/Sq 8 (4)
10
AD -1265/W 4 (8)
AD 5060/Sq 8 (4)
11
AD 12100/W 4 (8)
AD 5060/Sq 4 (8)
AD 5060/Sq 4 (8)
lOW
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
ADP 500/45 00/4 (8)
35 1
40
AD 0140/T 8 (4)
ADP 500/45 00/4 (8)
40 1
40
AD0140/T 8 (4)
ADF 500/45 00/4 (8)
50 1
40
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
ADF 500/45 00/4 (8)
80 1
40
For more information see our Application book "Building Hi- Pi speaker syste ms".
enclosure
volume
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
::0
til
(')
:;:
0:;:
oti:J
gZ
o:>tl
-til
ZtJ
>I:""'
:jo
Oc:::
ZtJ
men
'"0
til
>
~
til
::0
Television tuners
and aerial input assemblies
--
ELC1042/05
2422 542 10721
V.H.F. TELEVISION TUNER

with di~de tuning
Systems
C. C. I.R. system s A,B and I
Channels
band I
band Ill
system A
system B
system I
B1 to B5
B6 to B14
E2 to E4
E5 to E 12
IA to re
ID to IJ
Intermediate frequencies
picture
sound
34 , 65 MHz
38 , 15 MHz
38 , 9 MHz
33 , 4 MHz
39 , 5 MHz
33,5 MHz
APPLICATION
Designed to cover 405 line v. h. f. and 625 line (wired distribution) channels, and the
v . h . f. channels of C . C . I. R. system B.
November 1974
C3
--
c::
C::
ELC1042/05
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
2422 542 10721
with diode tuning
DESCRIPTION
The E LC 1042/05 is av. h . f. tuner with electronic tuning and band switching, covering the
v. h ..f. band I (frequency range 41, 5 to 68 MHz), and the v . h. f. band Ill (frequency range
174 to 230 MHz).
Mechanically the tuner is built on a low-loss printed-wiring board , carrying all components . in a metal housing made of a rectangular frame and front and rear cover (see
Fig.2). The aerial connection is on the frame side . a ll other connections (supplyvoltages,
a. g. c. voltage , tuning and switching voltages) are made via feedthrough capacitors in the
underside. The mounting method is shown in Figs. 3 and 4.
The v.h.f. aerial signal is fed via an i.f. trap to a tuned input circuit , which is connected
to the emitter of the input transistor BF264. The collector load of this transistor is for med by a double tuned circuit, transferring the signal to the base of the mixer transistor
BF 195 . The oscillator is equipped with a BF 194 .transistor. The three r . f. circuits are
tuned by three capacitance diodes BB105G. Switching between v. h. f. I and Ill is achieved
by five switching diodes BA 182.
The collector circuit of the mixer transistor is a single tuned i. f. resonant circuit , at
the low end of which the i. f. signal is capacitively coupled out of the tuner.
The tuner requires transistor supply voltages of+ 12 V, a switching voltage of+ 12 V,
a. g . c. voltages, variable from+ 2, 5 V (normal operating point) to about + 6 V (maximum
a .g. c.) and a tuning voltage , variable from +0 , 3 V to +25 V.
The aerial input of the tuner is .asymmetr ical. For use in symmetrical aerial systems ,
aerial transformers (baluns) are available (see ACCESSORIES).
C4.
November 1974
z0
<
(1)
g.
(1)
!J
"'
"'
"'
'-"
..,._
,_.
"'
0
""',_.
..,._
, - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -_- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - l
I
'If'
I
I
if'
..l
01
C
lB
07
,., .,.
rC2~
3
m
-:
0:
llB
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C2
.,
I
I
I
c I
R2
371
I
35
C39I
I
I
I
I
I
26
30
Rll
I
I
I
I ,
I
'"I1
0.
r-'
... <tx:l
":::: En
s
(1)
oq
>-l
c:::
ztx:l
::0
1'-=j1'@=~ j'l'1:JII
l
C10
CIJ
CIS
C33
I
I
L-x--------------- ~ 10--- -l ~CD-- - ---l ~Q---------:---------------'1
o.g.c. voltage
1+2,5 to +6Vl
(J1
::r
g, >-l
tx:l
I
I
Cl
<
::r:
d. supply
swtching ~voltoge
voltage
1+12Vl
l-t-12VI
C34
tun1ng voltage
1+0.3 to +2SVI
CJ6
C39
test
1J.
point
output
r-
mixtr/osclllotor
supply voltage
f+ 12V)
to.)
Fig. L
.........
0
U1
_ _ _ _ _,llliJLI
u- -
ELC1042/05
2422 542 10721
with diode tuning
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
aer~
58,8
max
_1
E
- - - 91,44136e) - - --
= 2, 54
mm (0 , 1 in)
1Z10624.1
Fig.2
Terminal 2 =a . g. c. voltage, +2, 5 to +6, 0 V
3 = switching voltage, v. h . f. Ill, + 12 V (approx. 12, 5 mA)
4 = r.f. supply voltage, +12 V (approx. 3, 2 to 10 mA)
5 =tuning voltage, +0, 3 to +25 V
8 = mixer/oscillator supply voltage, + 12 V (approx . 6, 7 mA)
9 = test point
10 = i. f. output
E =earth
November 1974
ELC1042/05
V.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
2422 542 10721
with diode tuning
Mounting
The tuner may be mounted by soldering it on to a printed-wiring board, using the piercing diagram shown in Fig. 3. (The tuner may also be mounted by means of a snap-in
mount or a bracket. Information will be supplied upon request).
The tuner may be mounted anywhere in the receiver and there are no restrictions on
orientation.
-
- - - - - - --
-~.~ -1,3
1
+g
Ef--- -I
91,44 ( 36e)
----'--------- ~
1
. !4x)
'
- - - - - - - - - ~+E-t
1 +g. 1 (7x)
. --1.1 -
'
I
'
- -t: U-- ~~-=-st~~ - ~
E t lS, 24j 7,6Z )'.62 , 7,62

(6el
(3e) (3e) (3el
j_
22,86
(9e)
7,6217,62 1~
_ j
22,86
(9t
5,08(2e,.
1
, , .,
(3el (3el
Fig. 3 Piercing diagram viewed from solder side of board; e = 2, 54 mm (0 , 1 in)

screening folded
back over outer cover
~ 70621
.r r
- .l
-- 1-
2,5 max
make sure that screw
does not protrude deeper
Fig. 4 Recommended fixing method of the aerial cable. Use a self-tapping screw.
November 1974
11~
cz- _____.
ELC1042/05
2422 542 10721
with diode tuning
ELECTRICAL DATA
Unless otherwise specified all electrical values apply at an ambient temperature. of
25 5 oc and a supply voltage of 12 0,3 V.
Semiconductors , r. f. amplifier
mixer
oscillator
turiing diodes
switching diodes
BF264
BF 195
BF194
3 X BB105G
5 X BA182

operating
storage
+5 to +55 oc
- 25 to+ 85 oc
Supply voltage
Current drawn from+ 12 V supply
band I
band Ill
10 to 16, 5 mA } depending on
22,5to29mA a.g.c. voltage
A . G . C. voltage (Figs.5 and 6)

band I, at nominal gain
at 40 dB gain reduction
band Ill, at nominal gain
+2 , 5
+ 4, 9
+2 , 5
+ 4, 3
+12 V 10%
V
V (typical)
V
V (typical)
A. G. C. current at 40 dB gain reduction
band I
band Ill
max. 0 , 8 mA
max. 0 , 6 mA
Tuning vo ltage range (Figs. 7 and 8)

Current drawn from 25 V ttining voltage supply
+0,3i:o+25V
max. 30 flA
Switching voltage
band I
band Ill
open circuit
+12 V, 10%
system A
Frequency ranges
band I channel Bl (picture carrier
45 MHz) to channel B5
(picture carrier 66,75 MHz)
band Ill channel B6 (picture carrier
179,75 MHz) to channel Bl4
(picture carrier 219,75 MHz)
picture
34,65 MHz
sound
38 , 15 MHz
CB
system B
channel E2 (p.c.
48 , 25 MHz) to channel
E4 (p.c. ~2.25 MHz)
channel E5 (p.c.
E l2 (p.c. 224,25MHz)
38 , 9 MHz
33,4 MHz
s ystem I
channel lA (p.c.
IC (p.c. 61,75 MHz)
channel ID (p.c.
IJ (p.c. 215 , 25 MHz)
39,5 MHz
33,5MHz
November 1974
ELC1042/05
V.H.F TELEVISION TUNER
2422 542 10721
with diode tuning
a.g.c. characteristic
H-t-t-t-t-t-t--H a.g.c. characteristic

VHF I
.,a;
H-+-H-+-H-4--j
VHF
c
0
:;;
,g
1! 10
.~
.~
0
"'
"'
20
30
40
-----
50
60
8
10
a.g.c. voltage I V)
10
a.g.c. voltage I V)
Fig.5.
Fig.6.
7Zl06:
VHF I
N
I
~
70
cha nnel
~
c
CT
.
.E
60
CT
.; 220
H-+++M
84
'-
2
1'
;
.."
.
u
85
IC
"
.,_1'
240 1-H-+-+--1-+-+-+-1---l-+-+-+~
,..
so
a.
----
:::~~
--
lA
81
82
. 200HH-+B
u
a.
40
30
10
20
160
30
tuning voltage (V)
F ig. 7.
November 1974
10
20
30
tuning voltage I V)
F ig . 8.
11
CCJ
--
I:
ELC1042/05
2422 542 10721
V . H. F . TELEVISIO N TUl\lER
with diode tlllling
Input impedance
asymmetrical
symmetrical
75 Q
300 Q (see ACCESSORIES)
V. 'S. W. R. (between picture carrier

and SO\llld carrier)
v . s . w.r. at nom.
gain
m ax . v. s . w. r.
during ga in con"trol
max . 3,5
max. 3,5
m ax . 3,5
max . 3,5
band I (except channel Bl)

band Ill
A.G.C. range
band I
band m
min. 40 dB
min. 40 dB
R. F. curves
bandwidth, band I, except channel B1
band III
typ. 10 to 12 MHz
typ . 9 to 20 MHz
tilt, band I , except channel Bl

band Ill, except channel E 12
Power gain (see a lso ADDITIONAL INFORMATION)
band I, except channel B1
channel'B1
channel IA
channel re
band Ill
channel ID
channel IJ
Noise figure
band I , except channel Bl
channel IB
band Ill
channel IG
max. 3 dB
m ax. 3 dB
min. 18 dB
min. 16 dB
typ. 20 dB
typ. 22 dB
min. 18 dB
typ. 25 dB
typ . 24 dB
max. 10
typ. 7,5
max. 10
typ. 7,0
dB
dB
dB
dB
I. F . rejection
band I , channel B2
channel B5
band m
Image rejection
band I
band Ill
min. 30 dB
min . 40 dB
min. 60 dB
min. 60 dB
min. 40 dB
- 11
Novembe
1974
2422 542 10721
ELC1042/05
with diode tuning
Signal handling (see also Figs. 9 and 10)

Minimum input signal (e. m . f.) producing
cross modulation (1%) at nominal gain,
in channel
(wanted signal: picture carrier frequency ,
interfering signal: sound carrier
frequency) , v. h. f. I
v. h. f.
typ. 8 to 14 mV
typ. 6 to 10 mV
Note 1
in band
(wanted signal: picture carrier frequency
of channel X,
interfering signal: picture carrier of
channel X-2
v.h.f. I
v.h.f. m
typ. 60 to lOO mV } Note 1

typ. 20 to 30 mV
Minimum input signal (e. m . f.) producing

overloading, at nominal gain
V. h. f. I
v.h.f. m
at maximum a. g. c.
v.h.f.I
v.h . f . Ill
typ. 20 mV
typ. 13 mV
min. 200 mV
min. 200 mV
Minimum input signal (e. m . f.) at nominal

gain producing a shift of the oscillator
frequency of 20 kHz
typ. 20 to 50 mV
Detuning of the i. f. output circuit as a

result of bandswitching and tuning
max. 200kHz

at a change of .the supply voltage of 10%
band I
band m
max. 300kHz
max. 300kHz
during warm-up time (meas ured between 3 s

and 60 s after switching on)
band I
band III.
Note 2
} Note 2
(Note 3)
max. 50kHz
max. 50kHz
Note 1- This e . m. f. is referred to an impedance of 75 Q .

1% cross modulation means that 1% of the modulation depth of the interfering
signal is transferred to the wanted signal.
Note 2 -This e. m. f. is referred to an impedance of 75 Q,
Criterion of overloading: 30% compression of the synchronization pulses of a
standard television signal or a noticeable deterioration of the picture quality.
Note' 3 - This e. m. f. is referred to an impedance of 75
November 1974
Q.
CH
.ELC1042/05
2422 542 10721
with diode tuning
Drift of oscillator frequency

at a change of the ambient temperature
from 25 to 40 oc
band I
band Ill
I
max. 400 k!-lz
max. 400 k!-l z
Oscillator radiation (oscillator voltages at

the aerial termina l)
The oscillator radiation will be within the limits of BS905: 1969 provided no connection
has been made to the test point and the circuit connected to the i. f. output is carefully
shielded.
For the oscillator fundamentals use is made of the relaxed limits , ass uming that the
design of the L f. amplifier of the receiver is such that a detuning of the oscillator of
-2 , 0 MHz or + 0, 6 MHz from the nominal frequency will result in unacceptable
picture and/or sound degradation .
---
Immunity from radiated interference

If the tuner, including the aerial connection (see Fig. 4) is installed. in a professional
manner , the immunity from radiated interference will be within the limits spec1f1ed
in BS905: 1969.
If a higher safety margin , or another cable connection is required, use can be made of
an immunity shield (see ACCESSORIES).
Microphonics
If the tuner is insta lled in a professional manner, there will be no noticeable micro phonics.
_l
, _ _ _l2
_ C
_ _ _ _ II
November ~974
ELC1042/0S
V. H. F . TELEVISION TUNER
2422 542 10721
with diode tuning
w'
72 70626
e.m.f. ,75n
!m V)
Vv
w'
...;:
f:::~ ......
1\
channel JC
IH=t.l
t-:.-"
ch annel IG
v.-1
10
---
1
0
10
30
20
40
50
60
gain reduction {dB I
Fig. 9. Cross m odulation, in channel.
10 3
e.m.f.
7Z7062S
,7sn
,\
!m V)
~\ _::;;o
10'
!'-,.../
I\
V
...... :;. . V
1'~
r---
channel JC IlA) channel
JG Ili E~
\ .X
10
1
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
gain reduc ti on (dB)
Fig. 10. Cross m odulation, in' band; .the interfering channels

are given between brackets.
November 1974
(' 1
.J
ELC1042/05
2422 542 10721
with diode tuning
Measuring method of power gain
The i. f. output of the tuner should be teqninate d with the circuit given below, the testpoint (terminal 9) not being connected.
8.2pF
i.f. output
of tuner
~ak.n.
detector probe
60pF
Lb
(2.,sonar 75HJ
(2.5turnl
?Z99U1 ,1
"
;t.
tco;e
from
this side
Fig. 11.
Feed an i. f. sweep signal to the v. h. f. I -mixer coupling coiL
6,8 pF
--1 ~--------1~
i.f. sweep
generator
56!1
330
pF
1,2 k.ll
7Z70628
Fig. 12.
Adjust the trimmer (Fig. 11) , tunable coil La/Lb, i. f. output coil of the tuner L18 (Fig. 1) ,
and the coupling between La and Lb to get the resonant curve as given below.
0,5d8
Fig. 13
C14
October 1974
2 422 542 10721
ELC1042/05
with diode tuning
Display the r. f. + i. f. curve of the tuner at 190 MHz (picture carrier frequency) and
make, if necess ary, s m all corrections in the a lignment of the i. f. coils (La/Lb and Ll8
to get the markers 39 , 5 MHz and 33, 5 MHz symmetrically on the slopes of the curve,
and the peaks at equal a mplitude.
Because the output impedance of the dummy circuit is 50 to 75 Q, the power gain can be
measured in the conventional manner by inserting tuher a nd dummy circuit between a
75 Q source a nd a 75 Q detector (or between a 50 Q source a nd matching pad 50/75 Q and a
50 Q detector).
ACCESSORIES
Aerial input transform~r ELC 1094, catalogue number 3122 107 10121, for converting the
aerial input from 75 Q asymmetric to 300 Q symmetric.
Immunity shield for screening the aerial connection, consisting of:
shield, catalogue number 4313 132 01910
clamp, catalogue number 4313 132 01890
OTHER AVAILABLE VERSION

E LC 1042 -catalogue number 2422- 542 10421.
This tuner is identical with the E LC 1042/05 except that the i. f. coil LIS of the E LC 1042
has four additional turns.
November 1974
:::::l
::::::i
ELC1043/05
2422 542 10461
U.H.F. TELEVISION TUNER

with diode tuning
Systems
C . C . I. R systems G and I
Channels
21 to 69
system G
system I
38,9 MHz
33,4 MHz
39,5 MHz
33,5 MHz
picture
sound
APPLICATION
Designed t_o cover the u. h. f. channels 21 to 69 of C. C. I. R. systems G and I.
November 1974
Cl7
ELC1043/05
2422 542 1046 1
U. H . F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
DESCRIPTION
The ELC 1043/05 is an u. h. f. tuner with electronic tuning covering the u. h. f. bands IV
and V (frequenc y range 4 70 to 860 MHz).
Mechanically the tuner is built on a l ow -loss printed- wiring board, carrying all compo nents , in a metal housing made of a rectangular fr a me and front and rear cover (see
Fig. 2). The aer ia l connection is on the frame side, a ll other connections (supply voltages,
a . g. c. voltage and tuning voltage) are made via feedthrough capacitors in the under side.
The mounting method is shown in Figs. 3 and 4.
The tuner is of the three transistor type, comprising two r. f. stages and an oscillator I
mixer. The input circuit is untuned , so that optimum noise figures may be realised,
whilst the additi onal r. f. stage compensates for the increased insertion loss associated
with diode tuned circuits.
Coupling between the first and second r.f. stages is by a half- wave tuned line, between
the second r. f. stage and the mixer is by bandpass half-wave tuned lines . The secondary
of the bandpass is coupled to the emitter of the oscillator/mixer stage via a coupling
loop , which also provides the inductive feedback of the oscillator.
Half-wave lines, terminated at one end by a fixed capacitor and tuned at the other end by
a variable capacitance diode , are used throughout.
The tuner require s transistor supply voltages of+ 12 V, a. g. c. voltages , variable from
+ 2, 5 V (n ormal operating point) to about+ 7, 5 V (maximum a. g. c . ) and a tuning voltage,
variable from+ 0, 3 V to +25 V.
The aerial input of the tuner is a s ymmetrica l. For use in symmetrical aerial systems ,
a eria l transformers (ba luns) are ava ilable (see ACCESSORIES).
Cl8
11
11
November
JQ74
L.
0
<
(1)
a.g.c. voltage
I+ 2,5 to + 7,5VI
(1)
1-j
.....
"''-I
"""
"""
~
g.
.
r. f. supply voltage
(+ 12VI
mixer/oscillator
supply voltage
t+ 12V)
tuning voltage
I+ 0,3 to + 2SVI
(J1
i.f. output
C4
C11
C21
C22
'
'
C2S
test
point
RS
I
I
I
I
R13
~--I
~.
::r
S:
0
0..
(1)
rt
5"
()q
j_
"'
'!1
;;l
r-'
til
<
En
0z
2z
til
aedallTh
I
:r::
rt
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
c:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a"""
,_.
R22
R3
C
26
.....
.....
~--4~----- ~~~-- 1 ~-----------------4~---~-----41~~--l
I
I
I
I
I
"""
:::0
C1
l2
C3I
I~* Q'"
II~
~27
l3
C9I
I~*
II~
:
~28
l19
I~
*
II'~
I~29
l24
18
I4
I1 ~~"~*
T
:
l2S
C3~
II
r-
L------~-------~1_------~-------J--------~---------~
: ~~ ll
n
....
0
..........
F ig. 1.
U1
IJIIUI _
ELC1043/05
2422 542 10461
U . H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
oer
---
it
-pCi:J
V)
"l! 'u'4 lt5
1
10
54,6
l
E
+-- - - 91,44136e) - - --
e = 2;54 mm (0, 1 in)
Fig.2
Terminal 2 = a. g. c . voltage, + 2, 5 to +7, 5 V
4 = r . f. supply voltage,
+ 12 V (approx. 8, 8 to 13
mA)
5 =tuning voltage, +0, 3 t o + 25 V

8 = mixer/oscillator suppl y voltage,
+ 12 V (approx . 3, 6
mA)
10 = i. f. output
E =earth
C20
11
November 1974
2422 542 10461
ELC1043/05
U. H. F . TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
Mounting
The tuner m ay be mounted by soldering it on to a printed-wiring boa rd, usingthepiercing
diagram s hown in F ig . 3. (The tuner may also be mounted by means of a snap -in mount
or a bracket. Information will be supplied upon request).
The tuner m ay be m ounted anywhere in the receiver and there are no restrictions on
orientati on.
91,44(36e) --------- ~
.. ,1, .... 13+0,1(4x)
-tr-- - - - - - - - .- --- -tr --------,1

'
'
1 +g,1 (5x)
_ -
r-
..
22,86
!9el
:r1#-r =Pc:"i'' ,~,..,.~
-~- J-z+-_- --~-r

t- -1
L_15, 24 ..... ___ 15,24_. 7,62 _

(6 e )
(6e)
(3e)
l'h - - -- -+-'------.
'iT
I
t
22.86 _
(9e)
...15,24_
(6e)
F ig . 3. Pier c ing diagra m viewed from solder side of board; e = 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in)
screening folded
.~
, ~Z70671
..... I...
2,5 ma x
F i g. 4 Reco mmende d fixing method of the aerial cable. Use a self -tapping screw.
.Jovember 1974
11
--::::::l
ELC1043/05
2422 542 10461
U.H. F. TELEVISION TUNER

with diode tuning
ELECTRICAL DATA
25 5 oc and a supply voltage of .12 0, 3 V
Semiconductors , r. f. amplifiers
mixer /oscillator
tuning diodes
2 x BF362
BF363
4 X BB205B

operating
storage
+5 to +55 oc
-25 to+ 85 oc
Supply voltage
r. f . .amplifiers
mixer /oscillator
---
+ 12 V 10%
8, 8 mA (at nominal gain) to 12- 17 mA
(at 30 dB gain reduction)
3,6 mA
A.G.C. voltage (Fig. 5, typical curves)

at nominal gain
+2 , 5 V
approx. 6 , 0 V (max. 7,5 V)
A. G . C. current at 30 dB gain reduction
max. 1,2 mA

+ 0 , 3 to + 2 5 V
Slope of tuning characteristic
min. 5 MHz/V
Current drawn from25Vtuningvoltagesupply max. 20 f-lA
Frequency range
channel 21 (picture carrier

471,25 MHz) to channel 69
(pi,cture carrier 8;>5, 25 MHz).
Margi.J;J. at the extreme _
channels min . 3 MHz
system G
system I
38 ,9 MHz
33,4 MHz
39,5 MHz
33,5 MHz
picture
sound
Input impedance
asymmetrical
symmetrical
V. S. W. R. (between picture carrier

and sound carrier)
.____ __.C22
75 Q
v.s.w .r. atnom .
gain , withouta.g.c .
max. v.s . w.r.

during gain con trol up to 30 dB
max. 4, 0
ni.ax. 6,0
11
Au~rnst
197fi
2422 542 10461
ELC1043/0S
U.H. F. TELEVISION TUNER

with diode tuning
7Z70632
7Z70629
iii
I I
I
.i
8SO
channel
68
c:
c:
:;;
,"
~
60
""
" 7SO
~
0"
10
'-
c:
c;
t"
"'
so
::!
20
"
~ 6SO
u
channel 69
a.
40
I~
~
30
u~
~
sso
40
channel 21
~
4SO
so
I~
~
30
21
20
10
30
tuning voltage (V)
60
8
a.g.c. voltage
10
(V J
Fig. 6
Fig. 5
A . G.C. range
min . 30 dB
R .F . curves
bandwidth
tilt
typ. 10 to 20 MHz
max. 4, 0 Cm (0 to 2 dB typical)
Power gain (see also ADDITIONAL INFORMATION)

channel 21
channel SO
channel 68
min. 17 dB
typ. 22 dB
typ. 22 dB
typ. 22 dB
Noise figure
channel 21
channel 50
channel 68
m ax. 10 dB
typ. 6, 0 dB
typ. 6, 5 dB
typ.7,0dB
I. F. rejection
min. 60 dB
Image rejection, channels 21 to 61
min. 53 dB
n + 4 rejection
min. 53 dB
(Obtained between the picture carrier of the wanted channel n and the sound carrier of an
unwanted signal spaced 4 chimnels above the wanted channel.)
-.Jovember 1974
11
ELC1043/05
U.H .F. T ELEV ISIO NTUNER
2422 542 10461
with diode tuning
Signal handling
Minimum input signal (e. m. f.) producing
cross m odulation (1%) at nominal gain,
in channel
(wanted signal: picture carrier-frequency,
interfering signal: sound carrier
frequency).
in band
(wanted s ign a l: picture carrier frequency
of channel X,
interf~ring signal: picture carrier of
channel X-5)
--c::::
typ. 8 mV (Note 1)
typ. 25 mV (Note 1)
Minimum input signal (e . m. f. ) producing

overloading, .a t nominal gain
at maximum a. g. c.
typ. 15 to 20 mV (Note 2)
min. 250 mV (Note 2)
Minimum input signal (e. m. f.) at nominal

frequency of 20 kHz
typ . 5 to 15 mV (Note 3)
De tuning of the i. f. output circuit as a

result of tuning
max . 150kH z
Shift of oscillator frequency at a

change of the supply vo ltage of 10%
max. 500kHz
during warm-up time (measured between 3 s

and 60 s after switching on)
max. 200kHz
at a gain reduction of 30 dB
max. 100kHz
Drift of oscillator frequency at a change of the ambient temperature

from 25 to 50 C
max. 1000 kHz
Note 1- This e. m. f. is referred to an impedance of 75 Q,

1% cross modulation means that 1% of the modulation depth of the interfering
signal is transferred to the wanted signal.
--==..cC24~-~~~~--~-~~
November 1974
2422 542 10461
U. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
ELC1043/05
Oscillator radiation (oscillator voltages at

the aerial terminal)
The oscillator radiation will be within the limits of BS905 : 1969 provided the circuit
connected to the i. f. output is carefully shielded .
For the oscillator fundamentals use is made of the relaxed limits , assuming that the
design of the i. f. amplifier of the receiver is such that a det;uning of the oscillator of
- 2, 0 MHz or +0, 6 MHzfrom the nominal frequency will result in unacceptable
picture a nd/or sound degradation.
lmmunity from radiated interference

If the tuner, including the aerial connection (see Fig. 4) is installed in a professional
manner, the immunity from radiated interference will be within the limits spec ified
in BS905: 1969.
If a higher safety margin, or another cable connection is required , use can be made
of an immunity shield (see ACCESSORIES).
Microphonics
If the tuner is installed in a professional manner, there will be no noticeable microphonics.
----
November 1974
ELC1043/05
2422 542 10461
with diode tuning
Measuring method of power gain
The i. f. output of the tuner should be terminated with the circuit given below.
68pF
Detector probe
(Z =50 nor 75 n)
C2
60pF
Cl
60pF
Fig. 7.
Feed an i. f. sweep signal to the emitter of the BF 363 (mixer /oscillator) and make the
oscillator inoperative (e. g. ferrite core in resonant chamber).
68pF
L
i.f.sweep 1 - l n i - - F
generator
ssn
OL257
Fig. 8.
Adjust the trimmers Cl and C2, coil L (Fig. 7) and the i. f. output coil of the tuner (L21)
to get the resonant curve with maximum gain as shown below.
Fig.9
C26
11
November 1974
2422 542 10461
ELC1043/0S
U.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
.Display the r. f. + i. f. curve of the tuner at 470 MHz and make , if necessary , small
corrections in the alignment of C 1, C2, Land L21 to get the markers 33 , 5 MHz and
39 , 5 MHz symmetrically on the slopes of the curve , and the peaks at equal amplitude .
measured in the conventional manner by inserting tuner and dummy circuit between a
75 Q source and a 75 Q detector (or between a 50 Q source and matching pad 50/75 Q a nd a
50 Q detector).
ACCESSORIES
Aerial input transformer E LC 1095 , catalogue number 2422 542 10951, for converting the
a erial input from 75 Q asymmetric to 300 Q symmetric.
Immunity shield for screening the aerial connection, consisting of:
shield , catalogue number 43 13 132 01910
clamp , catalogue number 43 13 132 01890
OTHER AVAILABLE VERSION

ELC 1043/06 -See the relevant data sheet.
November 1974
11
C27
2422 542 10711
ELC1043/06
11

with diode tuning
These data should be read in conjunction with data on ELC 1043/05 .
This type is identical to ELC 1043/05 except for the following:

- The i. f . output circuit consists of an i. f. coil with increased turns damped by a 680 Q
resistor. This changes the tuning range and Q of the i. f. output coil , making it suitable
for coupling to a block filter input i. f. amplifier.
--
- The power gain is reduced to a nominal of 12 dB and a minimum of 9 dB by the damping

resistor mentioned above . .
- The same dummy circuit is used for measuring power gain but, as a result of damping
the i. f. coil. a single tuned response will appear at the output. instead of the double
tuned response, as in the case of ELC1043/05 (see below).
Fig.l
November 1974
II_
C29
ELC2000
2 422 542 12 003
11
V.H.F./U.H.F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
Systems
Channels
picture
sound
C. C. I. R. systems Band G
E2 to
C (band I)
ES to E 12 (band Ill)
E21 to E69 (bands IV and V)
38 , 9 MHz
33,4 MHz
APPLICATION
Designed to cover the v. h. f. and u. h. f . channels of C . C. I. R . systems B and G , including
the ita lian channels.
November 1974
11
'
C3 1
ELC2000
\'.H. F./U. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
2422 542 12003
with diode tuning
DESCRIPTION
The ELC2000 is a combined v.h.f./u.h.f. tuner with electronic tuning andbandswitching,
covering the v. h. f. band I including the Italian channel C (frequency range 4 7 to 88 MHz),
the v . h.f. band Ill (frequency range 174 to 230 MHz), and the u.h.f. band (frequency
range 470 to 860 MHz).
Mechanically, the tuner is built on a low-loss printed-wiring board, carrying all components, in a metal housing made of a rectangular frame and front and rear cover (see
Fig.2). The two aerial connections (v.h . f. and u.h . f .) are on the two frame sides , all
other connections (supply voltages , a. g. c. voltage, tuning and switching voltages) are
made via feedthrough capacitors in the under side. The mounting method is shown in
Figs. 3 and 4.
--
Electrically , the tuner consists of a v.h . f. and u.h.f. part. The v. h . f. aeria l signal is
fed via an i.f. trap , combined with a high pass filter , to a tuned input circuit, which is
connected to the emitter of the input transistor BF 200. The collector load of this . transistor is formed by a double tuned circuit, transferring the signal to the base of the mixer
transistor BF 182. The oscillator is equipped with a transistor BF 194. The four r. f.
circuits are tuned by four capacitance diodes BB 106. Switching between v . h. f. I and III is
achieved by four switching diodes BA 243/244.
The collector circuit of the mixer transistor is a single tuned i. f. resonant circuit , at
An i. f. injection point is provided at the collector of the mixer, for aligning this circuit
together with the i. f. amplifier of the television receiver.
The u. h. f. part of the tuner consists of a tuned input circuit , connected to the emitter of
the amplifier trans istor BF 180. The interstage network betvreen this transistor and the
self-oscillating mixer stage is formed by a double tuned circuit. A transistor BF 181 acts
as a self-oscillating mixer 1 The four tuned u. h . L circuits are tuned by four capacitance
diodes BB 105B.
The output 'of the self- oscillating mixer is fed to a double tuned i. f. circuit which is
connected to the emitter of the v . h. f. mixer transistor BF 182, now operating as an i. f.
amplifier in grounded base configuration. Band switching between v. h. f. and u . h. f . is
achieved by another diode BA 2 43.
The tuner requires transistor supply vo ltages of+ 12 V, a switching voltage of+ 12 V ,
a. g. c. voltages, variable from +2, 4 V (normal operating point) to about +7, 5 V (maximum a. g. c.) and a tuning voltage, variable from+ 0 , 5 V to+ 2 8 V.
The aerial inputs of the tuner are asymmetrical. For use in symmetrical aerial systems ,
aeria l transformers (baluns) are ava ilable (see ACCESSORIES).
-~-~~ ~~~~~
' - - - - -C32
--"-
November 1974
z0
~
g.
('[)
1-j
......
'D
"
of>.
"'1
~-
!"""'
Rl2
R39
R27
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
..,..,
")
~---~1~ ---~ ~---~ ~---~ lo---~~~---c

~t~ ; ~---~ ~---~rf: :- - -1
I
R40
o.g.c. voltage
2,4 to +7,5VI
{+
R3
tumng
voltage
!+0,5to+28V)
=
0
~
swtct)rng
voltage
(+12V I
C35
Hh-1
.6 .
1f
r.f supply
voltage
!+12V)
v.h.f.
osc. supply
voltage
1+121/)
C36
mncer supply
voltage
1+12Y)
C6B~dl
I
'
en
~~:~~ton
test po1nt
1
i.f. output
I
I
I
I
f:::-----1 f:::-----1 f:::- - - --1 f::: - - - --1 f"::---1"'
@ .m
ttSt pomt
osc. supply
voltage
{+12V)
test pont
3
r.f. supply
voltage
{+12Vl
~-
o.g.c. voltage
I+ 2,4 to +7,5Vl
m
r-
0
0
0
ELC2000
V.H. F. ;u : H. F . TELEVISION TUNER
2422 542 12003
with diode tlllling
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in m m
02,6 hole for

self tapping screw
0 2,6 hole for
self tapping screw
1...---39,5aerial
u.h.f.
aerial
v.h.f
-:
Fig.2
Terminal 1 =a . g.c. voltage , v.h.f. , +2,4to+7.5V
2 = tlllling voltage. + 0 , 5 to +28 V
3 =switching voltage. + 12 V (approx. 20 mA)
4 = r. f. supply voltage. v. h. f . . + 12 V (approx. 3 to 10 mA)
5 = oscillator supply voltage. v. h. f. . + 12 V (approx. 6 mA)
6 =mixer supply voltage, v. h. f .. + 12 V (approx. 5 mA)
7 =test point 1,. v. h. f.
8 = i. f. output
9 = test point 2 (alignment short)
lO =oscillator supply voltage . u. h. f.. + 12 V (approx . 4 mA)
11 =test point 3, u.h . f.
12 = r . f. supply voltage , u. h. f . + 12 V (approx. 2. 5 to 9 . 5 mA)
13 =a. g . c. voltage . u. h. f. . + 2. 4 to+ 7. 5 V
E =earth
C34
. August 1976
2422 542 12003
ELC2000
V. H. F. /U. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER

with diode tuning
Mounting
The tune r m a y be mounted by soldering it on to a printed-wiring board , using the piercing diagram shown in Fig. 3. (The tuner may also be mounted by means of a snap-in
m ount or a brac ket. Information will be supplied upon request).
The tuner m ay be mounted an ywhere in the receiver and there are no restrictions on
orientation.
43.18117e)
-1
(13x)
7Z 6 074~
Fig. 3. Piercing diagram viewed from solder side of board; e = 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in) .
No connection must be made t o the points 7, 9 and 11, as otherwise the oscillator
r adia tion would increase.
screening folded
moke sure that screw
r---r""'L
.J?
...1,__
7260737.1
3,5 mox
Fig. 4 Recommended fixing method of the aerial cables. Use a self-tapping screw.
_N_o_v_e_e
mb_r_l9_7_4_~~~
11
C3S
--
t:::
=
-
ELC2000
V . H. F. /U.H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
2422 542 12003
with diode timing
ELECTRICAL DATA
25 5 C and a supply voltage of 12 0 , 3 V.
Semiconductors
bands I and III, r: f. amplifier
mixer
oscillator
tuning diodes
switching diodes
bands IV and V, r. f. amplifier
mixer / oscillator
tuning diodes
drift compensating di ode
BF200
BF182
BF 194
4 x BB106
5 X BA243/244
BF180
BF 181
4 X BBlOSB
BAW62

operating
storage
+'5 to + 55 oc
-25 to+ 85 oc
Supply voltage
band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
A. G. C . voltage (Figs5 , 6 and 7)
band I , at nominal gain
at 40 dB gain redhction
band Ill, at nominal gain
at 40 dB gain reducti on
bands IV and V, at nominal gain
at 30 dB gain reducti on
A.G.C . current
band I )
.
band Ill
at 40 dB gam reduction
bands IV and V , at 30 dB gain reduction
Tuning voltage range (Figs. 8,9 and 10)
Current drawn from 28 V tuning voltage supply
Switching vo ltage
band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
+ 12 V 10%
14 to 21 mA }
34 to 41 mA
31 , 5 to 38 mA
depending
on a . g. c.
voltage
2, 4 V
5, 5 V (typical)
2, 4 V
4, 5 V (typical)
2, 4 V
5 , 0 V (typical)
max. 0, 8 mA
max. 0,6 mA
max. 0 , 7, mA
+0 , 5 to +28 V
ma-x. 361JA
open circuit
+ 12
+ 12 V
Note: In the band I pos1t10n, the tuner produces a negative voltage (l to 5 V) at

terminal 3; t)1is terminal must not be loaded with an external resistance below
10 MQ.
C36
_1
V. H. F.
2422 542 12003
/U. H. F.
ELC2000
TElEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
U60739.
a.g.c. characteris tic
t-r+-t--+-t-t-++-1
V.H.F I
::!
c
0
:;:;
V.H.F.
<D
~-
10
-a 10
.~
"'
"'
20
20
30
--
50
a .g.c. voltage I V)
60
Fig. 5.
10
a .g.c. voltage
I V)
Fig. 6.
1Z60741
H +-+-++-+-+-H
a .g.c.characterist tc
<D
U.H.F.
::!
c:
'0
1'
~ 10
"'
20
30 t-++.t-+-
a .g.c. voltage I V I
Fig. 7.
~overnber
1974
C37
ELC2000
2422 542 12003
V.H.F./U.H . F. TE LEVISIO N TUNER

with diode tun ing
-;:;
I
channel
~
""::>
""::>
0'
0'
....~
!
~
E4,B
E3
A
10
20
30
tuning voltage (V)
20
10
30
tuning voltage (V)
Fig. 9.
Fig. 8.
69
channel
~
"::>
"
.::
0'
750
H--+-+++
~ 650
a.
tuning voltage (V I
Fig. 10.
C38
11
November 1974
2422 542 12003
ELC2000
V. H. F. /U. H. F. TElEVISION TUNER

with diode tuning
Frequency ranges
band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
channel E2 (picture carrier 48 , 25 MHz)

to channel C (picture carrier 82.25 MHz).
Margin at the extreme channels : min.
1. 2 MH z .
channel E 5 (picture earner 175 , 2 5 MHz)
to channel E 12 (pict:l)re carrier 224 , 25 MHz).
Margin at the extreme channels: min.
2 MHz.
channel E21 (picture carrier 471.25 MHz)
to channel E69 (picture carrier 855 , 25 MHz).
3 MHz.
picture
sound
38 , 9 MHz
33 , 4 MHz
lnP.Ut impedance
asymmetrical
symmetrical
75 Q

anc! sound carrier)
v.s.w.r. at nom.
gain
max. v.s . w.r.

during gain
control
min. 1)
max.2)
min . 1)
max . 2)
max. 3
max. 3
max. 4
max. 4
max. 4
max. 4
max. 4
max. 5
max. 5
max. 5
band I (except channel C)

band Ill (except channel E 12)
bands IV and V
A.G.C. range
band Iband Ill
bands IV and V
:::
min. 40 dB
min. 40 dB
min. 30 dB
1) Best value of V. S. W. R. between picture carrier and sound carrier.

2) Worst va lue of V . S. W. R. between picture carrier and sound carrier.
November 1974
11
C39
--
ELC2000
2422 542 12003

with diode tuning
R. F. curves
bandwidth, band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
tilt, band I
band Ill
bands IV and V. channels E21 to E60
channels E61 to E69
typ. 10 to 15 MHz
typ. 10 to 15 MHz
typ. 15 to 25 MHz
max. 3 dB
max . 3dB
max. 3dB
max . 4dB
Power gain (see also MEASURING METHOD OF POWER GAIN)

band I
channel E2
channel C
band m
channel E5
channel Ell
bands IV and V
channel E21
channel E31
channel E69
min.
typ.
typ.
min.
typ.
typ .
min.
typ.
.typ.
typ.
Noise figure
band I
channel
band Ill
channel
bands IV and
channel
channel
channel
max. 8, 5
typ. 6, 5
max.
8
typ. 6 , 5
max. 12
typ. 8, 0
typ . 9 , 5
typ. 10 ,5
E4
E9
V
E21
E51
E69
26
29
32
25
28
28
25
32
29
33
dB ,
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
I. F. rejection
band I, channel E2
channel C
band Ill
bands IV and V
min.
min.
min.
min.
Image rejection
band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
40
60
60
60
dB
dB
dB
dB
min. 40 dB
min. 60 dB
min. 40 dB
November 1974
-----------------n~----------------------------r --------------~
2422 542 12003
V . H. F.
/U . H. F.
ELC2000
TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
Signal handling (see a lso Figs . 12 and 13)

cross m odulation (1%) at nominal
gain, in channel
(wanted signal: picture carrier frequency,
interfering channel: sound carrier
frequency}, v . h.f. 1.
v . h.f. Ill
u.h.f.
typ.
4 i:nV
typ.
4 mV
typ. 5 to 10 mV
lj
Note 1
typ. 15 to 60 mV
typ. 10 to 50 mV
typ. 15 to 50 mV
Note 1

overloadin g, at nomina l gain
at m aximum a. g . c.
typ.
10 mV
typ. > 200 m V
Minimum input s ign al (e. m. f . ) at nominal

gain pr oducing a shift of the os cillator
frequen~y of 10kHz, band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
typ.
> 25 mV}
> 25 mV
typ.
typ. 10 to 20 mV
in band
(wanted s ign al: picture carrier frequency
of channel X,
interfering signa l : picture carrier of
channel X- 2 (v.h.f.), X-5 (u.h.f.)
v. h. f. I
v .h.f . Ill
u. h. f.
Detuning of the i. f . output circuit as a result of

bandswitching and tuning with respect of channel E8
max. 400kHz
Shift of osci llator frequency

at a change of the supply voltage of 10%
band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
max. 300kHz
max. 300kHz
max. 600kHz
Note 2
Note 3
Note 1 - This e. m. f. is referred t o an impedance of 75 Q .

1% cross l!lodulation means that 1% of the modulation depth of the interfering
s ign al is transferred to the wanted signal.
Note 2 - This e. m. f. is referred to an impedance of 75 Q .
.
Note 3 - This e. m. f. is referred t o an impedance of 75
Q.
--=-~~ -~---~~~~
_No_vemb_er1_974
C4 1
-3
.--
.-
ELC2000
V. H. F. /U.H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
2422 542 12003
with diode tuning
during warm- up time (measured between 5 s

and 15 min after switching on)
band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
max . 100 kJ-Iz

max. 100 k!-lz
max. 250 k!-lz
max. 100 kJ-Iz

from 25 to 40 oc
band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
max. 300 k!-lz

max . 300kHz
max. 500kHz
The tuner is in conformity with the radiation requirements of C. I. S. P. R. Recommendation No. 24/3, provided the following conditions are fulfilled:
- A low-pass filter (Fig. 11) with a cut-off frequency of about 300 MHz has to be inserted
between the v. h. f. aerial terminal of the tuner and the aerial terminal of the receiver.
Television receivers with a common v. h. f. /u . h . f . connector in combination with a
low -pass/high-pass splitter do not need this additional filter .
SO nH
SO nH
7Z70627
Fig. 11.
- No connections must be made to the terminals 7, 9, and 11.
- Earthing of the tuner and connections to the i. f. amplifier have to be made in such a
way, that additional radiation is prevented.
Microphonics
If the tuner is installed in a professional manner, there will be no microphonics .
C42
November J974
ELC2000

with diode tuning
2422 542 12003
7Z6074 9 1
e.m.f.,7SQ
(m V)
.........
- --
channel E2S
channel E55 ---.,
b----:: ~
V k::::= p:...... f:::: k

V"
10
p--
-~
!"<channel E9
I'- channel E4
0"'
"'
--
I
1
-10
10
30
20
gain reduction ldBJ
Fig. 12. Cross modulation, in channel.

7Z607 5 0 2
channel E4(E2l
e.m.f .,75Q
(m V)
/V
channel E30 IE!_0
1----'
/ I
V
?......::=
\.'
-'
............
.............
--
./
~ / .-::7 --c hannel

_)c ~ -channel
E9 IE7J
EGO lESS)
10
-10
10
30
20
gain reduction (dB)
Fig. 13. Cross modulation, in band; the interfering channels are given between brackets.
_ N_ov_ e_mb
_ e_r _1_9_7_4
-~~~
11
C43
ELC2000
2422 542 12003
V.H.f./U.H.F. TE LEVISIO NTUNE R

with diode tuning
APPLICATION INFORMATION
Connection of the tuner
For connection of the tuner the termin a l location, F ig. 2, should be consulted .
If the tuner is used in receivers the chassis of which is connected t o the mains, iso lating
capacitors according i:o the s afety rules have to be inserted in the aeria l leads.
Five ways of connecting, depending on the number of switches ava ilable , a re given below.
I
4
tuner
term inals
--
~ v.h.f.!
c::
u.h.f.
tuning
a.g.c.
voltage
!+0,5 to +28VJ
voltage
(+2,4. to+ 7,5VI
10
11
12
13
v.h.f.!
Fig. 14. Connecti on diagram with three switches .
12
tuner
terminals
13
47fl
v.h.f. I
u.h.f.
726011.61
tuning
voltage
(+ 0,5 to +28VI
a.g.c.
voltage
1+ 2,4 to +7.5VI
supply
voltage
i.f.
t+12V~6~vl
Fig. 15. Connection diagram with two switches.

All diodes: BAX 13, BA217 or comparable silicon diodes.
C44
__...__.ll .~-----~11
November 1974
ELC2000
V. H. F./U. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
2422 542 12003
with diode tuning
tuner
termnals
10
11
<;
47n
r
12
13
E.I!...
47n
R2
-t___j-
L...--<
v.h.f.
0
v.h.f.l
u.h.f.
f.":\
f.:\
V.2J
v.h.f. l
v. h.f.ID
o--u.h.f.
1Z6551.9 .1
-c::J-~
tuning
voltage
{+ 0,5 to +28VI
-1--- ---1R3
a .g.c.
supply
voltage
(+1.7 to + 1Vi
voltage
{+12V 10%1
i.f.

All diodes : BAX13 , BA217 or comparable silicon diodes.
The values of R 1 R2 and R3 are depending on a. g. c. circuit.
tuner
terminals
supply
vo ltage
10
11
12
13
i.f.
C+12V~~~vl
Fig. 17. Connection diagram with one switch.

All diodes: BAX 13 , BA217 or comparable silicon diodes.
November 1974
C45
ELC2000
2422 542 12003
V.H. F. /U.H . F. TElEVISION TUNER

with diode tuning
4
tuner
terminals
10
11
12
13
7Z6 55501
=
--
l~
-c::J--{
R3
tunmg
a.g.c .
supply
voltage
I+ 0.5 to+ 28VI
voltage
I+ 1.7 to+ 7VI
voltage
i.f.
1+12V~~\vl

All diodes: BAX13, BA217 or comparable
silicon diodes. The values of R 1, R2 and
R3 are depending on a. g. c. circuit.
Alignment of the i. f. circuit
The tuner is provided with an i. f. injection point at the collector of the mixer for aligning
the i. f. circuit together with the i. f. amplifier of the television receiver (for the position
of the i. f. injection point see Fig. 2) .
The aligning should be done with the v. h. f. Ill band tuned. The tuning voltage should be
15 to 20 V.
If this injection method cannot be employed in the television receiver (e . g. because the
injection point is not accessible or there is not enough i. f. signal available) use can be
made of feeding the i. f. signal to test point 3 (terminal 11) via a capacitor of 0, 82 to 1 pF.
The tuner must be switched to the u . h. f. position; the tuning voltage should be approx.
10 V. This injection method requires approx. 14 dB less signal than the first method.
No permanent connection must be m ade to test point 3, otherwise the tuner may exceed
the oscillator radiation limits.
C46
November 1974
2422 542 12003
V.H.F./U.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
ELC2000
with diode tuning
MEASURING METHOD OF POWER GAIN
The terminals 7 , 9 and 11 should be not connected.
La
(20turns1
B.2 pF
i.f. output =i18k.O.
of tuner
60pF
de tee tor probe
Lb
(Z=50nor75n)
(2.5turn1
z
%
tco;e
from
this side
Fig. 19
Switch the tuner to the v. h . f. Ill band; the tuning voltage should be 15 to 20 V.
Feed an i. f. sweep signal (e. m. f. 500 to 1000 m V) to the i. f. injection point.
Adjust the trimmer (Fig. 19), tunable coil (La/Lb) , i. f. output coil of the tuner Ll9
(Fig. 1) and the coupling between La and Lb to get the resonant curve as given below.
Fig.20
Then display the r. f. + i. f. curve of the 't uner at 190 MHz (picture carrier frequency) and
make small corrections in the alignment of the i. f. coils (La/Lb and L19 , if neccessary,
to get the markers 38,9 MHz and 33,4 MHz symmetrically on the slopes of the curve ,
and the peaks at equal amplitude.
75 Q source and a 75 Q detector (or between a 50 Q source and matching pad 50/75 Q and a
50 Q detector).
ACCESSORIES
Aerial input transformer ELC 1094 , v . h. f. , catalogue number: 2422 542 10941
Aerial input transformer ELC2092, u.h.f. , catalogue number: 2422 542 12921
November 1974
~~11
C47
--
ELC2060
3122 128 56991
11
V.H ~ F./U.H.F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
Systems
Channels 1)
picture
sound
C.C.I.R. syste msB a ndG

0 to 4 (low v . h. f. band)
5 to 11 (high v . h. f. band)
28 to 63 (u. h. f. band)
36,875 MHz
31,375MHz
APPLICATION
Designed to cover the Australian v. h . f. and u. h. f. channels of C. C.I.R. syste ms Band G.
1) In a ccorda nce with the publicat ions of the Australian Broadcasting Control Board (ABCB).
May 1976
C49
--
EL~
3122 12 8 56991
with diode tuning
DESCRIPTION
The ELC2060 is a combined v. h. f. /u. h. f. tuner with electronic tuning and band switching,
covering the low v. h. f. band with the channels 0 i:o 4 (frequency range 45 to 101 MHz),
the high v. h. f. band with the channels 5 to 11 (frequency range 101 to 222 M[Iz), and the
u.h.f. band with the channels 28 to 63 (frequency range 526 to 814 MHz).
Mechanically, the tuner is built on a low-loss printed- wiring board, carrying all components, in a metal housing made of a rectangular frame and front and rear cover (see
Fig.2) . The two aerial connections (v. h.f. and u.h.f.) are on the .two frame sides, all
other connections (supply voltages, a . g. c. voltage, tuning and switching vo ltages) are
made via feed-through capacitors in the under side. The mounting. method is shown in
Figs. 3 and 4.
Electrically, the tuner consists of v. h. f. and u. h. f . parts. The v. h. f. aerial signal is
fed via an i. f. trap, combined with a high-pass filter, to a tuned input circuit, which is
connected to the emitter of the input transistor BF200. The collector load of this transistor is forme<i by a double tuned circuit, transferring the signal to the base of the mixer
transistor BF183. The oscillator is equipped with a t'ransistor BF494. The four r.f.
circuits are tuned by four capacitance diodes BB109G. A capacitance diode BB106
provides a frequency-dependent coupling of the r. f. input signal to the tuned input circuit.
Switching between the low and high v . h. f. bands is done by four switching diodes (BA 182,
BA243 , and BA244) .
The collector circuit of the mixer trans istor is a single tuned i. f. resonant circuit, at
the low end of which the i. f. signal is capacitively coupled out of the tuner (low capaci-tance coupling) . An i. f. inj ection point is provided at the collector of the m ixer, for
aligning this circuit together with the i. f. a mplifier of the television rece iver.
' The u. h. f. part of the tuner consists of a tuned input c ircuit, connected to the e mitter of
the amplifier transistor BF 183. The inter - stage network between this transistor and the
self-oscillating mixer stage is for med by a double tuned circuit. A trans istor BF 181 acts
as a self-oscillating mixer. The four tuned .u . h. f. c ircuits are tuned by four capacitance
diodes BB105B.
The output of the self-oscillating mixer is fed to a double tuned i. f. circuit which is
connected to the e mitter of the v. h. f. mixer transistor BF 183, now operating as an i. f.
amp lifier in grounded-base configuration. Band switching between v. h. f. and u. h. f. is
ach ieved by a diode BA243 .
The tuner requires transistor supply voltages of +12 V, a switching voltage of -d2 V,
a. g. c. voltages, var iable from +2, 4 V (normal operating point) to about+ 7, 5 V (maximum a.g. c.) and a tuning voltage, variable from +0, 5 V to +28 V.
The aerial inputs of the tuner are asym metrical. For use in symmetrical aeria l systems,
aer ial transformers (baluns) are available (see ACCESSORIES) .
C50
May 1976
'1'
I
I
a:
Pl
so~L2
f~l
C251
~~
o' '
607
IC201
I ,
.....
-o
.....
"'
I
I
I
I
t---
---'
R307
I
'Ij
.....
I
I
I
I
RJ04
RJ02
3o1
R306
309
R
310
-I
I
I
I
R322
R339
R327
I
I
I
I
I
I
IC267
~R308
0601
11
R303
~II
j j
--~---~~-~-~---~---~~---~~---~~---1~---~~---~~---~~---:~---~~-~
ens fl
cm
lt-U-
I
l
CZJ?
tf tnjectton
potnt
C238
C239
o.g.c. YOitage
tumng
I+ 2.4 to +7,5VJ
voltage
1+0.5 to+28VJ
C240
C241
C242
swttchtng
voJtog
r.f. supply
osc. supply
voltage
1+12VI
(+12V)
voltage
I 12 VI
v.h.f.
C24J
mtur supply
voltage
f+,I2VJ
C244
C245
test point
1
if. output
C246
tes t potnt
2
C247
osc.supply
lfOitage
C248
C249
test pomt
3
(+12VI
C250
I'TI
r-
!'.)
a-.
u.h.f
L__ _ _ _ _ _ ___.-..--~-__..lUlU-------~-----
ELC2060
3122 12 8 56991
with diode tuning
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
111,3 4
~;;J
02 ,6 hole for
self topping screw
0 2,6 hole for

self tapping screw
1,.___ 3 9 , 5 -
aerial
Y.h.f
--
'}ES!!3~
n:L,:,.,_~----109max
_:r
56.78
e = 2 , 54 mm (0, 1 in)
-----
Fig . 2 .
Termina l 1 =a . g . c. voltage, v. h. f., +2, 4 to +7, 5 V

2 = tuning voltage, +0, 5 to +28 V
3 =switching voltage, + 12 V (approx . 22 rnA)
4 = r.f. suppl y voltage, v.h.f., +12 V (approx. 3 to 10 rnA)
5 =os cillator supply voltage , v . h . f., + 12 V (approx . 6 rnA)
6 = m ixer suppl y voltage, v. h. f., +12 V (approx . 5 rnA)
7 =test point 1, v. h.f.
8 = i. f. output
10 =osc illa tor supply voltage, u. h. f. , + 12 V (approx. 4, 8 rnA)
11 = test point 3, u. h. f.
12 = r.f. supply voltage, u.h.f., +12 V (approx. 2,5 to 9,5 rnA)
13=a . g .c . voltage, u.h.f.,+2,4to+7,5V .
E = earth
ELC2060
V. H. F. /U.H . F. TELEVISION TU NER
312212856991
with diode tuning
Mounting
The tuner may be mounted by soldering it on to a printed-wiring board, using the piercing
diagram shown in Fig. 3. (The tuner may also be mounted by means of a s nap -in mount or a bracket. Information will be supplied upon request . )
orientation.
-. .
104.14 (41el
1.3+g.1 (Sx)
43.18(17el
}f.--- ----------- --1------i

no connection
to po1nt:
\,
_E+\.
-er
1 +0.1 (13x)
0
:H+- U4 U~t_i!=_1fit-Ei -~_.oa

,
L L L 1 - - L 1 - - L1- . 1 -1-
22.86
(9el
10.16
(4e)
,_2e_l-._ __,
1- L 1 -l 7.62(3e)
(13xl
7Z60745
Fig. 3. Piercing diagram viewed from solder s ide of board; e = 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in).
No connection must be made to the points 7, 9 and 11, otherwise the osc illator
radiation may ~crease.
screening folded
~W"w
....11....
7Z60737.2
3,5max
Fig. 4. Recommended fixing method of the aerial cilbles. Use a self-tapping screw.
--
ELC2060
--
3122 128 56991
with diode tuning
ELECfRICAL DATA
Unless otherwise specified all electrical values apply at an a mbient temperature of

25 5 oc and a supply voltage of 12 0, 3 V.
Semiconductors
v.h.f. bands, r.f. amplifier
mixer
oscillator
tuning diodes
coupling diode
switching diodes
u. h. f . band, r. f. amplifier
mixer /oscillator
tuning diodes
drift compensating diode
BF200
BF183
BF494
4 X BB109G
BB106
2 X BA1 82; 1 X BA243 ; 2
BF180
BF1 81
4 X BB105B
BAW62

operating
storage
+5 to +55 oc
-25 to +85 oc
Relative humidity
max. 90%
Supply voltage
Current drawn from +12 V supply
lowv.h.f. band
high v. h. f. band
u.h. f. band
+12 V +10%, -15%

14to2lmA }
36 to 43 mA
33,5 to 40 mA
A.G.C. voltage (Figs.5,6 and 7)

low v. h. f. band, a t nomina l gain
a t 40 dB gain reduction
high v. h. f. band, at nominal gain
u. h. f. band,
at nominal gain
2,4 V
typ . 5, 5 V
2,4 V
typ. 4,5V
2,4 V
typ. 5, 0 V
A.G.C. current
low v.h.f. band }
at 4 0 dB gain reduction
. h v. h . f . b and
h 1g
,
u. h. f. band, at 30 dB gain reduction
max. 0,8 mA
max. 0,6 mA
ma x . 0, 7 mA
Tuning voltage range (Figs . 8, 9 and 10)

Current drawn from 28 V tuning voltage supply
+0 ,5 to +28 V
max. 36 fJA
BA244
depending
on a. g. c.
voltage
Note: The source impedance of the tuning voltage offered to terminal 2, must be max.
30 kQ at tuning voltages below 2 V.
Switching voltage
low v. h . f. band
high v. h. f. band
u.h . f. band
open circuit
+12 V
+12 V
Note: In the low v. h. f. band position, the tuner produces a negative voltage (1 to 5 V) at
terminal 3; thisterminalmus.t not be loaded with anexternalresistancebelow20MQ.
V. H. F.
3122 128 56991
/U. H. F
ELC2060
TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
H-+-H-+-H+-1 a .g.c. characteristic

low v.h.f.
H--t-t-+-t-t-++-1 a .g.c.
m
~
.,
c:
0
:J
-~ 10
"'
;:;
10
c:
Cl
20
20
30
40
50
a .g.c. voltage (V l
60
Fig. 5
a.g.c. voltage
10
(V)
Fig. 6.
1260741.
H-+-H-+-H+-1 a .g.c. characteristic

u.h.f.
ID
~
C:
0
~
:J
"0
-a
10
Cl
20
3 0 f-++-+-+-
50 2~~~4~-L~~6-L~~a~~~1o
a .g.c. voltage (V)
Fig. 7.
May 1976
--
ELC2060
with diode tuning
"""
v.h.f.
120
channel
channel
.,c:
"
c:
""
fT
"
250
,..u
>u
"'
Ihigh v.h.f.
3122 128 56991
V.H. F. /U.H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
1--,
~ 200
100
11
H...., 10
fT
9
8
...
I.
'E"
.3"
.,
... 150 - f - -
eo
a.
-f-
a.
r- 1 - -
r-rr-
SA
100 ~
60 r-
0
1.0
0
10
20
30
30
20
10
tuning voltage (V)
tuning voltage (V)
Fig.9.
Fig. 8.
~900~-+~+-~-+~+-~-+~~
,..u
H-+++-H-+++-H-+-1-+-lchannel
c:
""
"
~800~~+-~-+~
fT
"'+-l-~ 63
+-!H-+~60
4-+-~-+4-+-~-+~30
H-+1-+-!H-+1-t-H~
20
28
30
tuning voltage (V l
Fig. 10.
M~
1976
3122 128 56991
ELC2060

with diode tuning
- Frequency ranges
low v. h. f. band
highv.h.f. band
channel 0 (picture carrier 46,25 MHz)

to channel4 (picture carrier 95,25 MHz).
1,5 MHz.
channel 5 (picture carrier 102, 25 MHz)
to channel 11 (picture carr ier 216,25 MHz).
2 MHz.
u.h.f. band
picture
sound
channel 2 8 (picture carrier 52 7, 2 5 MHz)

to channel 63 (picture carrier 807,25 MHz) .
3 MHz.
36,875 MHz
31,375 MHz
The oscillator frequency is higher than the
input-signal frequency.
Input impedance
asymmetrical
symmetrical
75Q

and sound carrier)
v . s.w . r. at nom.
gain
max. v.s.w.r.
during gain control
min. 1)
max; 2)
min. 1
max. 2)
max. 3
max. 4
max. 4
max.
max.
max.
max.
max. 4
max. 4,5
max . 4,5
max.
max.
max.
max.
low v.h.f. band

high v. h. f. band, channels SA to 11
channel 5
u. h. f. band
A.G.C. range
low v.h.f. band
high v . h. f. band
u.h.f. band
5
5
6
4
min. 40 dB
min. 40 dB
min. 30 dB
1) Best value of V. S. W. R. between picture carrier and sound carrier.

2) Worst value of V. S. W .R , between p icture carrier and sound carrier.
5,5
5,5
6
5
----
--
ELC2060
3122 128 56991
with diode tuning
R.F. curves at nominal gain

bandwidth, low v . h. f. band
high v . h. f. band
u.h. f. band
tilt, low v.h. f. band
high v . h. f. band, channels 5 and SA
channels 6 to 11
u. h. f . band
Power gain (see also MEASURING METHODS)
v. h. f. bands, except channel 5
channel 5
channel 0
channel 4
channel 5
channel 8
u. h. f. band
channel 28
channel 63
No ise figure
low v.h.f. band
channel 0
channel 4
high V. h . f. band
channel 5
channel SA
channels 6 to 11
u.h . f. band
channel 28
channel 63
9 to 13 MHz
typ. 9 to 14 MHz
typ. 13 to 18 MHz
3dB
max.
max . 3,5 dB
3dB
max.
3dB
max.
) typ.
min.
min.
typ.
typ.
typ.
typ.
min.
typ.
typ .
25
21
31
29
24
29
25
30
32
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
max.
typ.
typ.
9dB
7dB
7dB
max.
typ.
max.
typ .
max .
typ .
max.
typ.
typ.
lldB
9 dB
8,5 dB
6,5 dB
8dB
SdB
12 dB
8,5 dB
9,5 dB
I. F. rejection
v.h. f. bands, channel 0

channels 1 and 2 '
channels 3 to 11
u . h. f. band
Image rejection
low v. h. f. band
high v . h. f. band
u. h. f. band
min.
min.
min.
min.
40
50
60
60
dB
dB
dB
dB
min.
min.
min.
50 dB
60 dB
40 dB
M .<w
1 07~>---
3122 128 56991
V. H. F. ;tJ. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
ELC2060
with diode tuning
Signal handling (see also Figs. 12 and 13)

cross-modulation (1%) at nominal
gain, in channel
frequency), low v .h.f. band
high v . h. f. band
u. h. f. band
in band .
(wanted signal: picture carrier frequency
of channel N,
channel N- 2 (v. h. f.), N- 5 (u. h . f . ))
low v. h. f. band
high v. h. f. band
u. h. f. band
typ.
typ.
typ.
4mV
4mV
5 to 10 mV

overloading, at nomina.! gain
at ma'ximum a. g. c.
frequency of 10 kl-lz, low v. h. f. band
highv.h.f. band
u.h. f. band
Tuning range of the i. f. output circuit (see
also MEASURING METHODS)
Detuning of the i. f. output circuit as a result of
band switching and tuning with respect of channel 8
v . h.f. bands, channels 0 to 4
channels 5 to 11
u. h. f. band
1) This e. m. f. (open voltage) is referred to an impedance of 75 Q.

1% cross-modulation means that 1% of the modulation depth of the interfering signal
is transferred to the wanted signal.
2) This e. m. f. (open voltage) is referred to an impedance of 75 Q .
Criter ion of overloading: 30% compression of the synchronization pulses of a standard
television signal or a noticeable deterioration of the picture quality.
3) This e. m. f. (open voltage) is referred to an impedance o.f 75 Q .
_May1_976_
[[ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
~11~
~ n,
_ _ _ _ __.
--
ELC2060
3122 128 56991
V.H . F. /U.H.F. TELEVISION TUNER

with diode tuning

v.h.f. bands
u.h.f. band
max.
max.

from 25 to 50 oc
v . h. f. bands
u. h. f. banct'
200 k:Hz
250 k:Hz
max. 500 k:Hz

max. 1000 k:Hz
The tuner is in conformity with the radiation requirements of the Australian Standard
AS 1053-1973 and of C . I. S. P .R. Recommendation No. 24/ 3, provided the following
conditions are fulfilled :
- A low-pass filter (Fig. 11) with a cut- off frequency of about 300 MHz has to be
inserted betweenthev.h.f. aerial terminal of the tuner and the aerial terminal of
the receiver. Television receivers with a common v . h. f. /u. h. f. connector in
combination with a low-pass/high-pass splitter 1) may not need this additional filter .
50 nH
50 nH
7Z70627
Fig. 11.
- No eonnections must be made to the terminals 7, 9 and 11.
- Earthing of the tuner and connections to the i. f. amplifier have to be made in such a
wa y, that additional radiation is prevented.
Microphonics
If the tuner is installed in a professional manner, there will be no microphonics.
1) E.g. coaxial aerial input assembl y 3122 127 10450.
Mav 1976
3122 12 8 5699 1
V . H.F. ;D. H. F . T E LEVISION .TUNER

with diode tun ing
'
ELC2060
10 3
7Z73 77 3
e.m.f.,75fl
(m V)
-- -
102
~
channel 33
channel 60
./
[>-'
v k:::: ~ ::::K
!-"'
10
I--"
'-- b::::
--~-~
f=-. channel B
~ channel 3
'
--:::::i
1.6-'
1
-10
10
30
20
gain reduction (dB)
F ig . 12. Cross -modulation , in channel.

10
7 Z?3772
channel 3 (-14MHz l
.m.f.,75fl
1'\.
(m V)
channel 33!!_f!}
)V
V 1\."
v
"' f-... r-..
I--"
__..
1...4
1--.:
l\'(: ~ ~ f---.. channel
"(V
B (6)
"'--channel 60 (55)
10
1
-10
10
20
30
ga in red uc tion (dB)
F ig . 13. Cr oss -modu lation , in band ; the inter fer ing channe ls are given between brackets .
May 1976
C6 1
ELC2060
V. H. F. /U.H.F. TELEVISION TUNER
3122 128 56991
with diode tuning
For connection of the tuner the terminal1ocation , Fig. 2, should be consulted.
If the tuner is used in receivers the chassis of which is connected to the mains, isolating
capacitors according to the safety rules have to be inserted in the aer ia l leads.
Five ways of connecting, depending on the number of switches available, are given below.
tuner
7
0
terminals
E
E
(~low
v.h.f.
tuning
'/
voltage
(+0,5 to +28Vl
u.h.f
10
11
12
13
low
v.h.f.
a.g.c.
i.f.
. 1Z131&7
voltage
1+2,4 to +7,5Vl
Fig. 14. Connection diagram with three switches .

4
tuner
terminals
10
11
0
12
13
47fi
low v.h.f.
u.h.f.
7273768
tuning
a.g-.c.
voltage
1+0,5 to +28Vl
voltage
1+2,4 to +7,5Vl
supply
i.f.
voltage
1+12v~a~vl

All diodes: BAX13; BA217 or comparable silicon diodes.
C62
-''-----~-------11 ~1976
~LC2060
3122 12 8 56991
with diode tuning
tuner
terminals
10
11
12
13
high
v.h.f.
low
v.h.f.
u.h.f.
u.h.f.
7Z73770
-c:::r~
(~
R3
a.g.c.
tunmg
voltage
(+0,5to+2BVI
voltage
(+ 1,7 to +7VI
supply
i.f.
voltage
(+12V10%1
:::::l
Fig. 16. Connection diagram with two switches .

All diodes : BAX 13 , BA217 or comparable s ilic on diodes.
The values of R 1 R2 a nd R3 depend on a . g . c. circuit.
tuner
7
0
terminals
9
0
10
11
0
12
13
47n
47n
high
v.h.f.
u.h.f.
7l13169
supply
i.f.
voltage
1+12V~~~vl
F ig. 11. Connection diagram with one switch.

All diodes: BAX 13 , BA217 or comparable silicon diodes.
ELC2060
3122 128 56991
V. H. F . /U. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER

with diode tuning
tuner
terminals
10
11
12
13
47n
high
v. h.f.
u.h.f.
1Z ?l 771
~~
tunmg
voltage
I+ 0.5 to+ 2BVI
'
-c=:r-~
R3
a.g.c .
voltage
(+ 1,7 to+ 7VI
supply
voltage
i.f.
1+12V~8~vl

All diodes: BAX13, BA217 or comparable silicon diodes.
The values of R l R2 and R3 depend on a. g. c. circuit.
The tuner is provided with an i. f. injection point at the collector of the mixer for a ligning
of the i. f. injection point see Fig. 2).
The alignment should be done with the high v. h. f. band tuned. The tuning voltage should
be 15 to 20 V.
If this injection method cannot be employed in the television J;eceiver (e. g. because the
injection point is not accessible or there is not enough i. f. signal available), the i. f.
signal can be fed to test point 3 (terminal 11) via a capacitor of 0, 82 to 1 pF. The tuner
must be switched to the u. h. f. position; the tuning voltage should be approx. 10 V. This
injection method requires approx. 14 dB less signal than the first method. No permanent
connection must be made to test point 3, otherwise the tuner may exceed the oscillator
radiation limits.
ELC2060
3122 128 56991
with diode tuning
MEASURING METHODS
Power gain
The i. f. output of the tuner should be terminated with the dummy circuit given below.
The terminals 7, 9 and 11 should be not connected.
=I
8,2pF
i.f. output
of tuner
18
kfi
detector probe
IZ= son or 7S.n l
60pF
7273762
Fig. 19.
The dummy circuit should be aligned as follows.
Switch the tuner to the high v. h. f. band; the tuning voltage should be 15 to 20 V .
Feed an i. f. sweep signal (500 to 1000 m V) to the i. f. injection point.
Adjust the trimmer (Fig. 19), tunable coil (La/Lb), i.f. output coil of the tuner L519
Fig. 20.
Then display the r. f. + i. f . curve of the tuner at 190 MHz (picture carrier frequency) and
make small corrections in the alignment of the i. f. coils (La/Lb and L519), if necessary,
to get the markers 36, 875 MHz .and 31,375 MHz symmetrically on the slopes of the curve,
measured in the conve.ntional manner by inserting tuner and dummy circuit between a
75 Q source and a 75 Q detector (or between a 50 Q source and matching pad 50/75 Q a nd
a 50 Q detector).
Tuning range of i. f. output circuit
The i. f. output of the tuner s):10uld be
terminated with the circuit given in
Fig. 21. The terminals 7, 9 and 11
should not be connected.
i.f. output
of tuner
----------+
100pF
1Z73763
Fig. 21.
detector probe
IZ=50fi or 75fil
ELC2060
V. H. F. jU_. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
3122 128 56991
with diode tuning
ACCESSORIES
Aerial input transformer ELC 1094, v. h. f. , catalogue number: 2422 542 10941;
aerial input transformer ELC2092, u.h.f., catalogue number: 2422 542 12921;
coaxial aerial input assembly, catalogue number : 3122 127 10450 .
ELC2070
3122 12 8 54200

with diode tuning
System
Channels (South African channel
distribution)
picture
sound
C.C.l.R. system I
4 to 13 (v.h.f. band)
21 to 69 (u. h. f. band)
38,9 MHz
32,9 MHz
APPLICATION
Designed to cover the South African v . h. f. and u. h . f. channels of C. C. 1. R. system 1.
---
:::::
_May1_976_
__________.~_________.....11
__ull _
('; 6 7
ELC2070
--
V.H . F.;U.H . F . TELEVISIONTUNER
3122 128 54200
with diode tuning
DESCRIPTION
The ELC2070 is a combined v. h. f./u. h. f. tuner with electronic tuning and band switching,
covering the South African v.h. f. band (frequency range 174 to 254 MHz) and the u. h . f.
band (frequency range 470 to 860 MHz) ..
Mechanically, the tuner is built on a low-loss printed- wiring board, carrying all components, in a metal housing made of a rectangular frame and front and rear cover (see
Fig. 2). The two aerial connections (v. h. f. and u. h. f.) are on the two frame sides, all
other connections (supply voltages, a. g. c. voltage and tuning voltage) are made via feedthrough capacitors in the under side. The mounting method is shown in Figs. 3 and 4 .
Electrically, the tuner consists of v. h. f . and u . h. f. parts. The v. h. f. aerial signal is
fed via an i. f. trap, combined with a high-pass filter, to a tuned input circuit, which is
connected to the emitter of the input transistor BF200. The collector load of this transistor is formed by a double tuned circuit, transferring the signal to the base of the mixer
transistor BF 182. The oscillator is equipped with a transistor BF494. The four r. f.
circuits are tuned by four capacitance diodes BB106.
The collector circuit of the mixer transistor is a single tuned i. f. resonant circuit, at
An i. f. injection point is provided at the collector of the mixer, for aligning this circuit
together with the i. f . amplifier of the television receiver.
The u. h. f . part of the tuner consists of a tuned input" circuit, connected to the emitter of
the amplifier transistor BF 180. The inter-stage network between this transistor and the
self-oscillating mixer stage is formed by a double tuned circuit. A transistor BF 181 acts
as a self-oscillating mixer . The four tuned u . h. f. circuits are tuned by four capacitance
d\odes BB105B.
The output of the self-oscillating mixer is fed to a double tuned i. f. circuit which is
connected to the emitter of the V. h. f. mixer transistor BF 182' now operating as an i. f.
amplifier in grounded-base configuration. Band switching between v . h. f. and u. h. f . is
achieved by a diode BA243.
The tuner requires transistor supply voltages of -t; l2 V, a. g. a. voltages, variable from
+2, 4 V (normal operating point) to about+ 7, 5 V (maximum a . g. c.), and a t uning voltage,
variable from +0, 5 V to +28 V.
The aerial inputs of the tuner are asymmetrical. For use in symmetrical aerial systems,
aerial transformers (baluns) are available (see ACCESSORIES).
C68
May
=.,
19
'-17~
6
_ ___.
i
E:
P>
'<
....
"'
"'
.....,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\'1
~
f~ ~~ ..r~~ ,4
~ ~ , ~r:
~c:I
r~,r,
SOS
C205 --
cm
(j,'j)
IH
C251
0 611
RJJO
506
da:;~ o--t----,r--
I
I
l C207I
f---------1
I
I
I
R307
I
I
?....
I
I
R304
R306
310
R
311
I
I
I
I
I
RJ39
R327
R322
I
I
I
I
I
I
III
0601
I
J
()
~
.0
RJOJ
RJOB
==
HI--t-!
.6 .
1f. ~~:~~t1on
tuning
voltage
r.f. supply
vol tage
osc. supply
vol t age
mixer supply
voltage
(+0,5 to+28V)
I+ 12VI
I+12VI
(+12VI
I;
I
I
f.;: - --jr~----1 ~----1 ~----1 b----1~-~
I C238
C2J9
C241
C242
C243
C244
'-- -1 f.;::- - - -1 f.;:: - - - - - - - - -1 f.;: - - - -11;;- - - -jl;;-- - -j
0
0
@
0
a .g.c. voltage
1+2,4 to +7,5VI
t est point
1
C268
C237
C245
C246
i.f. output
C247
t est point
2
v. hJ
- - - - - - - - - - -UUUI
C248
osc. supply
voltage
C249
b-- --1
t est point
3
(+12VI
C250
r.f. supply
voltage
(+ 12VI
u~t
o.g.c. voltage
(+ 2,4 to + 7,5 VI
r-
to.)
0
.....,
0
ELC2070
V. H. F.
/U. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
3122 128 54200
with diode tuning
MEC~ANICAL
DATA
111,34
Dimensions in mm
~---e = 2,54 mm (0, 1 in)
Fig.2
Terminal1=a.g.c. voltage, v.h . f., +2,4to+7,5V
2 =tuning voltage, +0, 5 to +28 V
4 = r. f. supply voltage, v. h . f., +12 V (approx . 3 to 10 mA)
5 =oscillator supply voltage, v. h~f., +12 V (approx. 6 mA)
6 =mixer supply voltage, v. h. f., + 12 V (approx. 5 mA)
7 =test point 1, v. h. f.
8 = i. f . output
10 =oscillator supply voltage, u. h. f., +12 V (approx . 4, 1 mA)
11 =test point 3, u. h. f.
12 = r. f. supply voltage, u. h. f. , +12 V (approx. 2, 5 to 9, 5 mA)
13 =a ..g.c. voltage, u.h.f., +2,4to+7,5V
E =earth
C70
May 1976
3122 128 54200
ELC2070
V.H. F. /U.H. F. TELEVISION TUNER

with diode tuning
Mounting
The tuner may be mounted by soldering it on to a printed-wiring board, using the piercing diagram shown in Fig. 3. (The tuner may .a lso be mounted by means of a snap-in
mount or a bracket. Information will be supplied upon request.) .
orientation.
104,14 (41el
1
1
li/+-1,3+~,
(Sxl
E-,- -- --- ----
110xl
7273777
Fig. 3. Piercing diagram viewed from solder side of board; e = 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in).
No connection must be made to the points 7,9 and 11, otherwise the oscillator
radiation may increase.
screening folded
~~w~
. .11....
7Z60737.2
3,5max
Fig. 4. Recommended fixing method of the aerial cables. Use a self-tapping screw.
May 1976
ELC2070
3122 128 54200
with diode tuning
ELECfRICAL DATA

25 5 C and a supply voltage of 12 0, 3 V.
Semiconductors
v.h.f. band, r.f. amplifier
mixer
oscillator
tuning diodes
switc-hing diode
u.h. f. band, r. f. amplifier
mixer /oscillator
tuning diodes
drift compensating diode
BF200
BF182
BF494
4 X BB106
BA243
BF180
BF181
4 X BB105B
BAW62

operating
storage
+5 to +55 oc
-25 to +85 C
Supply voltage
Current drawn from +12 V supply
v. h. f. band
u . h. f. band
14to21mA
11,5 to 18 mA
A.G .C. voltage(Figs.5and6)

v. h. f. band, at nominal gain
u. h. f. band, at nominal gain
2,4 V
typ. 4,5 V
2,4 V
typ.5,0V
A.G.C. current
v. h. f. band, at 40 dB gain reduction
u. h. f. band, at 30 dB gain reduction
max. 0,6 mA
max. 0, 7 mA
Tuning voltage range (Fig. 7 and 8)

Current drawn from 28 V tuning
voltage supply
Frequency ranges
v.h.f. band
u.h. f. band
depending on
a. g. c . voltage
+0,5to+28V
max. 36
J.lA
South African channel 4 (picture carrier

175,25 MHz) to channel 13 (picture carrier
247,43 MHz).
Margin at the extreme channels: min. 2MHz.
channel21 (picture carrier 471,25 MHz)
to channel 69 (picture carrier 855,25 MHz).
Margin at the extreme channels: min. 3MHz.
3122 12 8 54200
ELC2070
V. H. F. /U.H.F . TELEVISION TU NER

with diode tuning
726~
7Z60739.
v.h.f.
u.h.f.
c:
0
"""
'0
-~ 10
10
"'
20
20
30
40
40
50
50
10
a.g.c. voltage (V)
60
Fig.6
2
8
10
a.g.c. voltage (V)
Fig.S
channel
13
>.
.."
.
.,_
..
.E
s
.
_3
>.
..
.."
.
.E
u
c:
c:
11
er
'-
10
'-
9
8
er
.:: 750
'-
"
201ll-+-i-Hf-
"
a.
5
4
tuning voltage I V)
F ig. 7
_ M_a
y19_76
tuning voltage (V)
Fig. 8
-~~ ~~~~~~~ ~
C7.1 -' --~--'
----
ELC2070
3122 128 54200
with diode tuning
picture
sound
38,9 MHz
32,9 MHz
Input impedance
asymmetrical
symmetrical
75 Q

and sound carrier)
v.s.w.r. at nom.
gain
max . v. s . w. r .
during gain control
min. 1)
max. 2)
min. 1)
max. 2)
max. 3,5
max. 3,5
max. 5
max. 6
max. 4
max. 4
max. 4
max. 5
max. 6
max . 5
v. h. f. band, channels 4 to 9
channels 10 to 13
u. h. f. band
A.G.C. range
v.h.f. band
u. h. f. band
min. 40 dB
min. 30 dB
R:. F. curves
bandwidth, v. h . f. band
u. h. f. band
tilt, v. h. f. band
u. h . f. band, channels 21 to 60
channels 61 to 69
typ. 8 to 15 MHz
typ. 15 to 25,MHz
max.
3dB
max.
3dB
max .
4dB
Power gain (see also MEASURING

METHOD OF POWER GAIN)
v. h . f. band
channel 4
channel 13
u. h. f. band
channel 21
channel 31
channel 69
min.
typ.
typ.
min.
typ.
typ.
typ.
Noise figure
v.h.f. band
channel 9
u. h. f . band
channel 21
channel 51
channel 69
max.
9dB
typ. 6,5 dB
max. 12 dB
typ. 8, 0 dB
typ. 9,5 dB
typ. 10,5 dB
24 dB
28 dB
27 dB
25 dB
32 dB
29 dB
33 dB
1) Best value of V. S. W . R. between picture carrier and sound carrier.

2) Worst value of V. S . W .R. between picture carrier and sound carrier.
C74
11
May 1976
3122 128 54200
ELC2070

with diode tuning
I. F. rejection
v. h. f. band
u.h.f. band
min. 60 dB
min. 60 dB
Image rejection
v. h. f. band
u.h. f. band
min. 60 dB
min. 40 dB
Signal handling (see also Figs. lO and 11)

cross-modulation (1%) at nominal
gain, in channel
interfering channel: ~ound carrier
frequency), v. h. f. band
u. h . f. band
typ.
typ.
in band
(wanted signal: signal carrier frequency
of channel N,
channel N-2 (v.h.f.), N-5 (u.h.f.)
v .h. f. band
u. h. f. band
4 mV
5 to 10 mV
} 1)
::::l
~
typ. 10 to 50 mV
typ. 15 to 50 mV
} 1)

overloading, a t nominal gain
at maximum a . g. c.
typ.
10 mV
typ. >200 mV
} 2)

frequency of 10kHz, v. h. f. band
u.h.f. band
typ.
>25 mV
typ. 10 to 20 mV
} 3)
Detuning of the i. f. output circuit as a result of

band switching and tuning with respect of channel 7
max. 400kHz
1) This e . m. f. (open voltage) is referred to an impedance of 75 Q ,

1% cross-modulation means that 1% of the modulation depth of ):he interfering signal
is transferred to the wanted signal.
2) This e. m. f. (open voltage) is referred to an impedance of 75 Q,
Criterion of overloading: 30% compression of the synchronization pulses of a standard
3) This e. m. f. (open voltage) is referred to an impedance of 75
May 1976
Q,
ELC2070
3122 128 54200
with diode tuning

v.h. f. band
u.h .f. band
max . 300kHz
max. 600kHz

max. lOO kHz
max. 250kHz
v.h.f. band
u.h . f . band
max . lOO kHz
from 25 to 40 C
v.h.f. band
u. h. f. band
max. 400kHz
max . 500kHz
The tuner is in conformity with the radiation requirements of C. I. S. P. R. Recommendation No . 24/3, provided the following conditions are fulfilled:
- A low-pass filter (Fig. 9) with a cut-off frequency of about 300 MHz has to b~ inserted
between the v. h. f. aerial terminal of the tuner and the aerial terminal of the receiver.
Television receivers with a common v. h. f . / u. h. f. connector in combination with a
low-pass/high-pass splitter 1) may not need this additional filter.
50 nH
50 nH
?Z?0627
Fig.9
- No connections must be made to the terminals 7, 9 and 11.
- Earthing of the tuner a nd connections to the i. f. amplifier have to be made in such a
way, that additional r adiat im:i. is prevented.
Microphonics
lf the tuner is installed in a professional manner, there will be no microphonics.
1) E. g. coaxial aerial input assembly 3122 127 10450.
3122 12 8 54200
ELC2070
V. H. F. ;D. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER

with diode tuning
10 3
7Z73782
e.m.f.,75n
(m V)
10 2
channel 8
channel 25,
channel 55
10
..........
.......
.......
'"' p
/
~ !'..
......-:
~~
..--
-- --
-""""
1---
.......
1
-10
:::::.
---
10
20
30
gain reduction (dB)
Fig. 10. Cross-modulation, in channel.

10 3
7Z7J781
m.f.,75n
(m V)
!l_fj
channel 30
/'
1--
-V
\.
_...
r--
./
/
\\._ I'
10
'- channel
~ ~ 1'\ channel
8 (6)
60 (55)
-10
10
20
gain reduction (dB)
30
Fig. 11. Cross- m odulation, in band; the interfering channels are g iven between brackets.
'
May 1976
ELC2070
3122 12 8 54200
V.H. F. /U.H .F. TELEVISION TUNER

with diode tuning
For connection of the tuner the terminal location, Fig. 2, should be consulted.
If the tuner is used in receivers the chassis of which is connected to the mains, isolating
capacitors according to the safety rules have to be inserted in the aerial leads.
Three ways of connecting, depending on the number of sw itches ava ilable, aregivenbelow.
~.,.
9
0
10
<;
~-1---__J
:
E
-~
u.h.f.
---------
<;
13
'---
'\
12
)47!1
147!1
v.h.f.
11
0
u.h.f.
.:~
tuning
voltage
(+0,5 t o +28Vl
a .g.c.
voltage
(+2,4 to +7,5VJ
supply
i.f.
7Z1l'780
voltage
(+12V10%J
Fig. 12. Connectjon diagram with two sw1tches.
tuner
terminals
10
12
13
u.h .f.
cl,;
tuning
voltage
(+0,5 to +28VJ
"
a.g.c.
voltage
(+3,2 to +8V)
supply
i.f.
7Z7J778
vOltage
(+12V:!:10%)
F ig. 13._ Connection diagram with one switch.

All diodes: BAX 13, BA217 or comparable silicon diodes.
C78
II _ _ _~_II_M~"
1071> _ _ _ .
ELC2070
3122 128 54200
with diode tuning
tuner 1
terminals
7
0
9
0
10
12
13
R1
-c::::J--~
tuning
voltage
1+0,5 to +28V)
R3
a.g.c.
voltage
1+1,7 to +7VI
supply
i.f.
7Z13179
voltage
1+12V10%1

All diodes: BAX13, BA217 or comparable silicon diodes.
The values of R b Rz and R3 depend on a. g . c. circuit.
The tuner is provided with an i. f. injection point at the collector of the mixer for a ligning
of the i. f. injection point see Fig. 2).
The aligning should be done with the v. h. f. band tuned. The tuning voltage should be
15to20V.
If this injection method cannot be employed in the television receiver (e. g. because the
injection point is not acces sible or there is not enough i. f. signal available), the i. f.
signal can be fed to test point 3 (terminal 11) via a capacitor of 0, 82 to 1 pF. The tuner
must be s w_itched to the u. h. f. position; the tuning voltage should be approx. 10 V.
This injection method requires approx . 14 dB less signal than the first method.
No permanent connection must be made to test point 3, otherwise the tuner may exceed
the oscillator radiation limits.
May 1976
C71lt . - - - - - - '
ELC2070
V.H. F. ;U. H . F. TELEVISION TUNER
3122 128 54200 .
with diode tuning
The terminals 7, 9 and 11 should be not connected.
=i
la
(20 turns)
8,2pF
i.f. output
of tuner
18
kfi
detector probe
60pF
IZ=SOn or 75fi)
7Z73762
Fig.l5
Switch the tuner to the v. h. f. band; the tuning voltage should be 15 to 20 V.
Feed an i. f. sweep signal (500. to 1000 m V) to the i. f. injection point.
Adjust the trimmer (Fig. 15), tunable coil (La/Lb), i. f. output coil of the tuner L519
Fig.l6
Thendisplaythe r . f. + i. f. curve of the tuner at 190 MHz (picture carrier frequency) and
make small corrections in the alignment of the i. f. coils (La / Lb andL519), if necessary,
to get the markers 38,9 MHz and 32,9 MHz symmetricaliy on the slopes of the curve,
Because the output impedance of the dummy circuit is 50 to 75 Q, the power ga in can be
75 Q source and a 75 Q detector (or between a 50 Q source and matching pad 50/75 Q and
a 50 Q detector) .
ACCESSORIES
Aerial input transformer ELC 1094, v. h. f. , catalogue number: 2422 542 10941;
aerial input transformer ELC2092, u. h. f. , catalogue number: 2422 542 12921;
coaxial aerial input assembly, catalogue number 3122 127 10450.
CSO
May 1976
ELC3082
3122 127 19681
11
11

with diode tuning
Systems
C.C .I.R. systems M and N (R.T.M.A.)
Channel s
A2 to A6 (low v . h. f. band)
A7 to A 1:3 (high v. h. f. band) .
picture
sound
45 , 75 MHz
41 ,25 MHz
APPLICATION
Designed to cover the v. h. f. channels of C. C. I. R. syste ms M and N (R. T. M. A .).
Thanks to its good signal- handling properties, the tuner is especially suited for strong
signa l areas.
~~~ ~~~---~~~ --- CHI
_Ma-yl97-6
ELC3082
3122 127 19681
with diode tuning
DESCRIPTION
The ELC3082 is a v. h. f. tuner with elect r onic tuning and band switching, covering the
low v. h. f. band (frequency range 54 to 88 MHz) and the high v. h. f. band (frequency range
174 to 216 MHz).
Mechanically, the tuner i s built on a low-loss printed - wiring board, carryi ng all components, in a metal housing made of a rectangular frame and front and rear cover (see
F1g . 2). The aenal connectwn IS on one of the frame sides, all other connectiOns (supply
voltages, a. g. c. voltage, tuning and switching voltages) a re made via feed-through capacitors in the under side. The mounting method is shown in Figs. 3 and 4.
Electrically, the tuner consists of v. h. f. and i.f. parts. The aerial signal is fed to the
input filters, providing i. f. rejection and band selection. The filters are followed by a
P- l- N diode attenuator, equipped with two diodes BA379. The output of the attenuator is
connected to the emitter of the input transistor BF480, operating as r . f. amplifier in
grounded base configuration. The same transistor also delivers the current drive for the
P-I-N diode attenuator, controlled by an a.g. c. voltage fed to the transistor base. The
combination of the diode attenuator with this high current transistor (lE at normal gain
about 10 mA) has excellent signal-handling properties within the whole a. g. c. range.
The collector load of the input transistor is formed by a double tuned circuit,transferring
the signal to the emitter of the mixer transistor BF 324.
Good signal- handling properties of this stage are achieved by high osci llator injection.
The oscillator is equipped with a transistor BF324. In the low v. h. f. position, self-detection of the oscillator signal is used to back- bias the five switching diodes BA243/244 (or
BA182), required for band switching between low and high v . h.f. channels.
Three capacitance diodes BB106 provide tuning of the r. f. circuits.
The collector of the mixer transistor i s connected to a single tuned i. f. resonant c ircuit
(about 20 MHz bandwidth), the output of which is fed to the i. f. output stage, equipped
with another transistor BF324 in grounded base configuration .
This stage has al so been designed especially for good signal-handling properties. The
coll ector load of the i. f. output transistor is formed by a single tuned i. f. circuit, at the
low end of which the i. f. signal is capacitively coupled ou t of the tuner.
The tuner can be used in combination with a u.h.f. tuner. In this case the u.h . f. i.f.
signa l is fed to the emitter of the i . f. output transistor, which acts as i. f. amplifier for
u. h. f. as well as for v. h. f.
The u. h. f. i. f. input terminal can be used as an i. f. injection point for aligning the i. f.
output circuit together with the i. f. amplifier of the television receiver. For the same
purpo~e a separate i. f. injection point has been provided at the collector of the mixer.
The tuner requires transistor supply voltages of +12 V, a switching voltage of +12 V,
a. g. c . voltages , variable from +5 V (normal operating point) to about +2, 5 V (maximum
a. g. c.) and a tuning voltage , variable from +0, 5 V to +28 V.
The aerial input of the tuner is asymmetrical. For use in symmetrical aerial systems,
aerial transformers (baluns) are available (see ACCESSORY) . .
..
Cil2
11
_ _ II
May 1976
test po1nt
3
test pomt
2
Ill
<
......
....,
"'
a-
,--------
---------------T-------------------R310
I
I
~C218
I
I
I
L507
R305
210
322
R306
C219 I
R
323
'11
iQ"
r----------- -
__ j
I
I
I
I
_j
C228
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
06 10
233
I
I
"'II
I
I
I
I
C232
I
I
I
I
I
I
C230
----~----------~-
o,l----C236
C2lS
u.h.f.
1.f . .nput
I
I
I
I
327
J:;C229
R32B
R330
I
Ii
-@~ ~------Q;jj>---~--@~\>-- Ll __ ~I>------@+-----j >j,
C237
C238
C239
C2l.O
C241
C242
r-
0
a .g.c voltage
(-1-Sto +2.5VJ
low
band
hgh
band
switChing-voltage
1+12VJ
common supply
voltage
{+12VI
v.h.f. supply
voltage
(+12VJ
tunmg
voltage
1+0.5 to +28VJ
1.f. OU!put
CO
....,
ELC3082
V ..H. F. TELEVISION TUNE;R
3122 127 19681
with diode tuning
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
...-- - ---98,6 - - - - - ,
1111-11-11-
I~
. . . . ' . . . ' . .i
=IJ$- -$- ~ <!l- 4>-~ $--i
~
ru~u-ru~
-u-u-u
~I
/
aerial
L.
Fig . 2
T e rminal 1 = u. h. f. i. f. input
2 = a. g . c. voltage, +5 to +2, 5 V
3 = switching voltage , +12 V
4 = common s upply voltage , +12 V
5 = v .h.f. supply voltage , +12 V
6 = tuning voltage, + 0 , 5 to +28 V
7 = i. f. output
E =earth
CH-+
97
3122 127 19681
ELC3082
V.H .F . TELEVISION TUNER

[
with diode tuning
Mounting
The tuner ma y be mounted by soldering it on to a printed-wiring board, using the piercing diagram shown iri F ig. 3. (The tuner may also be mounted by means of a bracket.
Information will be supplied upon request.)
The tun e r may be mounted anywhere in the receiver and there are no restrictions on
orientation.
..., . ,.._ 1,3
+g,1 (4x)
91,44 (36e)
---------~
-1E- - .- - -- -- -- 7fr- +01

1
o'
(7x)
. .,,.._
1,
22,86
(9e)
+-+++- +-tt' -~_ j
f
- - -+' +
~ct=
.
' -+-
'
. 15,24 +'
7,62(3e) _j.._l- l . -1.
(3x)
(Se) ..
-~-.
'
.
+
W.._L7,62(3e)
7113791
(3x)
F ig. 3 . Pie r c ing diagra m viewed fro m s older s ide of board: e = 2, 54 mm {0 , 1 in).
screenrng folded
'"'"W'u~
...I I...
7Z60737.2
3,5max
Fig. 4. Recommende d fixing me thod of the aerial ca ble . Use a s elf-tapping screw.
Ma y 1976
:::::::
----
ELC3082
3122 127 19681
with diode tuning
ELECTRICAL DATA
Unless o therwi se spec ifie>d all electrical values apply at a n ambie nt temperature of
25 5 C and a suppl y voltage of 12 0 , 3 V.
Semiconductor s
P- I- N attenuato r
r. f. amplifier
mixer
osci ll ator
tuning diodes
swi tching diodes
i. f. a mplifie r
2 X BA379
BF480
BF324
BF324
3 x BB106
5 x BA243/244 (or BA182)
BF324
Ambient tempe r ature range

operat ing
storage
+ 5 to +55 C
-25 to +85 oc
Supply voltage
+ 12 V 10%
Current drawn from+ 12 V suppl y at nomirial gain
low band
46, 5 mA 10%
high band
63, 5 rnA, 10%
Notes - At 40 dB gain r eduction t he currents decrease about 5 mA.
- The supply voltage at ter minal 4 shou ld be car efully filtered to avoid hum
modulation in one of the P-1- N diodes when the attenuator is biase d to higher
attenuation ratios. Unde r mos t unfavourable conditions a ripple volta ge of
3 mV (p-p) may produce a disturban ce which is just vi s i ble.
A. G. C. vo ltage (F igs. 5 and 6)
low band, a t nominal gain
at 40 dB gain r e du ction
high band, at nomina l gain
1
+50,2V )
+ 3, 3 V (typical)
+5 0, 2 V 1)
+ 3, 3 V (typical)
A.G .C . cur rent

at no mina l gain
with a . g. c .
max. 1 mA
max. 1 mA
Tuning voltage range (Figs. 7 a nd 8)

+0, 5 to +28 V
Current drawn from 28 V tuning voltage s uppl y
max. 0, 5 fl A
Note - The source impedance of the tuning voltage , offered to termina l 6, must be
max. 100 kQ at tuning voltages below 5 V.
Switc hin g voltage
low band
open circuit
high band
+ 12 V 10%
Note - In the low band position the tuner produces a negative voltage (3 to 8 V) at
terminal 3; this terminal must no t be loaded wit\1 an exte rnal resistance below
50 MQ.
1 ) This value may be inc r eased to 5, 5 V if a certain deterioration of s igna l ha ndling is

accepted. At voltages above 5, 5 V the c r oss- modula tion in ban d may deteriorate
rapidly.
3122 127 19681
ELC3082
V.H.F . TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
7273789
7Z73790
high band
low band
iii
~
iii
~
:;;
u
"
"~
"0
c
0
:;;
"0
10
10
c;
c;
"'
"'
20
20
30
,,
40
40
50
50
60
60
--::::
6
a.g.c. voltage (VI
a.g.c. voltage
Fig.S
Fig.6
7Z
7273788
low band
high band
'N
I
:::E
90
.E.
,.
1-- A6
-r- - '
...,.
....
80
11- A13
-I-I-
210
,.,u
...,.
.."
.E.
A12
.:: 200
'-
AS
"u
~
~
"~
(V I
A11
'-
:=!
A10
~ 190
70
A4
a.
1--1r-60 r--
A3
a.
A9
AB
180
t--
r1-
A2
A7
I
10
20
30
tu ning voltage (V I
Fig.7
10
20
30
tuning voltage (V )
Fig. 8
11
r<o -.
ELC3082
3i 22
127 19681
with diode tuning
Frequency ranges
low band
high band
channel A2 ( picture carrier 55, 25 MHz)

to channel A6 (pictur:e carrier 83, 25 MHz).
2 MHz.
channel A7 (picture carrier 175 , 25 MHz)
to channel Al3 (picture carrier 211,25 MHz).
Margin at the extreme channels: min .
.3 MHz. -
picture
sound
45 , 75 MHz
41,25 MHz
Input impedance
asymmetrical
sy mmetrical
75Q
300Q (see. ACCESSORY).

and sound carrier)
v. s. w. r. at nom.
gain
max. v . s. w. r.
during gain
control
max. 3,5
max. 4
max. 3,5
max. 4
low band
high band
A.G.C. range
low band
high band
min. 40 dB (typ. 54 dl3)

min . 40 dB .(typ . 50 dB)
R. F. cu rve s
bandwidth , low band
high band
tilt , ' low band
high band
typ.
7 to 10 MHz
typ.
8 to 10 MHz
max. 3 dB
max. 3 dB
Power gain (see also MEASURING METHOD OF

low band
min.
channel A2
typ.
channel A6
typ.
high band
min .
c hannel A7
t yp .
channel Al3
typ.
POWER GAll\)
24 dB
27 dB
29 dB
25 dB
28 dB
31 dB
Noise figure
low band
high band
max. 9 , 5 dB (t yp. 7 dB)

max. 9, 5 dB (typ. 7, 5 dB)
I. F. rej!'!ction
low band, c hannel A2
channel A3
channels A4 to A6
high band
min .
min .
min.
min.
C88
54
57
60
60
dB
dB
dB
dB
May 1976
ELC3082
3122 127 19681
with diode tuning
Image rejection
low band
high band
min. 56 dB
min. 50 dB
Signal handling
cr oss -modulation (1 %)
in channel
wanted signal : picture caqier frequency,
frequency
in band
wanted signal : picture carrier frequency
of channel N,
interfering ::;ignal: picture carrier of
channel N 2
interfering signal : picture carrier of
channel ;:: N 3
max . gain
t yp .
20 mV
with a. g. c.
typ. > 500 m V
l)
typ. lOO mV
typ. > 500 mY
typ. 250 mV
typ. > 500 m V
50 mV
typ.
typ. > 500 m V
} 2)
Minimum input s ignal (e. m. f.) at nominal

g-ain producing a shift of the osc illator
frequency of 10 kHz , low band
high band
typ.
typ.
50 mV
30 mV
} 3)
Detuning of the i. f. output circuit as a re sult of

band switching and tuning
max.
150 kHz

at a change of the supply vol tage of 5%
low band
high band
low band
h.igh band
::::::l
Minimum input s ignal (e. m. f.) producing

overloading, at nominal gain
at maximum a. g. c.
.....,
max. .300kHz
max. 300kHz
'ffiax. 150 kHz

max . 150 kHz
) This e. m. f. (open voltage) is referred to a n impedance of 75Q.
1% cross-modulation. means that 1% of the modul ation depth of the interfering signal is
transferred to the wanted signal.
2) Tl1is e. m ..f. (open voltage) is refe.rred to an impedance of 75Q.
Criterion of overloading: 30% compression of the synchronization pulses of a standard
3) This e.m.f. (open voltage) is referred to an impedance of 75Q.
________._______.....,_~ll _________.
ELC3082
3122 127 19681
with diode tuning

at a change of the ambi_e nt temperature
fron;1 25 to 50 C
low band
high band
max. 500kHz
max. 500kHz
The tuner is in conformity with the radiation requirements of C.I.S.P.R. Recommendatien No. 24/2 and the corresponding F. C. C. rules, provided the tuner is installed in
a professional manner.
Micro phonics
If the tuner is installed in a professional manner, there will be "no microphonics.
--
11
_ _ _ 11
3122 127 19681
ELC3082
with diode tuning
ALIGNMENT OF THE l.F. CIRCUIT
For i. f. injection the u. h. f. i. f. input (terminal 1) or the i. f. inj ection point at the collector of the mixer transistor (at the top of the tuner, Fig. 2) can be used.
The aligning can be done with any channel tuned. A probe as shown in Fig. 9 should be
used.
47Dn
u.h.f. input terminal

or i.f. injection point
ssn
7Z7l784
Fig.9
The signal attenuation between the i. f. generator and the i. f. output of the tuner is about
4 dB when injection is done via the injection point, and about 8, 5 dB in the case of injectionviatheu.h.f. i.f. input.
1)
l)
The i. f. output circuit is detuned about +300 kHz or -150 kHz when injection is done
via the injection point or via the u . h . f. i. f. input r espectivel y.
The i.f. output of the tuner s hould be terminated with the RC-circuit given in Fig.lO.
i.f. output~ detector probe

oftuner
j_____
(Z:SOfior75Il)
68pF
I ,,,.. .
Fig. 10
Fig.ll
The RC-circuit roughly matches the i. f. output impedance to 75Q at the resonant frequency of the i. f. output circuit, which should be tuned to 43, 5 MHz. The bandwidth
should be approx . 4, 5 MHz.
Because the input and output impedances of the tuner are now 75Q, the power gain can be
measured in the conventional manner by inserting tuner and RC-circuit between a 75Q
source and a 75Q detector (or between a 50Q source and matching pad 50/75Q and a 50Q
detector).
ACCESSORY
Aerial input transformer ELC 1094, v. h. f. , catalogue number: 2422 542 10941.
1 ) Reference: normal operation with r.f. signal via aerial input.
May 1976
________.....-_____II~
C91
--
12ET5632
GENERAL
12ET5732
11
V.H.F. AND U.H.F. TELEVISION TUNERS

with diode tuning
INTRODUCTION
t!"\e
Television tuners 12ET5732 and 12ET5632 have been developed for

reception of
television signals in v.h.f. bands I and Ill and u.h.f. bands IV and V respectively
(C. C. I. R. system). The tuners may be used together or separately. Tuning is achieved
by va:riable cApacitance diodes .
The input circuits of ~he tuners can be connected in parallel to the aerial via 75 Q coaxial
c able. The i. f. outputs may also be connected in parallel.
Selection of v. h. f. or "u. h. f. reception is effected by switching the operating voltage.
Tuning of channels 2 to 12 is done by altering the tuning voltage and a~tomatically omitting the range between channels 4 and 5 (band II).
The tuners may be mounted directly on to a printed-wiring board (see paragraph "Mounting"
of the relevant tuner) but it is advisable to use the mounting socket shown in Fig. 2 to
facilitate repair.
Fig. 1 Example of connecting a

potentiometer unit with a
push-button unit.
i.f.
aerial
28V
j_
..l.
..L
..l.
...L
push-button unit
~ril 1973
. ~
-=
12ET5632
12ET5732
V. H. F. AND U.H . F. TELEVISION TUNERS
GENERAL
with diode tuning
69,5
3112 220 40301
socket
3112 200 20710
aerial
input
-, ,-
aerial cable
Fig. 2 Mounting socket
e=2,54
vx
728101.1.4.
30
3,2
t
24
-.
18
12
1,3
0
0
24
30
6
12
18
36
42
48
54
Fig. 3 Hole pattern of the printed-wiring board for the mounting socket
(viewed on solder side).
C9 4
60
7Z65815
April 1973
GENERAL
V. H. F. AND U. H. F TELEVISION TUNERS

with diode tuning
12ET5632
12ET5732
CONNECfiNG THE I.F. OUTPUTS

As it is possible to connect the i. f . outputs of the tuners in parallel, the following must
be noted.
The i. f. outputs should be connected to the i. f. amplifier via the network shown in Fig. 4.
The quality of each i. f . circuit is adjusted to the same (highest possible) value to ensure
that the network has the same effect on both c ircuits. If this were not done , switching from
v . h. f. to u . h. f . might not cause the correct change in i. f. and bandwidth of the adjusted
bandpass curve. Damping resistor RB (0 to 56 Q), connected between the tuners and the
n~twork, makes it possible to adjust the bandwidth of the i. f. tuner circuits between
(approx.) 2, 2 MHz and 3, 8 MHz.
Mixer transistors T2 (u. h. f.) and T 43 (v. h. f.) have a common collector resistor of
470 Q (Re). The mixer transistor in use causes a potential difference of between 0, 8 V.
and 1 V across Re and, as a result, the collector /base diode of the non -operating
mixer transistor is influenced. In this way the base capacitor will be connected in parallel with the i. f. circuit. The circuit is thus detuned in such a way that it does not affect
the bandpass curve of the i. f. filter in use.
Collector resistor Re is decoupled by coil LE which means that capacitor CK is not
damped and the bandpass curve shows no deterioration.
Capacitor CT prevents d. c. potentials from being applied to the i. f. amplifier should an
electrical connection exist to earth or to the tr~nsistor.
The component values of the network between the tuners and the i. f . amplifier are not
critical, some of the components may even be omitted provided that their influence is
taken into account when calculating the i. f. amplifier input.
i.f.
Cr amplifier
u.h.f.
VP718 131 A
v.h.f
Fig. 4
April 1973
( ' Ut;
--
12ET5632
12ET5732
V.H. F. AND U. H. F. TELEVISION TUNERS
GENERAL
with diode tuning
ALIGNMENT OF THE I.F. CIRCUIT
To adjust the i. f. bandpass curves, the tuners should be inserted into the mounting socket
and their i. f. outputs connected to the i. f. amplifier as shown in Fig. 4.
Adjustment is done a t supply voltage = 12 V,
a .g.c.voltage= 6V,
tuning voltage = 10 V.
The wobble generator signal (connected via 75 Q) is connected to the i. f. injection points
Sand E.
Switch to u.h.f. reception and adjust i.f. coil L 21 to obtain the desired bandpass curve;
switch to v. h. f. and similarly adjust i. f. coil Ls2 It is advisable to repeat these adjustments as a c hec k.
'
The foll owi ng dummy c ircuit (Fig: 4) can be used to check the tuner without an i. f. amplifier , a nd to pre -ad just the i. f. circuit.
Fig. 5
With S1 open and Rs = 0 Q , the i. f . c ircuit of the tuner , and the dummy circuit Lo, can
be adjusted to a ba ndp ass filter having the curve show n in Fig. 6. Switch s 1 has to be
closed to di spl ay the bandpass curve of th e tuner i. f. circuit (without dummy circuit Lo).
v.h.f
u.h.f.
f=41 MHz
~ ig.6 a
C96
f=41 MHz
VE 738 02JA
Fig.6b
Anril
1.97 .~
12ET5632/03
9012 745 63203
1
with diode tuning
System
C . C.I.R., systemG
Channels
E21 to E68 (bands IV and V)
Inter mediat e frequencies

picture
sound
38,9 MHz
33,4 MHz
APPLICATION
This all- eleqr onic television tuner has been developed for reception of television signal s
in the bands IV and V (C . C . I. R. system G).
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
---1
Terminal A = aerial u. h. f.
B = r. f. supply voltage
C = a. g, c. voltage
D =mixer/oscillator
supply voltage
E = i. f. injection point
F = i. f. output
G = tuning voltage
H = tuning voltage
L."6
L7
0
5
~
earth
August 1974
earth
VX 72&096 .1.6.
Fig. l
C97
~,-,-.,-~-,, -
12ET5632/03
U.H.F .TELEVISIONTUNER
901274563203
with di ode tuning
Mounting
e =2 ,54
~Iill illllltlllllllllllllllllllllllillllllllllllllllllllllltiiii :";'.,

0
10
20
30
40
"60
50
63
7Z65816
Fig. 2 Hole pattern of the printed- wiring board (viewed on solder side).
C9H
11
11
August 1974
U. H. F . TELEVISION TUNER
9012 745 63203
12ET5632/03
with diode tuning
ELECTRICAL DATA
Semiconductors.
r. f . a mplifi e r
mixer /osc illator
tuning diodes
AF367
AF367
3 x BBlOSB

operating
storage
+ 10 to +50 C
-25 to +60 C
Suppl y voltage
+ 12 V, 10 %
Current drawn from +12 V suppl y
6, 5 to 12 mA (depending on a . g. c .
vol tage)
A . G. C . vol tage r ange (Figs . 5,6, 7 anil8)
9, 8 to 2 V
For the adju st ment of the a . g. c.
voltage, the circuit shown below
can be used
12V
2,2
--
kO
:::: 9,4V
6,~[
kO
Fig. 3
~"
7Z69Z78
Tuning vol tage r a nge (Fig. 4)
0, 5 to 28 V
Frequency range, channel E2 1 to E68
471,25 to 847 , 25
Margin a t the ex treme channels
2: 1 MHz (typical value : 2 MHz)
picture sound
38,9 MHz
33,4 MHz
The oscillator frequency is highe r
than the s igna l frequency
Input impedanc e
75 Q
Power gain
2:
Noise figure
:s 10 dB (typic al value: 7, 5 dB)
20 dB (typic al value: 23 dB)
Ga in reduction
2:
Reflections
:s SO %
I. F. rejection
2:
60 dB (typic al valu e: 65 dB)
Image fr equenc y rejection
2:
36 dB (typical value : 45 dB)
August 1974
30 dB (typical value: 40 dB)
C99
12ET5632/03
9012 745 63203
with diode tuning
Cross modulation
an interfering signal of 15 mV
(channel X 2) at the 75 Q aerial
input produces no visible cross
m odulati on on the wan ted signal
(channel X), independent of the adjustment of the r. f. transistor
Shi.f t of oscillator frequency at a change

of the supply voltage of 10%
during warm -up time (30 s after
switching on)
---
::; 500kHz .
:> 50kHz
Drift of oscillator frequency at a change

of the ambient temperature from
25 to 40 oc. channels 21 to 60
channels 61 to 68
::; 400kHz
:5600kHz
Tuning range of i. f. coil
32 to 40 MHz
Oscilla tor radiation
the tuner is in conformity with the

radiation requirements of lEC 106
and of CISPR24/3.
Lightning protection
the tuner is insensitive to lightning

discharges of 30 kV , 400 mW s
applied to the aerial input for up to
30 s at a repetition frequency of
1 to 20 Hz.
tuning voltage lVI
Fig.4.
CJOO
11
_ _ _ II
August 1974
----1
9012 745 63203
12ET5632/0
U.H. F . TELEVISIO NTUNER

with diode tuning
a g c voltage (V}
a g c voltage IV}
12
o.-~_,_,_,~~-.
12
0.-,-,-,-,-.-.-
CD
~
30 1--t--l--l--l-
::>
"0
c:
01
40 1--1--1--l-J
1Z69lll1
Fig. 5.
Fig. 6.
o g.c voltage (V}
a g .c. voltage (V}
Or-~~~~~~~
12
20
c:
30
; ;
30
u
::>
::>
"0
"0
c:
c:
:c;
01
12
iD
~
0
20
iD
c:
Or-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-
01
40
Fig. 7.
August 1974
40
Fig . 8.
CIOl
......,
m
-t
U'l
0
0
0.
i.f. injection point
"'
CN
......,
E1C4
.........
0
CN
CS
rr'I
RI
::r::
~ ~
rt .
R2
:r .....:.!
9:
r9
0
0.
(1)
()q
t-'
t:Il
<
-~
z
.....:.!
Jl
u.h.f.
t:Il
5' 0
"'I
ll,.
~M1
earth
c'I
+12V
o.g.c.
voltage
G
tuning
voltage
M2
+12 V
tuning
voltage
ou~-~ut
11
?::'
earth
Fig .9.
:>
(Jl
rt
......
'D
""""
.....
N
..,..
-.J
CJl
0'-
12ET5732/03
9012 745 73203

with diode tuning
System
C. C . I. R., system B
Channels
E2 to E4 (band I)
E 5 to E 12 (band Ill)
Intermediate fr equencies
picture
sound
38,9 MHz .
33,4 MHz
APPLICATION
This all - electronic television tuner has been devel oped for reception of television signals
in the bands I and III (C.C.I.R. system B).
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
~----------- 82 ------------~1
---.'
4,15
Termina l K = aerial v. h. f.
L = r. f. supply voltage
N =a. g. c. voltage
P = mixer/oscillator
supply voltage
16
S = i. f. injection point
!
T = i. f. output
V = tuning voltage
X = tuning voltage
L61
ciJ
1,32
LS2
LSO
50
Fig. 1.
12ET57J2jQJ
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNE R
9012 745 73203
with di ode tuning
Mounting
e=2,54
~Iil i
0
t t i t t
11111111111 11111 11111 11111 11111 11111111111 llllli Ill

W
ffi
I:";'., .
M~
7Z65814
F ig. 2 Hole pattern of the printed-wiring board (viewed on so lder side} .

'
C104
--
----T~--~~------n~----~
V. H. F . TELEVISION TUNER
9012 745 73203
12ET5732/03
with diode tuning

ELECTRICAL DATA
Semiconductors,
r . f. a mplifier
mixer /osc illator
tuning diodes
2 X AF367
AF367
6 X BB105G
Ambient temperature r ange

operating
storage
+10 to +50 C
- 25 to +60 C
Supply voltage
+12 V
11,5 to 23 , 5 mA (depending on
a. g . c. voltage)
A . G. C . voltage range (Figs. 5 to 8)
9, 8 to 2 V
For the adjustment of the a . g. c.
voltage, the circuit shown below
c a n be used
12V
2,2
kO
....._::::9 ,4V
6,8
kO
Fig. 3
]
'/
-'
7Z69278
Tun ing voltage range (Fig. 4)
0, 5 to 28 V
Frequency ra nge
band I
48,25 to 62,25 MHz
band m 175 , 25 to 224,25 MHz
Margin at the extreme channels
;>: 1 MHz (typical value: 1, 5 MHz)
Inter mediate frequencies

pic ture
sound
38,9 MHz
33,4 MHz
Input Impedance
75 Q
Power gain
"' 20 dB (typical value:

------- 24 dB)
No ise figure
'""'
8, 5 dB (typicar'value: 6 dB)
Gain reduction
;>:
2 ~dB (typical valu e: 36 dB}
Reflec~ i ons
50 %
I. F rejection
"' 50 dB (typical value: 57 dB)
Image frequency rejection
"' 40 dB (typical value: 57 dB}
_August1974___li LI~~--~~~'
CJOS
12ET5732/03
9012 745 73203
with diode tunipg
an interfer ing signal of 15 mV

(channel X 2) a t the 75 Q aerial
input produces n o visible cross
modulation on the wanted s ignal
(chann el X) independent of the adjustm ent of the J; . f. transistors .
Cross modul ation
Shift of osc ill ator frequ enc y at a c hange

of the suppl y voltage of 10 %
:s 250kHz
during warm -u p time (30 .s after

switching on)
:s 50 kHz
Drift of osc ill ator frequency at a change

of the a mbient temperature from
25 to 40 C
:s 400kHz
Tunin g r ange of i. f. coil
32 to 40 MHz
Oscillator r a diation
the tuner is in conformity with the

radiation requirements of IEC 106
and of CISPR24/3 .
Lightning protection
the tuner is insensitive to lightn ing

discharges of 30 kV, 400 mWs
a pplie d t o the aerial input for up to
30 s at a repetition fre quenc y of
1 t o 20Hz .
30
tuning voltaf!e (VI
Fig. 4
Cl06 .
August 1974
9012 745 73203
12ET5732/03
with diode tuning
a .g .c. voltage IV)
4.
12
0.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-
4.
a .g .c. voltage IV) _

8
12
0.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~
~ 30 1-+-+-l--
:J
1!
c:
c;
~40 1-+-+-+-+-+-+-1-1-1-~-r~
-Fig.6.
Fig. 5 .
a .g.c. voltage lVI
a .g .c. voltage lVI

4.
8
12
Or-"1"-,1-.-,-,~~.-"
0
0
channel 5
10 H
4.
r- r-
channel_12
H-1-f-t---,
12
10
20 r-t--t-t-+-
20
CO
CO
~ 30
~ 30 1-f-lf-1""'
,:e"
1!
-~
,"
1!
c:
c;
m4o r-r-t-+-+-+-+-1--r-r-r-r~
c:
0
m
40
7Z69286
Fig. 7.
72692 82
Fig. 8.
_Augu_st_
l974~~~~~~~~~~ .~
("' I f\ 7'- - - ' - - - - ' - -
-....
to.)
U'l
I BAND I I
"
w
to.)
........
0
w
C55
I
CS3:Jj_
j_CS
1
4
L44
C52
less_
_C51
R52
L41
L42
<
~
n
r
.. 7)
s. ~
....
:::r >-1
0. 1:':1
[ ~
<
~ 0
0
Jg z
Lc6:s
(!)
62
C67
'
1 BAND
mI
>-1
69
earth
:>
:::0
C74I
f"
-'- C76
,I
+12V
N
a.g.e.
voltage
C93I
tuning
voltage
"'
....
....
p
+12V
tuning
voltage
T
i.f.
output
earth
'D
0
,_.
N
---1
Ul
......
z
1:':1
R61
....
c::
ILBS
Fig. 9.
""'
(J1
---1
'
102~1
SUPERSEDES DATA IN
3122 127
3122 127
HANDBOOK CM3 06-73
3122 127 1473(!
1045~
COAXIAL AERIAL INPUT ASSEMBLIES
APPLICATION
These coaxial aerial input assemblies have been developed for application in television
sets with 75 ohm input impedance, for use in v. h. f. as well as in u. h. f. ( 40-890 MHz).
The connectors meet the demands of both the IEC standards (diameter 9, 5 mm) and the
French standards (diameter 9 , 0 mm). They have to be used with plugs complying with the
properties mentioned in DIN 45325, IEC 169-2 (diameter 9 , 5 mm) and SNIR (diameter
9, 0 mm). The units meet the safety requirements of IEC 65 .
AVAILABLE TYPES
Coaxial aerial input assembly 75

Attenuation
: :> 1 dB
Reflection , v. h. f.
: :> IS%
==
==
=
u. h. f. . : :> 25%
Catalogue number
: 3122 127 10260
PHipPs
250 V"'
1-
1-
_Au_gu_st_I_97_4
390pF 3x
-pin 2.36
- - - 490.1 - - --
- - - - 55.2max- - - -- l
Dimensions in mm
-~.1~~~~ -~~--~~~ ~--
_.J
3122 127 10260

3122 127 10450
3122 127 14730

solder wire 1nto place after P
has been bent around the
soldered with-i'lux
cable
Recommended fixing of the aerial cable

Soldering conditions: 370 5 oc; 3, 5 0, 5 s
----
~8
:0.2
tulle made of shrink

sleeve or tulle made
of outer cover which
Cable diameter
(' I In
11
?:
5 mm
Cable diameter < 5 mm
11
August 1974
3122 127 1026

3122 127 1045
3122 127 1473
Coaxial aeria l input assembly 75 Q, with filter
s 25%
Reflection , v . h. f.
u.h.f.
$30%
Frequency characteristic
v. h.f., 50 to 230 MHz
4ZO MHZ
700 MHz
u. h . f. , 470 to 850 MHz
230 MHz
100 MHz
S1 dB
<: 13 dB
23 dB
{typical va lue)
s 1 dB
<: 15 dB
40 dB (typical value)
Catalogue number
3122 12 7 10450
--=
~filnput
----.r--------_a. ____
fi _ P=J=t
.r- --~~~ning
':': -LI _ _ _ _ __L _____ j-~

1UU04
-r
30.2max
l
Dimensions in mm
November 1974
11 ______
~_11 ~
C tli
3122 127 10260

3122 127 10450
COAXIA L AERIAL INPUT ASSEMBLIES
3122 127 14730

solder Wires IntO place after Pond a
hove been bent around the cables
with fluxl2x)
.---
--
Recommended fixing of the aerial cable

Soldering conditions: 370 5 C; 3, 5 O,.S s
-~ ~ 6 . S:t0.2 -
2%05
:r
08
tulle made of shrink

sleeve or tulle made
of ou ter cover which
Cable diameter "= 5 m m
,~
07.1
-20.5
-~
-7'-1
Or ~--~--li;i.:i.~'--1-;;-r,.-,.-,-,..
---~~ _
04+g 2 - ~ 1-
611
_!
1u on'
Cable dia meter < 5 mm
C:1J2~ll _~__ ll
August 197 4
3122 127 10260

3122 127 10450
3122 127 14730
Coaxia l aerial input assembly 75 Q, with high-pass filter

Attenuati on at 1 MHz
5 MHz
10 MHz : ~
50 MHz : :0
230 MHz : :;;
4 70 MH z : :;;
850 MHz::;;
Reflection ,
25 dB
1 dB
1 dB
1 dB
1,5 dB
r-I-9----___T_,
q _____ j"'""
I
l___
v. h . f. I : :o 35%
v.h.f. Ill: :o 15%
u.h.f.
: :o 35%
Catalogue number
-r ------p -r-~1~::"'"9
7Sfi inpu t
75fi output
: 3 122 127 14730
Dimens i ons in mm
~~J41---~"---~-l_:~r
70.2
27.2max
DLJIT
~
~ ~~
~ =~fm'-g,
-
18.20.3 -
- pln2.36
,_
_ _ _ 490.1 - - --
1- - - - - 55.2ma- - - -- 1
August 1974
1 ~_(": 11 :<
""'31' ...22
... 1,~2:&:7, 11 QO~ z4~05u0,-.-..--..,-~-------~ ~
3122 127 14730

solder w i r~s rnto place after P has
been ben ~ around the cable .
Recommended fixing of the aerial cable"

Soldering conditions : 370 .5 oc; 3, 5 0 , 5 s
~ --
08
~0.2
Cable diameter <: 5 mm
~~~
' - - - -II-t
C
Cable diameter < 5 mm
August 1974
Components for
black and white television
---
1111111
PR EFERRED TYPES
tJ
SURVEY
basic deflection package
-1
()
~ 0
m ..,
>
0- ()
z
m
z
as sociated components
designed with
Consumer applications
;::o;:
>
-1
ZV>
0
For 110 picture tubes, neck

dia m eter 28 mm ,
A44- 120 W, 44 cm (17 in)
AS0 - 120 W, 50 cm (20 in)
A6 1-120 W, 61 cm (24 in)
deflection unit
AT1040/ 15
line output transformer
. AT2048/12
For 31 cm (12 in), 1100 picture tube,

neck diameter 20 mm , A31 -120 W
deflection unit
AT 1074
line output transformer
AT2140
ad 1ustable linear ity control

unit AT4042/14
lin e driver transformer
AT4043 /87
:I:
line output transistor

8U205
=i
'

80407
Profess icna 1 applicat ions

For 17 cm (7 in), 70 monito r tube,
neck diameter 28 mm, M17-140 W
For 90 monitor tubes, nee k
diameter 28 mm,
M24 -100 W, 24 c m (9, 5 in)
M:i 1- BO W, 31 cm ( 12 in)
For 38 cm (15 in), 1100 monitor tube,
neck diameter 28 mm, M38- 120 W
>
deflection unit
AT107 1/01
lin e output transformer
AT2102/0 1
I ad justable linearity control

unit AT4036
deflection unit
I ad 1ustable linear ity control
unit AT4042 / 14
AT1040/15
line output tra nsfor mer I !ine driver transformer
AT4043/87
AT2048/ 12

80160

8U205
The data sheets of the pr e ferred types are arranged a ccording to their t ype numbers on the following pages.
0
9
~
.0
"'"
3:
< "" ....,

Ui ..... 0
tr:l
tr:l
::0
>
t-'
'
. - - --
>
c:
NON- PREFERRED TYPES
Abr idged data of the following types are given in the tables whic h can be found after the data shee ts of the preferred types.
zti:I
Deflection units
>
r:-
ti:I
......
"'a-..._,
:::0
AT 1020/ 0 1
AT 1038 / 00
AT 1040
AT1040 / 00
AT 1040 / 03
AT 1040 / 05
AT1072
Line output transformers AT202 3/02

AT2025 / 0 1
AT2036 / 00
AT2036 / 10
AT2036 /3 7
AT2042 / 0 1
AT2072
Linearit y control units
AT4034 / 0lAT4042 / 02
AT4072
E . H . T . sockets
AT7 130
AT71 30/ 01
en
c
:::0
<
ti:I
-<
-4
"TI
(")
<
g::o
...,
~ 0
m :oo
J
~
ll 0z
11
>0
n
z
,.. m
>
~
z Cll
:I:
11111JI
11
0
3:
=4
AT1040/15
3122 137 12160
11
DEFLECTION UNIT
Picture tube, diagonal
neck diameter
43
51
61
28
cm (17 in), 48 cm (19 in) ,

cm (20 in) , 58 cm (23 in) and
cm (2 4 in)
mm
Deflection angle
llOO
Line deflection current , edge to edge at 18 kV
2,3A(p-p}
Inductance of line coils , parallel connected
3,32 mH
Field deflection current , edge to edge at 18 kV
1, 1 A (p-p)
Resistance of fi e ld coils , parallel connected
7, 5 Q
APPLICATION
This deflection unit has been designed for use with a 110 black and white picture tube in
conjunction with :
~line output transformer AT2048/ 12 or AT2130;
- linearity control unit AT4042/02 or AT4042/14;
- line output transistor BU205.
--
DESCRIPTION
The saddle-shaped line deflection coils are moulded so that the deflection centre is well
within the conical part of the picture tube.
The field deflection coUs are wound on a Ferroxcube yoke ring which is flared so that the
frame and line deflection centres coincide.
The unit meets the self- extinguishing and non-dripping requirements of IEC 65..
For centring and pin-cushion distortion see under "Correction facilities".
I"
July 1976
os
--
AT1040/15
3122 137 12160
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (in mm) and terminals
centring magnets
~-+.1:- - .fl
_,r ~r
4
L.....,...,:>,.../;._L:,.-+,.,-l---tl:fr-i _
plastic bonded
Fxd magnet strip
7Z65830.1
29,68
min
~------~~ ------~
--
Fig. 1.
1) For fitting plastic bonded Fxd magnet strips,

catalogue number 3122 137 10160.
2) For fitting plastic bonded Fxd m agnets,
3) For fitting plastic bonded Fxd m agnets,
The unit is provided with soldering pins for connection. The pin numbering in the figure
corresponds to that in the connection diagrams (Figs. 2 and 3).
300 g approximately
MOUNTING
The unit should be mounted as far forward as possible on the neck of the picture tube, so
that it touches the cone.
To orient the raster. correctly , the unit may be rotated by hand on the neck of the picture
tube , with which it makes a slip fit. A screw-tightened clamping ring permits it to be
locked , both axially and radially, in the desired position.
D6
11
October 1974
3122 137 12160
AT1040/15
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
The electrical values apply at an ambient temperature of 25 oc.
'.... ~
Line deflection coils, parallel connected (Fig. 2)

terminals 3 and 4
Inductance
Resistance
3 , 32 mH 5%
6 , 1 Q 10%
Field deflection coils, parallel connected (Fig. 3)

terminals 1 and 6
Inductance
Resistance
17 mH 10%
7 , 5 Q8 ,.S%
Maximum peak voltage between terminals of

line and field coils (50 Hz)
2500 V
Maximum operating temperature
105 oc
Fig. 2 Line coils
-Fig. 3 Field coils
7Z65805
7Z65826
The following characteristics are measured at an e. h. t. of 18 kV on a 61 cm (24 in)

reference picture tube .
Sensitivity
Deflection current edge to edge 1)
in line direction
in field direction
2, 3 Ap-p7%
1, 1 Ap-p+3,5%
1) Minimum us eful screen dimensions: 481 mm x 375 mm .
October 1974
11
_j
AT1040/15
3122 137 12160
DEFLECTIO N UNIT
11
Geometric distortion (measured without correction magnets)
Barrel distortion in the corners
max. 1 mm
Pin cushion distortion
the edges of the ras ter fall within

the two rectangles shown in Fig. 4.
Trapezium distortion
the edges of the raster fall within

- - - 440 - - --
440
340
-s
340
1:-
+
7
7Z6 S1881
+
5
7Z69254
Fig.4
Fig. 5
CORRECTION FACILITIES
For centring
After adjustment of the linearity of the depection current , the eccentricity of the picture
tube and the deflection unit can be corrected by means of two independenqy movable centring magnets of plas tic-bonded ferroxdure. These magnets are magnetised diametrically.
By turning the magnets with respect to each other the resulting field strength is varied.
The direction of the resulting magnetic field is adjusted by turning the magnets simultaneously.
These centring magnets can not be used for compensating the effects of non-linearity or
of phase differences between the synchronisation and time base , as otherwise the correction needed becomes excessive. Even if the correction is within the range of the magnets ,
curved lines may appear in the centre of the raster.
minimum resultant
magnetic field
area of
adjustment
maximum resultant
magnetic field
~>40
F ig.6
-------.
7Z65828.1
3122 137 12160
DEF LE CTIO N UNIT
AT1040/15
For pin-cushion distortion

Pin -cushion distortion can be corrected by plastic bonded ferroxdure m agnet strips, which
have been m ounted on the deflection unit brackets 1). Limited correction of asymmetr ica l
pin - cushion distortion can be ach ieved by unequal rotati on of these m agnets .
Notes
To correct the corners of the raster plastic bonded ferroxdure m agnets can be fitted to
the deflection linit , see Fig. 1.
'
These m agnets can be supplied on request; p lease qu ote the 12-digit catalogue number
(see Fig. 1) for ordering.
--
1) Magnet strips are a ls o available separately under catal ogue number 3 122 137 10160.
October 197.4
09
AT 1071/01
31 22 137 12560
I
DEFLECTION UNIT
for black and white monitors
QU ICK REFERENCE DATA
Monitor tube, diagonal

neck diameter
24 cm (9 in)
28 mm
Deflection angle
90
8, 6 A (p-p)
Inductance of line coils, parallel connected
93 ).lH
Fiel d deflection current, edge to edge at 14 kV
0, 425 A (p-p)
Resistance of field coils, series connected
27 Q
APPLI CATION
This deflection unit has been designed for use with a 90 black and white monitor tube
type M24-100 W in conjunction with:
line output transformer AT2102/0l;
linearity control unit
AT4036 and ;
80160.
DESCRIPTION
The saddle-shaped line deflection coil s are moulded so that the deflection centre is well
The field deflection coils are wound on a Ferroxcube yoke ring which is flared so that the
For centring and pin - cushion distortion see under "Correction facilities" .
July 1976
II___ _
11
Dll
AT 1071/01
3122 137 12560
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
meant tor plastic
bonded FXD magnets
95,4
55,2
max
max
--
--2 9,8 mln
--
50, 5 -
max
,___ _ _ _ 83,2 - - - ---1

max
7Z69165
i:
Fig, 1
The unit is provided with solde ring pins for connection . The pin numbering in Fig.!
corresponds to that in the connection diagram (Figs . 3 and 4).
MOUNTING
The unit should be mounted as far forward as possible on the neck of the picture tube ,
so that it touches the cone. For optimum raster shape, the coil should be mounted as
shown in Fig. 2.
To orientate the raster correctly, the unit may be rotated on the neck of the picture
tube. A clamping ring locks the unit both axially and radially.
9 3 . 9.s (I)
Fig. 2 Front view of picture tube.

connecting
terminals of
deflection unit
7Z69169
Dl2
July 1976
AT 1071/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
3122 137 12560
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
Line deflection coils, parallel connewid (Fig. 3)
terminais 3 and 4
Inductance
Resistance
typ. 93 flH
typ. 0, 15 Q
Field deflection coils, series connected (Fig. 4)

terminals 1 and 5
Inductance
Resistance
typ. 56 mH
typ. 27 Q
Maximum peak voltage between terminals of

'line and field coils (50Hz)
2000 V
95
c
1
),
I
Fig. 3 Line coils

3
7Z65805
Fig.4 Field coils
r
5
7Z69167
The following characteristics are measured at an e. h. t. of 14 kV on a 24 cm ( 9 in)

reference tube, type M24-100 W.
Sensitivity
Deflection current edge to edge
in line direction
in field direction
8, 6 A (p-p)
0 , 425 A (p-p)
Geometric distortion (measured without correction magnets and centring ring)

Pin-cushion, barrel and trapezium
distortion
July .1976
The edges of the raster faH within

=
=
=
AT 1071/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
3122 137 12560
11
1min
-.r
l4xT
I--
..!
1/
+1min
(4x )
12s
L18
1-
-~
163
Fig.S
- - - - --
170 - -- - - --
CORRECTION FACI LITIES
For c;entring
Aftet adjustment of the linearity of the deflection current, the eccentricity of the picture
tube and the deflection unit can be corrected by means of two independentl y movable cen tring magnets of pl astic-bondedFerroxdure. These magnets are magnetize d diametrically.
The direction of the resulting magnetic field is adjusted by turning the magnets simulta neously .
These centring magnets can not be used for compensating the effect s of non -linearity or
of phase differences between the synchron ization and time base, 'as otherwise the correction needed becomes excessive. Even if the correction i s within the range of t he magnets ,
minimum resultant
magnetic field
maximum resultant
magnetic field
Fig.6
For pin- cushion clistortion
This can be corrected by moving magnet s of pl astic-bonde d Ferroxdure (catal ogue number
3122 104 95000) which may be mounted in the r i m at the front of the deflection unit.
01 4
11
July 1976
AT1074
3122 137 15270
11
11
DEFLECTION UNIT

Picture tube, diagonal
neck diameter
31 cm (12 in), 34 cm (14 in)

max. 20,9 mm
Deflection angle
ll0
Line deflection current for full scan, at 10 kV
5, 1 A (p~p) 1)
2'55 j.JI-1
Field deflection current for full scan , at 10 kV
1, 1 A (p-p)
Resistance of field coils, parallel connected
2, 7Q
APPLICATION
This deflection unit has been designed for use with a 31 cm (12 in) or 34 cm (14 in) ll0
black and white picture tube in conjunction with :
- line output transformer AT2140;
- line output transistor BU407.
DESCRIPTION
The saddle shaped line deflection coils are moulded so that the deflection centre is well
The field deflection coils are wound on a Ferroxcube yoke ring which is flared so that the
The unit meets the self-extinguishing and non-dripping requirements -of IEC 65.
For centring and pin -cushion distortion see under "Correction facilities".
1) Measured without S-correction, with d. c. current.
September 1976
--
AT1074
3122 137 15270
DEFLECTIO N UNIT
11
Dimensions in mm
MECHANICAL DATA
90 max
-~-
89
max
40
60,9 max
- - --1
1)
,_26, 6 _
max
1- - - - 66,2 ma x - - - -1
7Z73953
Fig. L
1) For fitting plastic-bonded FXD magnet strips,

2) For fitting plastic-bonded FXD magnets,
The unit is provided with soldering pins for connection. The pin numbering in Fig. 1
corresponds to that in the connection diagrams (Fig. 2).
MOUNTING
The unit should be mounted as far forward as possible on the neck of the picture tube, so
that it touches the cone.
To orient the raster correctly, the unit may be rotated by hand on the neck of the picture
tube , with which it makes a slip fit. A screw-tightened clamping ring permits it t'o be
locked, both axially and radially, in the desired position.
3122 137 152 70
A 1107 4
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
The electrical values apply at an ambient temperature of 25 oc.
Line deflection coils, parallel connected (Fig. 2a)
terminals 3 and 4
Inductance
Resistance
L/R
Field deflection coils, parallel connected (Fig. 2b)
terminals 1 and 6
Inducta nce
Resistance
L/R
255 fJl-1 5%
0, 56 Q
455 J..IH/Q 8%
7,9mH8%
2, 7 Q
2, 87 mH/Q 10%
Maximum d . c. voltage between terminals of

line and field coils
500 V
95 C
:::::::::
7Z73950
Fig. 2a. Line coils
7Z73951
Fig. 2b. Field coils
The follow ing characte ristics are measu.r ed at an e. h. t. of 10 kV on a 31 cm (12 in)

reference picture tube.
Sensitivity
Deflection current
in line direction, for 230 mm scan
for full scan
4, 6 A(p-p)
5, 1 A(~-p)
in field direction, for 175 mm scan

for full scan
1, 0 A(p - p)
1, 1 A(p-p)
September 1976
D17
AT1074
3122 137 15270
DE F LECT ION UNIT
11
Geometric distortion (measured without correction magnets)
+
+Y
p--- -
edge of
phosphor
screen --..
--)
175
-4
Fx: 0 +2
Fy: 0 +4
-2
Gy: 0 +4
-2
-4
Jy : 0 +2
-4
Hy: 0 +2
Gx: 0 +4
-2
-4
Hx : 0 +2
0 +4
Jx :
-2
.J
I' H
1....- - - 230 - --
7Z75045
F ig . J
CORRECTION FACILITIES
For centring
After adjustment of the l inearity of the deflection current, the eccentricity of the picture
tube and the deflection unit can be corrected by means of two independentl y movable centring magnets of plastic-bonded Ferroxdure. These magnets are magnetized diametrically.
T he direction of t he resulting magnet ic fie ld is adjusted by turning t he magnets simulta neously.
T hese centring magnets can not be used for compensating the effects of non - linearity or
of phase differences between the synchronization and time base, as otherwise the correc ti on needec\ becomes excessive. Even if the correction is within the range of the magnets ,
minimum resultant
magnetic f ield
area of
adjustment
maximum resultant
magnetic f ield
7Z75034
Fig. 4
Dl 8
_ II
11
September 1976
AT1074
DEFLECTION UNIT
3122 137 15270
11
For geometric distortion

The unit has provisions for mounting brackets for magnet strips 1) to correct pin-cushion
distortion and for magnets 2) to correct the raster corners, see Fig. 1.
--
1) Plastic-bonded Ferroxdure magnet strips are available on request (catalogue number

3122 137 10160).
2) Plastic-bonded Ferroxdure magnets are available on request (catalogue number
3122 104 94120).
September 1976
l __
019
AT2048/12
3122 138 31650
11
LINE OUTPUT TRANSFORMER

Ieht
35
435
E.H.T.
17,7
16,2
188
212
Supply voltage (VB)

current (IB)
2,20
I p-p deflection
Auxiliary voltages
kV
MQ
4,0 '
Ri(eht)
J-lA
186
250
2' 15
rnA
-300 V p, +60 V p, -60 V p and 7, 7 V r . m . s.
APPLICATION
This transformer has been designed to provide the required scanning amplitude for
43 cm (17 in) to 61 cm (24 in) 110 black a nd white picture tubes with a neck diameter of
28 mm in transistor equipped television receivers presenting 625 lines at 50 frames per
second (CCIR) or 525 lines at 60 frames per second (USA).
It
-
is intended for use in conjunction with:

deflection unit AT 1040/15
adjustable linearity control unit AT4042/02
line output transistor BU205
E. H. T. rectifier device selenium stack .
DESCRIPTION
The magnetic circuit of the transformer comprises two Ferroxcube U- cores, clamped
together with a bracket. The primary wiridings , the auxiliary windings and the E. H. T.
windings are situated on one leg of the core. The E. H. T. windings are encapsulated in
flame retardant polyester .' The whole transformer meets the self-extinguishing and
non-dripping properties of the American Underwriters' Laboratories rating mentioned
in UL94SE-1.
The transformer is provided with four mounting pins. External circuit connection is
m ade to connecting_pins, positioned as indicated in Fig. 1 enabling the unit to be soldered
directly into a printed-wiring board.
/
March 1973
D21
AT2048/12
3122 l38 31650
MECHANICAL OAT A .
Dimensi ons (in mm) and te rminals
-,11,6
max ,--
78,6
max
-'-
7,5
max
6,1
l ,? .....__printed -wiring
board
7Z65835
Fig.1
155 g a ppr oximat el y
!....______.___
022 \
~-11
March 1973
3122 138 31650
AT2048/12
MOUNTING
The transformer may be mounted on a printed-wiring board. The fit of the connecting pins
in a printed-wiring grid with a pitch of 2 , 54 mm (0 , 1 in) is illustrated in Fig. 2. The core
of the transformer must be earthed.
on a printed-wiring board
(solder side)
Grid ho les 1, 3 0 , 1 mm
7 Z65834
Temperature
The operating temperature of the core and the coils sh<w1d not exceed 105 C , under
worst conditions, i.e. taking into account:
- overvoltage on the windings
- low a tmospheric pressure (at high altitudes) impl ying bad cooling by convection
- h igh room temperature (up to 45 C).
To satisfy this requirement it may be desired to provide ample cool a ir circulation
a round the transformer.
Distances
The following minimum distances between the transformer and neighbouring conductive
fl a t s urfaces (in proportion to their sharpness protruding parts must have a greater
distance) must be maintained:
a . From the e. h. t. winding, radiall y 25 mm
axiall y 15 mm
b. From the e. h. t. lead
25 mm
The transformer , and the leads and components carrying high voltage pulses should be
kept free from meta l particles, solder drops etc .
March 1973
11
023
---
AT2048/12
ELECTRICAL DATA
(see circuit diagram)
E.H . T. supply
Power supply
1eht
E.H.T.
pA
35
435
kV
17,7
16 , 2
Ri(eht)
MQ
4,0
VB
2(10
188
186
mA
212
250
VcEM
108(1
1100
IcM
1,4
1,4::;
I p-p
2, 20
2, 15
VB'
Iav
Output trans istor
Deflection
1)
Flyback
ratio
(average)
Overscan
variation
--
3122 138 31650
LINE OUTPUT TRANSFORME R
Aux iliary win dings . connectin g

conn ecting
connecting
connectin g
pin 5
pin 7
pin 9
pins 10, 11
18
%
%
Vp
Vp
Vp
Vr.m. s .
- 300
+60
-60
7,7
10.
1
) Meas ured at pin 1
0 24
September 1974
3 122 138 31650
AT2048/12
Circ uit diagra m
e.h.t . ~AT2048/12
12
'
focus
4 ,7kn
)I
150 nF
--=
40V
audio c1 rcuit +---...._-+--------++414--.::0~

and frame circuit
3300
;'~
~F
-6:J
10
heater~
picture tu~
7Z65U6
Fig.3
March 1973
0 25
-3122 138 31820
AT2102/01
11
l
for black and white monitors

leht
0 , 03
0,23
mA
E.H.T.
14,5
13,2
kV
MQ
Ri(eht)
l p- p deflection
Supply voltage (VB)

c urrent (IB)
12
830
Voltages of auxiliary windings
- 102 V(p) +820 V(p)
12
1100
V
mA
APPLICATION
This transformer has been designed to provide the required scanning amplitude fo r 24 cm
( 9 inch) 90 monitor tubes with a neck diameter of 28 mm in transistor equi ppe d monitor s
presenting 625 lines at 50 frames per second (CCIR) .or 525 lines at 60 frames per second
(USA).
It is intended for use in conjunction with :
- deflection unit AT 1071 /0 1;
- linearity control unit AT4036;
- line output transistor BD160;
- booster (efficiency) diode BYX55, BYX 71;
- e. h . t. rectifier devic e TV 18KT .
See also circuit diagram of Fig. 3.
DESCRIPTION
The magnetic circuit of the transformer comprises Ferroxcube U and l - cores clamped
together with brackets.
The primary windings and the auxiliary windings are s ituat ed on one l eg of the cor e, the
e. h. t. winding and the coupling winding are situated on the other leg. The e . h . t. winding
is encapsulated in flame retardent polyester . The whole transformer meet s the selfextinguishing requirements of IEC publication 65, para. 14.4 and UL492 , para . 280-SE 1.
The tr:an sformer is provided with four mounting pins .
External c1rcuit connection is made to connecting pins, positioned as indicated in F ig. 1
enabling the unit to be soldered directly into a printed- wiring board.
July 1976
11
D?7
---
AT2102/0l
. 3122 138 31820
MECHANICAL DATA
4,3
._ 3,11.-.----~;x
Di mensions in mm
------<~1
65,5
max
6,94
'- 4~,6-'
max
3.9 6 ..___ printed- wiring

board
7Z69111
Fig.!
MOUNTING
For mounting on a printed-wiring board the fit of the connecting and mounting
pins in a printed-wiring grid with a pitch of 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in) is illu strated in Fig. 2.
The transformer core m.u st be earthed.
Fig. 2 Hole pattern for mounting

(solder side).
Grid holes 1, 3 0, 1 mm.
D28
11
Tn lv 197n
3122 138 31820
AT2102/01
Temperature
The operating temperature of the core and the coils should not exceeded 95 C under
worst conditions , i.e. taking into account:
- over-voltage on the windings;
- low atmospheric pressure (at high altitudes) implying bad cooling by convection;
- high room temperature (up to 45 C) .
To satisfy these requirements it may be desirable to provide ample cool air circulation
around the "transformer.
Distances
flat surfaces must be maintained (it should be noticed that edges of conductive parts must
have a greater distance):
-from the e.h.t . winding, radially 20 mm,
axially 12 mm;
- from the e. h . t. cap and lead 20 mm;
- from the primary coil 10 mm;
- between the upper edge of the rectifier sot;ket and the primary coil 10 mm.
The transformer , and the le ads and components carrying high voltage pulses should be
kept free from metal particles , solder drops , etc.
July 1976
029
:::::=
AT2102/01
3122 138 31820
ELECfRICAL DATA
Measured in the circuit shown in Fig. 3 (auxiliary windings unloaded) .
E . H. T . supply
Power supply
Output transistor
Deflection
--
Ieht
mA
0,03
0,23
e . h. t.
kV
14,5
13,2
Ri(eht)
MQ
Vs
12
12
V'
24
23,7
Iaverage
mA
830
llOO
VcEM
180
I p-p
Over scan
variation
Auxiliary windings, connecting pin 6

connecting pin 8
D30
Vp
vP
3
+820
-102
July 1976
3122 138 31820
AT2102/01
Application circuit
AT2102/01
6
+820V,~
-102Vp~
5
3
r
2,7
47
nF
Fig.3
July 1976
D31
AT2140
3119 108 31000
11

with integral e.h.t. rectifier diode

1eht
E . H.T.
25
f.1A
10,2 kV
Ri(eht)
:::5,5 MQ
Supply vo ltage (VB)

current (IB)
10 ,4 V
0, 86 A
I(p-p) deflect ion
4,9 A
Auxiliary voltages 11 , 2 V (a. c.), +350 V(d . c . ), + 100 V(d . c.), + 13 V(d. c.), +25 V(d. c.)
APPLICATION
31 cm (12 in) and 34 cm (14 in) 1100 black and white picture tubes w ith a neck diamet er
of 20 mm in transistor equipped television receivers presenting 625 lines at 50 frames
per second (CCIR) or 525 lines at 60 frames per second (USA).
It is intended for use in conjunction with:
- deflection unit AT 1074;
- line output transistor BU 407.
DESCRIPTION
The magnetic circuit of the transfor mer comprises two Ferroxcube U -cores, clamped
together with a bracket. The primary winding, the auxiliary windings and the e. h. t.
winding are s ituated on one leg of the core. An e. h. t. rectifier diode is incorporated in
the transformer. The e.h.t. winding is encapsulated in flame retardent polyester .
The whole transformer meets the self- extinguis hing and non-dripping properties of t he
American Underwriters' Laborator ies rating mentioned in UL 94SE -1.
The transformer is proviaed with four mounting pins. External circuit connection is
made to connecting pins, positioned as indicated in Fig. 1 enabling the unit to be soldered
directly into a printed -wiring board .
September 1976
~-11
__j
AT2140
3119 108 31000
Dimensions in mm
MECHANICAL DATA
- -- - - - - - - 66 - - - - - - - --+
74 9,36
96
..-o,s
--4,2
'
pr intedwiring board
7Z75 032
Fig. 1
3119 108 31000
AT2140
I
MOUNTING
The transformer maybe mounted on a printed-wiring board. The fit of the connecting pins
in a printed-wiring grid with a pitch of 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in) is illustrated in Fig . 2 . The core
of the transformer must be earthed.
Fig. 2. Hole pattern for mounting

(solder side).
Grid holes 1, 3 0, 1 mm.
7Z750JJ
Temperature
The operating temperature of the core and the coils should not exceed 90 oc, under worst
conditions, i.e. taking into account :
- over-voltage on. the windings;
- high room temperature (up to 45 OC) .
To satisfy these requirements it may be desirable to provide a mple cool a ir circulation

around the transformer.
Distances
flat surfaces must be maintained (in proportion to their s harpness protruding parts must
have a greater distance):
a. From the e. h. t. winding, radially 15 mm

axially 10 mm
b. From the e.h . t. lead
15 mm
The transformer, and the leads and components carrying high -voltage pulses should be
kept free from metal particles, solder drops etc.
--
AT2140
3119 108 31000
ELECTRICAL DATA (see circuit diagram)
E.H.T. supply
Power supply
Output transistor
Deflection
250
fJA
25
E.H . T.
kV
10,2
Ri(eht)
MQ
55,5
VB
10,4
lB
mA
860
VcEM
V (p - p)
160
le M
A (p - p)
3,4
l(p~p)
Ieht
4,9
. Flyback
ratio
(average)
19
Over scan
variation
9,0
10
'
Auxiliary windings, connecting pin 5
o~=<ing
connecting
connecting
connecting
pin
pin
pin
pin
9 )
10 1)
11
12
V
V
V
V
V
(d. c.)
(d.c.)
(d . c . )
(d.c.)
11, 2 (booster voltage)

+350
+100
+ 13
+25
1) After rectification.
11
C',..._ ............. l-. ..... -
10 ...,
3119 108 31000
LINE OUTPUT TRANSFURMER
AT2140
Circuit diagram
~
7
H150JJF
"
_
1 k.n
picturetube
22n~
12
6811F
--
::::::1
11
10.4 V
7Z76022
Fig . 3
September 1976
D37
3122 107 31740
1'
AT 3513
MAINTENANCE TYPE
FRAME-OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
RZ 24284-11
For tube -equ-i pped and transistorised television receivers

APPLICATION
This frame -output transformer is intended for use with 19 a nd 23 inch 110 (114)
picture tubes, in conjunction with the deflection unit AT1040.
---
CONSTRUCTION
The magnetic circuit of the transformer comprises two C -cores. The transformer
has three separate windings; the tertiary winding can be used fo r voltage feedback.
The transformer has been provided with four holes for mounting on either a printedwir ing board or a metal chassis.
External circ uit connection is made to connecting pins, positioned as indicated in
Fig.1.
October 1971
' nnn- - - - - -
.l
AT 3513
3122 107 31 740
FRAME -OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
Dimens ions in mm
5e
.--c-----'-
3e
. _ _.,_r~ -.-.
1 4
.:t - ~
----
-~2e+~+-_6_e-.j
13e
.I
24
=
~
I
I
I
~
(0
I!)
<0
M
1&3.5 (4x)
1-
o! o 11
"----"-
11
11 . , . ,
_!}ju~ ! u u
on
0~
42max
I!)
7Z91194.L"
F ig .1. e = 2 . 52 mm , s ui table for m ounting on a g rid wi th

2 . 54 mm (0. 1") or 2.50 mm pi tch .
_ II
MAINTENANCE TYPE
11
October 1 7
---------------nr---------------------------n---------~-
3 122 107 31740
FRAME-OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
AT 3513
ELECTRICAL DATA
Fig.2
Primary winding
Connecting terminals
Inducta nce
at a primary d . c . current of 55 m A
at a primary d . c . current of 70 m A
Resistance
7 . 5 H 10%
6 H 10%
230 Sl 12%
Secwnd ary winding

Connecting terminals
Res istance
3 and 4
9.7S112%
Tertiary winding
Connecting termina ls
Resistance
5 and 6
165 Sl 12%
N .
1 and 2
Tra nsformat ion ratio Npnm

sec
5.6
Nprim
Ntert
3.9
Maximum primary d. c . current

Maximum primary peak voltage
Maximum amb ient temperature
October 1971
II_
--
75mA
1500 V
70 oc
MAINTENANCE TYPE
0 41
F rame -output s tages
- -
I I I I 11 I
220nF
....
l> -
tl
...,
"""
Ul
AT1040
---- - 1
.,...---,
I
-t I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_ _ _ _ _ _ _j
~----~.; ------~
-t
Fi.g.3
Pe ntode data:
Supply voltage
Anode peak vol tage 1)
Anode voltage at end of scan 1)
Anode peak current
Anode d . c ~ current
Anode standing current
Anode d issipation
Screen -grid dissipation
......
'Il
:::<'
3::
til
:::<'
.l.2W
......
...,
0
-...]
1-j
-...!
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
;..
Cll
......
go
'{)
230
840
85
160
57
12
7.2
Voltage dependent resistors:

VDR .l = VDR 2
1 W disc, 330 V: 2322 553 03541
..-J
..-J
:::<'
......
8
..-J
z
>
z
()
m
3::
til
>
~
"V
'Il
:::<'
;..
1) With respect to c hass is.
......
-...]
n
....
0
""""
0
ti
-...)
g-
....
....
\0
160~Fw+
2.5V
-...)
400~Fcl,+
16V~
l l ~~~+
II
110.0.1
~
0
oa
+12V ,
12i>-\.~
I
I
11
'I]
::>o
>
z.....
I
I
I
I~F
z
>
z
n
.,m
~
BA148
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
trl
6c::
>-l
"0
c::
~ flyback _____ j
;>
$;
T''
1
I
---
5
I
1
6
>-l
>-l
suppression
;IJ
;>
{/)
'I]
::>o
$;
15k.O.
Y lvPrt-fron Y
~~-~;:;;1-,N.a
240.0.
'--~
11
trl
;IJ
l>
-4
tJ
""w
Fig.4
Ut
AT4036
3122 108 39270
ADJUSTABLE LINEARITY CONTROL UNIT

RZ 19806-3
-For transistor -equipped television receivers
APPLICATION
This linearity control unit is designed to be used in televi s ion receiver s , . in combination
with the 11 inch 90 picture tube A28 - 14W and the 12 inch 90 picture tube A-11 -20W .
The unit is intended for use in transistor -equipped sets, in con junction With the deflec tion unit AT1020 /01 and the line-OJltpUt transformer AT2042/0 l.
CONSTRUCfiON
The unit consists of a coil wound on a ferroxcube rod a nd two ferroxdure magnets. One of
these magnets has the shape of a half ring and is placed around the ferroxcube rod under
the coil. The other magne t is cylindr ical ; it is placed parallel to and clampe d agai nst the
ferroxcube rod opposite the first one . This m agnet is providedwithasquarehole to facil itate turning of it to adjust the biasing field a nd so the linearity of the line deflecti on .
October 1971
AT4036
3122 108 39270
ADJUSTABLE LINEARITY
CONTROL UNIT
Dimensions in mm
285max
--2
"~
::
::
1>- adjustable
.l magnet
7Z46784
Fig. 2. Circuit diagram
Fig. 1
ELECTRICAL DATA
When a saw-toothcurrent (without S-correcti{)n) of 6 Ap -p, frequency 15,625 Hz, flyback
ratio 18%, flows through the linearity control unit (one connection point to earth), the correction voltage. is ~djustable between 1. OS V ind 1. 95 V.
D46
11
11
October 1971
AT4036
ADJUSTABLE LIN EA RITY
122 108 39270
CONTROL UNIT
MOUNTING
The unit can be mounted either on printed -wiring boards by means of its two connection
pins and two mounting pins (see F ig. 3), or on conventional panels by bending of the two
mounting pins and/or by means of a screw through an aperture in the casing (see Fig. 4).
To prevent distortion of the m agnet ic field no iron part should approach the magnetic parts
anywhere near er tha n 3 mm. The coil s hould beshuntedwitha1 Wcarbonresistortodamp
ringing phenome na.
I~
'
.......
...
F ig. 3
Hole pattern for
mounting on a printe d-wiring board
(e = 0 .1 inch or 2. 50
mm)
,/
-+--t--+-t-+-ffi--+-+-lf-+-+- 0
5e
-=-
7Z46786
23.7
20.2
I
pig. 4. Hole pattern for mounting on

a.chassis.
10.1
;
M
~~.
-+ . ~ -- -
r+'
I
I
_j- - ~~
I.
-1
~1=
.5~~~~----1~5~m-n----~~~
7Z46767.1
*) Hole only necessary for bottom adjustment.
October 1971
D47
AT4042/14
3112 208 30410
LINEARITY CONTROL UNIT
APPLICATION
This non-adjustable linearity control unit is designed for use in black and white
television sets equippe d with 110 defl ection angl e pictu r e t ube.
It is intended for use in conjunction with :
- deflect ion unit AT 1040/15;
-line output transformer AT2048/ 12 .
DESCRIPTION
The unit consists of a coil wound on a Ferroxcube rod, and a Ferroxdure magnet, which
is placed around the rod next to the coi l.
Dimension;; 1n mn1
- - - -. 24,5 - - ---
= :;j
1--- - - 22
27
7Z75078
Fig . 1
September 1976 .
D49
AT4042/14
LINEARITY CONTROL UNIT
3ll2 208 30410
ELECTRICAL DATA
When a saw-toot h current (wi thou t $- correction) of 2, 2 A(p-p), frequency 15 625 Hz ,
fl yback ratio 18%, flows through the linearity control unit, the correction voltage
is 17 V.
MOUNTING
The unit can be mounte d on printe d- wiring boards by means of its two connection
pins a nd two mounting pins (see Fig. 1) . To prevent di stortion of the magneti c fi e ld
no iron part s hou ld approa.ch the magnetic parts anywhere nearer th a n 3 mm.
050
11
Septe mbe r
1976
3- l-22- 13_8_2-60_ 6_0 _____
rl-----------------------------~~----------~j
AT4043/87
LINE DRIVER TRANSFORMER
APPLICATION
This transformer has been designed for black and white, and colour televi sion sets
equipped with transistors.
In black and white television sets it can be used in the single~trans is tor (BU205) line output circuit in conjunction with the line output transformer AT2048/ 12.
For further information see section "Components for col our televis i on " .
I
--
March 1973
~I I_
0 51
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
11
DEFLECTION UNITS
1- + - - - - a - - -
1-4----- b - - - 1
7Z65799
dimensions (mm)
. type
amax 1)
bmax 1)
Cmin
AT 1020/ 01
83
103
20,9 2)
AT 1038/00
78
125
29,6 8
AT 1040
75,4
108,5
29,6 8
AT 1040/00
72,3
95
29,6 8
AT 1040/03
72,3
95
29,68
AT 1040/05
72,3
95
29,6 8
AT 1072
67
90
20,9 2)
3)
--
1) Protruding parts, e.g. magnet c lamps, included.

2) For picture tubes with a neck d iameter of 20 mm.
3) For picture tubes with a nec k d iameter of 2 8 mm.
....!
NON-PREFERRED
DEFLECTIO N UNITS
TYPES
[_
~~=======.
Type number
AT 1020 / 0l'
AT1038/ 00
Catalogue number
Inductance
line deflection coils
field deflection co ils
Resistance
field deflection coils
1\T C thermistor, without
parallel res is tor
E.H.T.
Sensitivity
in hor izonta l direction
in vertical direction
To be used w ith
picture tu be
lin e - output tra nsformer

adjustable linear it y
control un it
Replaced by
3122 108 55440

81 fJH
42 !.11H
=========
AT1040
3122 137 14600
3122 137 13310

2,9 mH
82 mH
2,09 mH
6 8, 1 mH
0,15 Q
30Q
4,5 Q
38Q
3,55 Q
29 Q
lQ Q
33 Q
18 k-V
18 kV
11 kV
7,2A(p-p)
0, 34 A (p-p)
2,29 A (p-p)
0, 44 A (p-p)
28 cm (11 in), 90o
5 8 cm (2 3 in) , uoo
AT2 042/0l
AT2025 /0 1
AT4036
AT4034 / 01
2,9A(p - p) .
0, 54 A (p-p)
43cm( l 7 in) ,
48 cm (19 in),
51 cm (20 in),
58 cm (23 in),
6 1 cm (2 4 in) ,
AT2036/37
AT4042/02
'
110
110
110
uoo
11'00
DEFLECTION UNITS
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
J
AT 1040/00
AT 1040/03
AT1040/05
AT1072
3122 108 69990
3122 238 50880
3122 137 10690
3122 107 12930
2,1 mH
66 mH
2,1 mH
66 mH
3,9 Q
30Q
3,9 Q
30Q
3,9 Q
4, 7 Q
0,2 Q
16,4 Q
lOQ
30Q
18 kV
18 kV
2, 84 A (p -p)
0,54A .(p-p)
43 cm (17 in) , 1100
61 cm (24 in), 1100
2, 82 A (p-p)
0, 55 A (p-p)
43 cm (17 in), 1100
61 cm (24 in), 110
2,1 mH
10,3 mH
18 kV
2 , 84 A (p -p)
1, 36 A (p -p)
61 cm (24 in), 1100
107f-!H
29,9 mH
12 kV
9, 7 A (p - p)
0, 54 A (p -p)
31 cm (12 in), 1100
AT2036/37
AT2036/37
AT2045/02
AT2072
AT4042/02
AT4042/02
AT4042/02
AT4072
AT 1040/15
August 1976
D55
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
DEFLECTIO N UNITS .
11
TERMINAL LOCATION
rear view .
4
8
AT1020/0 l
7Z65804
1{
A'
1Z6sao7
AT1038/00
A
Sa
4
7Z65800
7Z6580t.
Sa
AT1040/00
D56
4
A
6
Ba
7Z6sao6
August 1976
NON-PREFERRED
DEF LE CTiu N UNITS
TYPES
rear view
fie ld defle ction coils
AT 1040
7Z65805
7Z64940
4
8
Sa
AT 1040/03
21n
7Z6S801
7Z6S804
ea
7Z6S8Z4
11.--~-~------J
NON-PREFERRED
DEFLECTKJ
UNITS
TYPES
rear view
4
8
Sa
AT1040 / 0S
4
A
7Z65804
7Z65187
5
2
AT1072
7Z65827
7l65825
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
LINE OUTPUT TRANSFORMERS
,.----
\...
~
....---
-r
a
7Z6 5798
type
max . dimensions (mm) 1)

.a
AT2023/02
91
88,0
5 1,0
AT2025/0l
66,5
90,2
40,2
AT2036/00
66,5
90,2
40,2
AT2036/10
66,5
90,2
40,2
AT2036/37
66,5
90,2
40,2
AT2042/0 1
59,3
83,0
40,2
AT2072
53,0
83,0
40,0
1) Protruding parts, e. g . brackets, inc luded.
NON-PREFERRED
LINE OUTPUT TRANSFURMERS
TYPES
Type number
Catalogue number
AT2023/02
3122 108 39070
AT2025/0l
3122 108 39100
pin
1eht
E.H .T.
35
pin
fJA
35
17,5 kV
fJA
18 kV
Ri(eht)
<4 MQ
S4,5 MQ
Supply voltage <Vs)

current (Is)
220 V
120 rnA
240 V
lOO rnA
Ip -p deflection
2,44 A (p - p)
Auxiliary windings
-300 V
+300V
+330 V
Scanning
To be used with
picture tube
\
deflection unit
adjustable linearity
control unit
line output device
booster diode
e. h. t. rectifier
2, 44 A (p-p)
l
3
4
625 lines , SO frames

525 lines, 60 frames
625 lines, SO frames

43 cm (17 in), 110

51 cm (20 in), 1100
61 cm (24 in), 110
43 cm (17 in), 110

51 cm (20 in), 110
61 cm (24 in), 110
AT 1038/00
AT4034/01
PLS04
PY88
DY 802
7
11
10
AT 1038/00
AT4034/01
PLS04
PY88
DY 802
4
8
Anrn1ct-
107h
I~E
~~ -PREFERRED
OUTPUT TRANSFORMERS
CtYPES
. =======::::::::;
==============~======+
AT2036/00
3 122 138 30240
pin
.15
fJA
18 kV
iJA
35
$6 MQ
240 V
109 mA
240 V
90 mA
.3 A (p - p)
iJA
35
iJA
10 , 2 kV
11 kV
18 kV
$4,5 MQ
pin
pin
pin
.35
AT2072
3119 108 30600
AT2042/0 1
3122 10i 30370
AT2036/ 10; AT2036/3 7

1)
11 V
950 mA
ll V
520 mA
8, 2 A (p-p)
7,5A(p-p)
3 A (p-p)
+440 V (p-p)
+ 110 V (p - p)
+25 V (p-p)
-110 V (p - p) }
1
+ 110 V (p - p) 2) 3
4
+ 22 C V (p - p)
6251 in es, 50 fra m es
525lines, 60 frames
625lines, 50 frames
625 lines, 50 fr a mes

52 5 lines, 60 frames

525lines, 60 frames
4 :3 cm ( 17 in), ll0
51 c m (20 in) , 11 00 .
6 1 cm (2 4 in) , 110
43 cm (17 in) , 1100

5 1 cm (20 in) , 1100
61 cm (24 in), 110
2 8 cm (11 in), 900
3 1 cm (12 in), 110
AT1040
AT 4042/02
PL504
PY88
OY802
;}
8
7
AT1040
AT4042/02
PL504
PY88
OY 802/TV 18S
:}
12
11
AT 1020 /0 1
AT4036
130160
BY1 18
OY51
:}
3
4
--
:}
AT 1072
AT4072
130160
BYX55
stac k
2
1
14
'-
1) Cata logu e number of AT2036/10: 3122 13 8 30100 .

Catalogu e number of AT2036/37: 310.3 10 8 30 170 .
2) Only va lid for AT2036/37.
August 1976
12
11
10
061
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
LINE OUTPUT TRANSF0 RMERS
TERMINAL LOCATION
11
AT2023/02
10
e.h .t.
c;:s,Jv
+ 220V -0--_._~
4
connecting pins
B
diagram
AT2025/0l, AT2036 / 00 and AT2036/l0
connecting pins
-soov,_,J
H6SI09
diagram
D62
August 1976
NON-PREFERRED
LINE OUTPUT TRANSFURMERS
TYPES
12
AT2036/37
11
9
+ 500Vp-p { 8
J
6
connecting pins
-500Vp-pJ
4
diagram
+220Vp-p
+ 110Vp-p
2
1
-110Vp-p
7Z7501.4 '
AT2042/0l
+20Vp-p 11
+3V~c*
10
'
12
5
12
10
11
connecting pins
diagram
* rectified
during scan
**rectif ied fly back pulse
Apgust 1976
7Z65810 .1
D63
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
LI NE OUT PUT TRANSFOR ME RS
AT2072
13
+25Vp-p
2
3
4
7 Z76102
connecting p ins
064
Essv,_,
~
12
15 vP_ P
7Z7 6101
diagra m
August J 976
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
LINEARITY CONTROL UNITS .
s,
,
if~
11
11
.:l1>-
7Z46966.2
Fig. l a. Dimensions in mm.
Fig . lb.
Ci~;cuit
symbo l.
AT4034/0l (Fig. 1)
Catalo&TUe number 3122 108 39 180 .
To be used with deflection unit AT 1038/00 a nd lin e output transformer AT2025/0l.
When a saw-tooth current (without S-correction) of 2,4 Ap - p frequency 15625 Hz .
flyback ratio 18%, flows through the linearity control unit (one connection point to earth},
the correctio n vo ltage is adjustable betwee n 12 V and 24 V .
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
I
L__::
LI NEARITY CONTROL UNITS
AT4042 / 02 (F ig . 1)
Catalogue numbe r 3 122 10 8 39450 .
To be used w ith de fl ec t ion units AT 1040 a nd AT 1040 / 15 , a nd lin e output tra nsformer s
AT2 0.36 /37 a nd AT2048/ 12.
Whe n a saw -tooth cu rrent (without S-co rr.ection) of 2, 8 A p - p , fr equ e nc y 15625 Hz ,
fl ybac k r a tio 18%, flo ws throu gh th e linear it y contr ol unit (one c onn ect io n point to ear th) ,
the co rrec tion voltage is a dju s table between 15 V a nd 26 V .
AT 4072 (F ig . 2)"
Ca ta log ue number 3 119 108 _.23 120 .
To be used w ith de fl ect ion un it AT 1072 a nd lin e output tra nsformer AT2072 .
Whe n a saw - toot h curr ent (withou t S - c or rection) of 8 A p - p, fre quency 15625 Hz, fl yba ck
r a t io 17, 6%. flo ws through th e linea rity control unit (one conn e c t ion po int to earth), the
corr ection voltage is 3 V .
.
,._ 11 ,5 ____..
ma x
'IZ76099
F ig. 2a . Dime ns ion s in mm.
7Z'76 100
F ig. 2b. C irc uit s ym bol.
NON-PREFER REI
TYPES
11
.E.H.T. SOCKETS FOR TUBE DY802
Dimensions in mm
20 0,3
175
2,1
36 0,2
type
catal ogue
number
AT7 130
AT7 130/01
3 122 107 77950

3 122 107 31240
---1
resistance value of ser ies

res istor in the heater circuit
1,6 Q
1 ,2 Q
::::::
---
.......
IIUQ
I""'~
o,
ti1
N
COLOUR PICTURE TUB E

de fl ection a ngl e
gun a rra nge me nt
s cre en diagonal
~0
s elf-converging
s ys te m
PREFERRED TYPES
A66 - 1-WX
AS6- 140X
A66 - SOOX
or A66-410X
11 0
110
ll0
de lta
de lta
in - line
66 cm (26 in) 56 cm (22 in) 66 cm (2 6 in)
-tZ
A56 - SOOX
ASl - SOOX
110
in -line
56 c m (2 2 in)
110
11 0
in- lin e
in - l in e
51 cm (2 0 in) 4 7 c m (1 8 in)
A47 - SOOX
mm
r-z
m-t
<(J')
(J')-n
-o
o"'
z .
BASIC DEFLECTION PACKAGE

defl ect ion un it
line output t r a ns for mer
diode-split li ne output
tra nsformer
AT 1062 / 01
AT2063/00
AT 1063 / 01
AT2o6:J; oo
ATl080
AT 108.3/0 1
AT 1085
AT20 80/ l 0
or AT2076/ l0
LINE DEFLECTION
dr iver tra ns for m er
centr ing choke
lin ear ity co ntrol
E/W load ing co il

br idge co il
ba la nc in g co il
phase a djus te r
four - po le adjust ing co il
AT404 3/R7
AT 4043 /88
AT 4042 / 08
AT-10-1 3/86
AT40-I0 /85
AT4040 / 87
AT4043/87
AT4042 / l 7
or AT4042 / 38
AT4044 / 20
AT404-I / 26
AT40H / 27
FIELD DEFLECTION
Cla s s - D filte r c hoke
>
c::
"',..,
,....
"'"
0>
AT4043/3 5-
CONVERGENCE
con ve r gence unit (3 x)
AT 1085
AT 4046 / 27
or AT -10-16/ 28
or AT~0 -16/ 32
"'c
;:10
<
-<
c>
~
,_.
"'a-"
h r id gc coil
blu e l<~tc r a l unit
AT40.l :J / l8
ATl068/03
or ATl068/04
mu lt i - pu le unit
conve rge nce adju s te rs
AT 1081
AT4040/ 44 (2x)
AT4040/ 58
AT4040/ 61
AT4040/ 92
AT4040/ 93
NORTH-SOUTH RASTER
transductor
cor r ec tion coils
AT4041 / 40
AT40 40/3 1
AT4040/38
AT4040 /8 7
en
c::
DESIGNED WITH
t7:l
lin e- output dev ice

E . H. T . rec t ifier / multiplie r
BU208A
BG 1895 641
>-<:
BU20 8A
BG1 895 641 (with AT 2080/ 10)
DELAY LIN ES
sys te m : PA L
PAL / SECA M
Brazilian PAL
NTSC
PAL
DLSO
DLS l
DL5 2
DLS:\
DLSS
DL60
()()
oo
r-3:
0""0
The data s heets of these t ypes arc a rra nged accord ing to the i r t ype numbe r s on th e follo wing pages .
~0
....z
mm
r-z
m~
~en
----~--~~~-~~-~~ LIUIII
Vl"T1
tt~O~Q
:OMPONENTS FOR
SURVEY
)LOUR TELEVISION
NON-PREFERRED TYPES
Abridged data of the fo llowing types are given in t abl es which can be found after the
data s heet s of the preferred types.
Blue latera l llllits
AT 1025/05
AT1025/08
AT1066/0 l
Deflection llllits
AT 1027 /07
AT1027 /09
AT1029/07
AT1029/09
AT1060/0l
Transductors
AT40+ 1/ 0il
AT40H/H
AT 4041 / lS
AT4U4 1/3 7
Adju~table
AT4042/02
AT4042/ 12
linea rity control unit
Convergence units
AT4045/07
AT 404.5 / 08 '
AT4046f.07
AT4046/08
AT 40.S0 / 11
AnPll<:t
L97n
3122 137 ll 720
-AT 1062/01
11
DEFLECTION UNIT
with purity ring
RZ 28730-3
RZ 29829- 1
\
~
APPLICATION
This deflection unit has been de s igned for rhe 26 in ll0 ~hadow ma~k colour picture
tubes A66- 140X a nd A66- 4JOX . to opera te in conjunction with 1he fo llo wing units :
Convergence units
or
Line -o utput tr8nsformer
AT4046/ . .
AT4050/ ..
AT206.1 / . . combined with a
Linearity coni ro l unit
AT4042/ ..
13lue latera l unit
AT1068/ . .
Sept ember 1976
trip l e~:
E5
AT 1062/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
.3 122 1.37 11720
with purit y ring
DESCRIPTION (see Fig;. 1)

The unit AT1062/ 0 l co mpris es the de flecti o n unit AT1062 a nd the purit y ~ing' AT106 1
whi c h can eas il y be clippe d to the ba ck o f the ho us ing o f th e ATL'062 , 4) , after this unit
has be en sec ur e d.
The sa dd le- s ha pe d line a nd fi e l d de flect io n co ils as we ll aS the F e rroxcube yo ke rin'g a r e
s up po rt e d by a No r yl ring. Thi s se t is bu ilt in to a No r yl coa xi a l ho usin g pro vi de d with
fou r g uide s lo ts in which the se t c a n be a xi a ll y a dju ste d over" di s ta nce o f 11 , 5 mm , 1 ).
With t he co m ple te unit faste ne d on the neck o f the pi c ture t ube , the co il s ca n s till be
turn e d 4 fo r co rre ct r as ter o ri e nta ti o n a nd di s place d uxia ll y fo r purit y a dju s tme nt.
T wo of t he win g nut a tt ac hme nt s 2) a r e g r oove d a nd s pring-loa de d to preve nt unwa nt e d
turnin g of the co il s during axi a l di s place me nt .
F urther more the ho us ing is pro vided with a tt a chme nts into which co nve rge nc e unit s ca n
eas il y be clippe d . By loos enin g the :;crew in the r im o r t he hous ing , the conve rge nce unit s
ca n be r o ta ted throu gh JSO; .1).
-
T he e ntire de fl ectio n unit mee t s the s e lf-extingu is hing require me nt s of IE C 65 pa r a . 14. 1

a nd UL94 . SE l.
T o co mpe nsa te fo r te mper ature depe nde nce o f the co il s . the de fl e cti o n unit i s equippe d
with a built - in NTC ther mi s to r whi c h ca n be co nne ct e d in se ri es with the fi e ld defl ectio n
co il s . 11) fi e ld ou tput c ir cui t s wit h vo lt age fee dbac k fo r l inea ri z ing the sawtoo rh , the
pic LUre he ig ht the n re ma in s a l mos t co ns wm up to 95 <>c .
E6
Se pte mbe r 1976
3122 137 ll720
AT 1062/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
with purity ring
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
<
o,'>
,..bJJ
35.6
1+-------20~9----------1
91
YZ72?CI05
Fig.l
Mounting
The deflection unit is slid over the neck of the picture tube. It is brought into the correct
position as indicated by marks on the housing of the unit and on the cone of the tube. The
housing of the unit is fixed by means of the clamping bracket (at the rear) and screw
(which must be tightened with a minimum torque of 1. 5 Nm). During this operation the
housing must be pre(>sed against the cone so that the four friction shoes at the front of the
unit rest against the cone of the picture tube. Then the purity ring is clicked to the back
of the housing of the deflection unit. (Now the blue lateral unit can be mounted).
Once the coil unit in the housing of the deflection unit is in its correct position, it is
fixed by means of the four wing nuts.
October 1971
1~
E7
----
AT 1062/01
3122 137 1172 0
DEFLECTION UNIT
with purity ring
ELECTRICAL DATA
(typical values) .
Line deflection coils, series connected (l and 1' interconnected)

Inductance
4, 7 mH
Resistance at 25 C
3, 5 Q
Deflection current at 25 kV, edge to
edge scan in both directions
3', 0 Ap -p
Field deflection coils, series connected (4 and 4 ' interconnected)
Inductance
25 mH
Resistance at 25 C
14,2 Q + NTC (8 Q)
Deflection current at 25 kV, edge -to
1. 2 Ap -p
95
Maximum working temperature
oc
Connections
The connection tags are plugable and solderable .
1'
2'
3'
4'
5'
~taH'-_;;-IDJ2x4n
v- ~
I
I
I
W
l
Fig. 2. Terminal location
.~I
.
,I
I
-0---3
_j
VE 71801L P
Fig. 3. Circuit diagram
H = line coils
V = field coils
E8
11
September 1974
3122 137 11720
AT 1062/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
with puri'ty ring
Purity adjustment
The purity can be adjusted by means of the two independently movable annular magnets
of the purity ring ATJ061 (catalogue number 3122 l07 50200), see Fig. 5 . These magnets
are diametrically magnetised. The units are supplied with the magnet fields opposing
each other, .giving minimum resultant field; the notches of the magnets then coincide. By
turning the magnets with respect to each other the magnetic force of the resultant field of
both magnets is adjusted. The direction of, the resultant magnetic field is adjusted by
turning the magnets simultaneously. The area of purity adjustment which can be obtained
on the screen of the picture tube is given in Fig. 4 (dimensions in mm).
cj
---
en
Fig.4
111 .7
vs 728 016
Fig. 5. Dimensions in mm of
the purity ring AT1061
September 1974
E9
AT1063/0l
3122 137 12580
11
DEFLECTION UNIT
with purity ring
APPLICATION
Thi s deflection unit has been designed for the 22in ll0 shadow mask colour picture
tubes A56-140X and AS6-410X, to operate in conjunction with the following units:
Convergence units
AT4046/ ..
or AT4050/ ..
Line output transformer
AT2063/ . . combined with a tripler
Linearity contro l unit
AT4042/ ..
Blue lateral unit
ATl068/ ..
DESCRIPTION (see Fig. 1)
The unit AT1063/0l comprises the deflection unit AT1063 and the purity ring AT1061
which can easily be clipped to the back of the housing of the AT1063 4 ) after this unit
has been secured.
The saddle- shaped line and field deflection coils as well as the Ferroxcubeyoke ring are
supported by a Noryl ring. This set is built into a Noryl coaxial housing provided with
four guide s lots in which the set can be axially adjusted over a distance of ll , S mm 1).
With the complete unit fastened on the neck of the picture tube , the coils can sti ll be
. turned 4 for correct raster orientation and displaced axially for purity adjustment.
Two of the win g nut attachments 2) are grooved and spring-loaded to prevent unwanted
turning of the coils during axial displacement.
Furthermore the housing is provided with attachments into which convergence units can
easily be clipped. By loosening the screw in the rim of the housing, the convergenc e
units can be rotated through 150 3) .
The entire deflection unit meets the self- extinguishing requirements of IEC65 para. 14. 1
and UL94, SE 1.
To compensate for temperature dependence of the coils , the deflection unit is equipped
with a built-in NTC thermistor which can be connected in series with the field def!ection coils. In field output circuits with voltage feedback for lineari zing the sawtooth,
the picture height then remains almost constant up to 95 C.
September 1976
11
R ll
AT1063/0l
3122 137 12580
DEFLECTION UNIT
with purity ring
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
l 67_j '
---65
'
;____.._ 1---1
1+--- - - - - - 203.9--------..1
"m"'
Fig.1
Mounting
The deflection unit is slid over the neck of the picture tube. It i s brought into the correct
position as indicated by marks on the housing of the unit and on the cone of the tube. The
housing of the unit is fixed by means of the clamping bracket (at the rear) and screw
(which must be tightened with a minimum torque of 1, 5 Nm) . During this operation the
housing must be pressed against the cone so that the four friction shoes at the front of the
unit rest against the cone of the picture tube . Then the purity ring is clicked to the back
. of the housing of the deflection unit. (Now the blue lateral unit can be mounted) .
Once the coil unit in the housing of the deflection unit is in its correct position, it is fixed
by means of the four wing nuts.
E12
February 197 3
3122 137 12580
AT1063/91
DEFLECTION UNIT
with purity ring
EL!:CTRICAL DATA
(typical values)
Line deflection coils , series connected (1 a nd 1' interconn ected )

Inductance
4, 7 mH
Resistance at 25 oc
3, 5 Q
Deflection current at 25 kV, edge to
edge scan ~n both directions
3, 0 A p-p
Field deflection coils, series connected (4 a nd 4 ' interconnected)
Inductance
25 mH
Resistance at 25 C
14, 2 Q + NTC (8 Q)
Deflection current at 25 kV , edge to
1,2A p -p
Connections
The connection tags are plugabl e and sol derable.
1'
2'
3'
4'
5'
.~llJH
--t-'trux4n
v- ~
I
:::l
l:
Il
I
I
- - --0 ___ _
Fig. 2 Terminal location
I
_j
VE 7180\G P
Fig. 3 Cir cuit diagram

H = line coils
V = field cons
Sept em ber 197 4
E13
AT1063/01
3122 137 12580 .
DE F L ECTION UNIT
with purity ring
Purity adjustment
The purity can be adjusted by means of the two independently movable annular magnets of
the purity r ing AT1061 (catalogue number 3122 107 50200), see Fig. 5. These magnets
are diametrically magnetised . The units are supplied with the magnet fields opposing
each other, giving minimum resultant field; the notches of the magnets then coincide . By
turning the magnets with respect to each other the magnetic force of the resultant field of.
both magnets is adjusted. The direction of the resultant magnetic fie ld i s ad justed by
turning the magnets 'simultaneousl y . The area of purity ad jus t ment which can be obtained
on the screen of the pi cture tube i s given in Fig. 4 (dimensions in mm).
-111 .7
vs 728
F ig.4
E14
_I
016
Fig. 5 Dimensions in mm of
the purity ring AT1061.
September 1974
AT1068/03
3122 137 11700
11
BLUE LATERAL UNIT
APPLICATION
This unit is intended for use with a ll0 shadow mask colour picture tube in conjunction
with:
a deflection unit AT1060/ ..
or AT1062/ ..
or AT1063/ ..
and convergence unit s AT4046/ ..
or AT4050/ ..
for static and dynamic blue lateral adjustment.
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
.--
Fig. 1
The unit is self- clamping around a tube with a diameter of 36,5 1, 6 mm.
~') This dimensiop. is minimum and will be larger when the unit is in position.
February 1973
15
AT1068/03
BLUE LATERAL UNIT
3122 137 11700
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
Coils for static adjustment

terminals
support terminal fo r NTC thermistor
resistance
inductance
1 and 5
4
19 , 3 Q
23,4 mH
Coils for dynamic adjustment

terminal s
resistance
inductance
2 and 3
2, 15 Q
300 flH
95 C
Static lateral adjustment

Static l ateral adjustment in the centre of a 110 picture tube A66-140X or A56-140X can
be obtained with a d. c. current of 90 mA . This gives a minimum adjustment range of
5 mm.
Dynamic lateral adjustment
A horizontal shift in the points Band C (see F i g. 2) between red/green and blue of
~ 3, 5 mm can be obtained with a saw-tooth current of 840 mA p-p, frequency 15kHz ,
through the coils (terminal s 2 and 3).
'
edge of
phosphor
screen
7Z987t.6
Fig.2
E16
February 1973
AT1068/04
3122 137 11710
BLUE LATERAL UNIT
APPLICATION
This unit is intended for use with a 110 shadow mask colour picture tube in conjunction
with:
a deflection unit AT 1060/ ..

or AT1062/ ..
or AT1063/ . .
and convergence unit s AT4046/ ..
or AT4050/ ..
for static and dynamic blue lateral adjustment.
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
Ii I
\
I 1 I
II
56,7
---
I
--.. e.s .......______ .
Js.~......._____,_;
Fig.1
+,~_{Q' :.i0JJ?J-
The unit is self-clamping around a tube with a diameter of 36, 5 1, 6 mm.

'-' ) This dimension is minimum and will be larger when the unit is in position.
February 1973
11
E17
AT1068/04
BLUE LATERAL UNIT
3122 137 11710
ELECTRICAL DATA
Coils for static adjustment
terminals
support terminal for NTC thermistor
resistance
inductance
1 and 5
4
198, 5 Q
215 rnH
Coils for dynamic adjustment

terminals
resistance
inductance
2 and 3
2, .15 Q
300 flH
95
Static lateral adjustment

Static lateral adjustment in the centre of a 110 picture tube A66-140X or A56-140X can
be obtained with a d. c. current of 27 , 5 rnA. This gives a minimum adjustment range of
6, 5 mm.
Dynamic lateral adjustment
A horizontal shift in the points Band C (see Fig. 2) between red/green and blue of
2:3, 5 mm can be obtained with a saw-tooth current of 840 mA p -p, frequency 15 kHz,
through the coils (terminals 2 and 3).
--
edge of
phosphor
screen
7Z987to.6
Fig. 2
E18
February 197 3
AT1080
3122 137 14000
11
DEFLECTION UNIT
with built-in 4- pole coils for symmetrizing
of the line and field astigmatism
Picture tube, gun arrangement

diagonal
neck diameter
in line
66 cm (26 in)
36,5 mm
Deflection angle
1100
6, 35 A p - p
Inductance of line coils , pa rallel connected
1, 11 rnH
3,4Ap-p
Resistance of field coils , series connected
3,0 Q
4-pole coils, sensitivity

for line
for field
resistance (series connected)
max . 34 mm/A
max. 23 mm/A
1, 6 Q
APPLICATION
This deflection unit has been designed for use with a llOO colour picture tube type
A66-500X in CTV receivers in conjunction with:
diode-split line output transformer AT2076/10 and
BU208A
linearity control unit
multipole unit
September 1976
11 .
AT4042/17 or AT4042/38
AT1081
11
El9
--
AT1 080
3122 137 14000
DEFLECTION UNIT
r
DESCRIPTION (see F ig: 1)
The saddle - shaped line and field deflection coils, and the Ferroxcube yoke ring with
4-pole unit , are supported by a plastic cap. This set is built into a plastic coaxial housing,
which is provided with a plastic axial alignment ring. This ring e nables the set to be
axiall y adjusted over a distance of 6 mm, after the complete unit has been fastened on the
neck of the picture tube with a cl ampi ng ring. The screw of the clamping ring is a ccessible with a screwdriver via a recess in the axia l alignment ring. To co;rrect the raster
orientation with the compl ete u'nit in position on rhe picture tube neck, the coil as~embl y
can be rotated by means of the protntding parts on the supporting ring, which can be
reached by the top and bottom recesses in the coaxial housing. The whole coil assembly
is locked in the required position by pushing the levers down until they block.
The unit meets the self - extingu ishing requirements of IEC65 para. 14.4 and UL94, SE 1
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions In mm
Outlines
ring for
axial alignment
radial
positioning
recess for
abutment
screwdriver
blocks
137,7
~101,8-1
1- - - - - - - - - 208 ,3 - - - - - - -- - 1
104,5
7Zet0Ul
1- - - - - - - - - - 250 - - - - - - - - --.1
Fig.l
The unit is provided with soldering pins for connection.
R.20
September 1976
- AT1080
DEFLECTION UN1T
3122 137 14000
11
MOUNTING
To obtain easy reproducible and accurate alignment of the picture tube and the deflection
unit , the cone of the picture tube has a moulded indexing ridge to centre the deflection
unit housing.
The deflection unit is brought into correct position by a lignment of the protrusion on the
housing with the location mark on the cone of the tube.
The unit must be pressed against the cone , so that the housing is indexed by the moulded
ridge on the cone. The unit is then fixed by tightening the screw in the clamping ring at
the rear. The screw should be tightened with a torque of 1, 2 to 1, 4 Nm.
ELECTRICAL DATA
Line coils, parallel connected
inductance
resistance at 25 oc
1,11 mH 4%
6,35Ap-p
Field coils, series connected

inductance
resistance at 25 C
3,5 mH 10%
3,0 Q 7%
3, 35 A p-p

for line
for field
max. 34 mm/A
max. 23 mm/A
95 C
1,2 Ql0%
1, 6 Q
4
1,5k0
*)
r1
7
*)
10
4-pole coils
Fig. 2. Connection diagram.

L =Line
F =Field
Fig . 3. Termina l location.

Tl;le pin numbering corresponds
to that in Fig. 2.
*)
~12
11
7ZU011.2
AT1080
DEFLECTION UNIT
3122 137 14000
BEAM CORRECTIONS
With the defl ect ion unit AT1080 and the multipole unit AT10 81 m ounted on th e tube
A66-500X , the follow ing corrections may be required:
~l ax imum
required hori zonta l displacement of the electron beams with

respect to the phosphor stripes by the purifyin g magnet of the AT 1081 1)
45 flm
Static convergence deviations must be corrected by the adjustable four pole and s ix-po le f!e lds of th e ATI0 8 l cen tred around th e tube ax is.
Maximum required compensation for static convergenc e
4-pole device : red opposite to blue (in any direction)
6-pole device: red a nd blue to green (in an y direction)
6 mm
3 mm
North-South raster shape correction circuitry is not required.

To obta in a symmetrical sha pe for the hor izontal lines at the upper
and lower parts of the screen , the unit ATl08l comprises a n additional two-pole cor rection magnet g iving a displacement of t~e bea m
in the centre of the screen in vertic al dir ec ti on of maximum
5 mm
Maximum centring error in any direction after colour -purity , sta tic
convergence , and horizontal centre lin e correction
5 mm
With respect to dynamic convergence , the display system, consisting of picture tubeA66-500X
a nd deflection and AT 1080 , is inherently self converging . However, a small systemat ic
correction is r~quired on the vertical axis, a nd a lso small corrections shou ld be ma de to
compensate for tolerances and asy mmetries in the tube a nd deflection unit ~;ornb inat:on.
For this purpose two types of dynamic magnetic four-pole fie ld s can be used, see F ig . .:1.
One is generated by add iti ona l windings on the yoke r in g of the deflection unit energized
by adjustable sawtooth currents s ynchron ized w ith sca nnin g.
The other type is generated by sawtooth and parabolic currents which are sync hr on ized
with scanning and fl ow thr ough the defl ection coils.
Co mpens at ion to be pr ovided by these corrections:
- hori zonta l red- to - blue distance at the end of the
horizonta l axis (lin e sy mmetry)
- horizonta l red-to-blue distance at the top of the
vertical ax is (field sy mm etry top)
- hor iz onta l red-to-blue di sta nc e at th e bottom of
the vertical ax is (fi e] r! symmetry bottom)
- ve rtic a l red-to-blue distance a t the end s of the
horizontal ax is in oppos ite directions (line balance)
- vertical red-to-blue dista,1ce at the end s of the
hori zonta I ax is in equ a l directions (line ba lance pnrabola)
- vertic al red-to-blue dis tanc e at the top of the
vertic a l axis (fi eld ba la nce top)
= vcr tic a l .red-to-blue distanc e a t the bottom of the
vertic a l ax is (field balance botto m)
No tes see n ext page.
R??
11
_ _ II
0 2 mm
3,5 1, 5 mm
3,5
+ 1,5
mm
01,5mm
0 0, 7 mm
Ol,Smm
0
l, 5 mm
3122 137 14000
AT1080
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
Notes
1) Purity adjustment in vertical direction is not required.
2) This correction is made by feed ing a sawtooth ci.Irre~t of line frequency through the
additional four-pole windings on the d.eflection unit.
3) This correction is made by feeding a rectified sawtooth current of field frequency
through the additi ona l four-pole windings on the deflection unit.
4) This correction is .made by unbalancing the line deflection coils .
5) This correction is made by feeding a parobolic current of line frequency through the
line deflection coils.
6) This correction is made by unbalancing the field deflection coils during the first half
of the field scan.
7) This correction is m ade by unbalancin g the field deflection coils during the second
half of the field scan.
Application information available on request.
--
AT1081
3 122 137 56060
MULTI-POLE UNIT
~----------------------------- ---
----------
QU ICK REFE RENCE DATA
Horizontal beam displacement

for colour purity (2- pole)
for undeflected beams

min.
45
f1111
Static convergence
red opposite to blue in any direction (4-pole)
red-blue with respect to green in
any direction (6- pole)
min.
mm
min.
mm
Vertical displacement for optimum

straightness of the horizontal lines (2- pole)
min.
mm
APPLICATIO N
This unit has been designed for the co lour picture tubes A66 - 500X, A56 - 500X, A51 - 500X
and A47 - 500X, with in-line gun arrangement and the deflection units AT 1080, AT 1083/01
and AT 1085. Its purpose is threefold:
- horizontal colour-purity adjustment
- static convergence adjustment
-adjustment of raster symmetry in N and S or adjustment of the horizontal axis for
op~imum straightness .
DESCRIPTION
The unit incorporates four ring-shaped permanent magnets , supported by non-magn etic
plastic support rings, and a cam-actuated collet , which enables the unit to be cla mped
to the neck of the picture tube.
The magnetic rings are made up of an inner and an outer ring coupled by non - magnetic
pinion gears to form an epicyclic train. The support rings carry the pin i on gears.
The magnetic rings comprise:
- two pairs of 2-pole magnets
- one pair of 4-pole magnets
-one pair of 6-pole magnets
(each pair consisting of an inner a nd outer ring of identical magnetic configuration).
' The support rings of both the 2-pole rings are fixed to the collet, those of the 4- and 6pole r ings are rotatab le. Rotating the lug on an outer magnetic ring varies the resultant
field strength,
Rotating the lug on a support ring varies the direction of the resultant field.
MECHAN ICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
See Fig.l on next pnge .
~ pte mber
1976
l ______.~-~-11 _
E25
--
IIIITfl
,,,_ _
)>
..,
o-
-t
.....
0
00
.....
til
purity
,............__
range 4- pole support
roster
symmetry
45 _ _ _ _ ,~ 45
poles 6 6 2 2 4 4
22
range 6-pole support
6- pole magnet
r ing + support
30 _ _
1_
30
~
~
~\~ )/
4-pole magnet
ring+ support
l..l!!!l!l::ll-
g
.,
I
0
t-'
til
::j
2- pole magnet ring

roster symmetry
2- pole magnet ring

purity
{/)
~ro
g.
ro
1-i
.....
"'o--I
F ig . l
93,3max
7Z69049 .1
"".....
""""
.....
""
--I
CJl
0'-
0'-
3122 137 56060
AT1081
MULTI-POLE UNIT
11
Mounting
Before m o unting the multi - pole unit , the lug on the rear e nd of t he coll e t must be r otated
ant i-cl oc kwis e . The unit is slid over the ne ck of the picture tube a nd pre ssed to th e defl ection unit.
Two protrusions on the front of the unit and the corresponding recesses on the back of
the deflection unit , will bring the unit into correct position. By rotating the lug on the
collet clockwise the unit will be clamped.
AOJUSTMENTS
Horizontal colour purity is ohta ined by var ying the fie ld strength of th e 2 - pole m agnet
s itm tcd between the 4-pole a nd 6 -p olc m agm:ts (see Figs land 2) .
Vertica l c o lou1 purity adjustment is not requir e d (s ee data on colour picture tubes).
The static convergence is adjusted by varying the field strength and direction of
the 4-pole and 6 - pole. The 4-pole field moves the outer electron beams (red and
blue) equally in opposite directions (see Fig.3) . The 6 -po le field m oves the outer e lec tron
heams equally in the sa me directi on (see F ig. 4). The centre beam (green) is unaffec ted.
!-kri:":D:o ta l axis or raster symmetry is adjusted by vary ing th e fi e ld Htrength of th e 2pole magnet situated at the rear of the unit (see Fig. 1)'. All thr ee bea m s are equa ll y mo ved in a vertic a l direc tion (see F ig . 5).
---
Fig . 2
eptember 1976
11
E27
----'
AT1081
3122 137 56060
MULTI -POLE UNIT
11
F ig.3
+---- +--
I
I
I
I
I
+---1
I
- - red
- - - blue
-...
...,
ns9047.z
""'
Fig.4
b
I
I
I
I
4--
- - g reen
- - - red- blue
ns""'-'
E28
Se tember 1976
3122 137 56060
AT1081
MU LTI -POLE Ul\lJ.T
Fig. 5
--
)epte mber 19!4
11
E29
AT1083/0,1
3122 137 15760
DEFLECTION UNIT
with built -i n 4-pole coils for symm etriz lng
of rhe lin e and field as tigmat ism

Pi..:tu re tube , gun a n:ange ment
diagu1w l
neck dia m eter
in line
:"5 cm (:!2 in)
.16,5 mm
Deflection angle
1 [ QO
LinP defl ection current. edge to edge Ht 25 kV
6, 2 A p-p
lndur.tance of line coils , parallel connected
1, 14mH
Fie ld deflection current, edge to edge at 25 kV
3 . 4Ap - p
R es ista nce of field coils , ser ies connected
3,:!6
4pole coils, sem;itivity

for line
for field
max. 25 mm / A
ffiQ X .
18 mm /A
1, ..1 Q
APPLICATION
T hi s deflect ion unit has been designed for use with a ll0 colour picture tube type
AS6 .. 500X in CTV receivers in conjunction with:
ctiode - sp lit line output transformer
1in e output transistor
AT2076 /l0 and

BU20RA
lin ea rity control unit

multipoie ynit
AT4042 / 17 or AT4042j:l8
AT1081
ptember 1976
E-31
AT1083/01
3122 137 15 760
DEFLECTION UNIT

The saddle - shaped -line and field de flection coils, a nd the Ferroxcube yoke ring with
4- pole unit , are supp orted by a plastic cap. This set is built into a plastic coaxial
housing, which is provided with a plastic axia l a lignm ent ring. This ring enables the set
to he axia lly ad justed over a dis tance of 5 mm, after the complete unit has been fastened
on the neck of the picture tube with a clamping ring. The screw of the cla mping dng is
access ible with a screwdriver via a recess in the axia l alignme nt ring. To cor rect the
raster orientat ion with the comrlr:>te unit in poRitlou on the ricture tu be neck, the coil
assembly can be ro tated by mea ns of the protruding parts on the support in g ring, which
can be reached hy the top and bottom recesses i.n the coaxiAl housing. The who le co il
a~semb l y is lo cked in the requ ired pos ition by pushing the levers down until they block.
The unit me ets the self-extinguishing requirements of IEC 65 para. 14 . 4 and UL94, SE 1.
Dimensions ln mm
MECHANICAL DATA
Outlines
ring for
axial alignment
radia l
positioning
recess for
abutment
blocks
screwdriver
137,7
--59,7-
--123,7
208 ,3- - - - - - - -,. __ __ _ _ _ _ __
~ 101 ,8-
---~ 1
1----- '104,5--~~ 1
250-- - - - - - - --.1
F ig. 1
The unit is provided with s oldering pins fo r co nn ection.
E32
September 1976
3122 137 15760
AT1083/0l
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
MOUNTING
To obtain easy reproducible and accurate alignment of the picture tube and the deflection
unit , the cone of the picture tube has a moul ded indexing ridge to centre the deflection
unit housing.
The deflection unit is brought into correct position by alignment of the protru s ion on the
housing with the location mark on the cone of the tube.
The unit must be .pressed against the cone, so that the housing is indexed by the moulded
ridge on the cone. The unit. is then fixed by tightening the screw in the clampu'tg ring at
the rear. The screw should be tightened with a torque of 1, 2 to 1, 4 Nm.
ELECTRICAL DATA
Line coils, parallel connected
inductance .
resistance at 25 oc
1,14 mH 4%
0, 9 Q 10%
6, 24 A p-p
Field co.ils, series connected

inductance
resistance at 25 C
3, 9 mH 10%
3, 36 Q 7%
Field deflection current, edge to edge at 25 kV
3, 4 A p-p

for line
for field
max . 25 mm/A
max. 18 mm/A
1,4 Q
95 C
4
1,5 k0
*)
rl
7
10
*) 4 - pole coi ls
*)
~12
11
7ZIU011.2
Fig. 2. Connection diagram.

L =Line
F =Field
Fig. 3 . Terminal location.

The pin numbering corresponds
to that in Fig.2.
eptember 1976
11
E33
---
Al1083/01
3122 137 15760
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
BEAM CORRECTIONS
With the deflection unit AT1083/01 and the multipole unit AT 1081 mounted on the tube
A56-500X, the following corrections may be required:
Maximum required horizontal displacement of the electron beams with
respect to the phosphor stripes by the purifying magnet of the AT10811)
45J.!m
Static convergence deviations must be corrected by the adjustable fourpole and six-pore fieids of the AT1081 centred around the tube axis.
Maximum required compensation for static convergence
4-pole device: red opposite to blue (in any direction)
6~pole device: red and blue to green (in any direction)
5,5 mm
2, 8 rrim
--
'J'o obtain a symmetrical shape for the horizontal lines at the upper pan
and the lower part of the screen, the unit AT108l comprises an additional two-pole correction magnet giving a displacement of the beam
in the centre of the s creen in vertical direction of maximum
4,5 mm
Maximum centring error in any direction after colour-purity, static

convergence, and horizontal centre line correction
4,5 mm
With respect tq dynamic convergence, the display system, consisting of picture tube
A56-500X and deflection unit, AT1083/0l is inherently self converging. However, small
corrections should be made to compensate for tolerances and asymmetries in the tube
and deflection unit combination .
For this purpose two types of dynamic magnetic four-pole fields can be used.
One is generated by additional windings on the yoke ring of the deflection unit energized
by adjustable sawtooth currents synchronized with scanning.
The other type is generated by sawtooth and parabolic currents which are synchronized
with scanning and flow through the d~flection coils.
Compensation to be provided by these corrections:
- horizontal red-to- blue distance at the end of the
horizontal axis (line symmetry)
- horizontal re<;l.- to-blue distance at the ends of the
vertical axis (field symmetry)
- vertical red-to- blue distance at the ends of the
horizontal axis in opposite directions (line balance)
- vertical red-to- blue distance at the ends of the
horizontal axis in equal directions (l'ine balance parabola)
- vertfcal red-to- blue distance at the top ~f the
vertical axis (field balance top)
- vertical red-to-blue distance at the bottom of the
vertical axis (field balance bottom)
0 1, 5 mm
l , 5 mm
0 1, 0 mm
0 0, 6 mm
0 1, 2 mm
0 l, 2 mm
Notes see next page.
E34
11
11
September 197 6
3122 137 15760
AT1083/0l
DEFLECTION UNIT
Notes
2
) This correction is made by feeding a sawtooth current of line freque ncy through the
additional four-po l e windings on the deflection unit.
3) This correction is made by feeding a rectified sawtooth current of field freq.J ency
through the additionai four-pole windings on the deflection unit.
4) This correction is made by unbalancing the line deflection coils.

5) This correction is made by feeding a parabolic current of line frequency through the
hne deflection coils.
6) This correction is made by unbalancing the field deflection coils during the first half
. of the field scan.
7 ) This correction is made by unbalancing the field deflection coils during the second
Application information available on request.
11
AT1085
3122 137 15660
11
DEFLECTION UNIT
with built-in 4 -pole coils for symmetrizing
of the line and fi e ld ~stigmlltism

Picture tube, gun arrangement
diagonal
neck diameter
in line
51 cm (20 in) or 47 cm (18 in)
36,5 mm
Deflection angle
110
Lin e de flection current, edge to edge at 25 kV
6, 2 A p-p
1, 14 mH
3,4 A p-p
Res i:<tance of field coils, series connected
3,36 Q
4-pole coils, sensitivit y

for line
for field
A51 - SOOX A47-500X

max. 23 mm/A 21 mm /A
max. 16 mm/A 15 mm/A
1,4 Q
APPLICATION
This deflec tion unit has been designed for use with 110 c olour picture tubes.
A5 1-SOOX and A47 -SOOX in CTV receivers in conjunction with :
~ptember
diode-split line output" tran:;former

AT2076/10 and
BU208A
linear it y control unit

multipole un it
AT4042 / 17 or AT4042/38
AT1081
1976
11
AT1085
3122 1.17 l5660
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
The saddle-shaped line and field deflection coils, and the Ferroxcube yoke ring with
4-pole unit, are supported by a plastic cap. This set is bu ilt into a plastic coaxial
housing , which is provided with a plastic axial alignment ring. This ring enables the set
to be axially adjusted over a distance of 5 mm ; after the complete unit has been fastened
on the neck of the .picture tube with a clamping ring. The screw of the clamping ring is
access ible with a strev;driver v ia a rece ss in the axial alignment ring. To correct the
raster orientation w ith the co~let e un it in pos iti.on on the picture tube neck, the coil
assembly can be rotated by .means of the protruding parts on the supporting ring, which
can be 1:eached by the top and bottom rec esses in the coaxial housing. The whole coil
assembly is locked in the required position by pushing the levers down until they block.
The umt meets the self-extinguishing requirements of IEC65 para. 14.4 and UL94, SE 1.
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
Outlines
ring fo11
axi9l alignment
radial
positioning
recess for
screwdriver
abutment
blocks
137,7
~,.,. ==I
1- - - - - - - - - - 2 0 8 , 3 -- - - - - - -- 1
1+-- - - - -104,5
~--~------~-------250------------------.1
Fig. 1
The unit is provided w ith soldering pins for connection .
E38
11
11
September 1976
3122 137 15660
AT1085
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
MOUNTING
To obtain easy reproducible and accurate alignment of ~he picture tube and the deflection
unit, the cone of the picture tube has a moulded indexing ridge to centre the deflection
unit housing;
The deflection unit is brought into correct position by aiignment of the protrusion on the
housing with the location mark on the cone, of the tube.
Th e unit must be pressed against the cone , so that the housing is indexed by the moulded
ridge on the cone. The unit is then fixed by tightening the screw in the clamping ring at
the rear. The screw should be tightened with a torque of 1, 2 to 1, 4 Nm .
ELECTRICAL DATA
Line coils , parallel connected
inductance
r esistance at 2 5 oc
Line deflection
curre~t,
1,14 mH 4%
0, 9 Q 10%
edge to edge at 25 kV
6,2Ap-p
Field coils, series connected

inductance
resistance at 25 r.
3 , 9 mH 10%
.3 ,36 Q 7%
3, 4 A p-p
A51-500X A4i- 500X
4-pole coils , sensitivity

for line
for field
max. 23 mm/A 2 1 mm/A
max . 16 mm/A 15 mm/A

1,4 Q
95 C
4
5
1,5 k0
*)
rl
7
1D
*) 4 - pole coils
*)
,,
12
7211011,2
Fig.2. Connection diagram ,

L =Line
F =Field
Fig. 3. T erminal location.

The pin numbering corresponds
to that in Fig. 2 .
September 1976
11
---
AJ1085
3122 137 15660
DEFLECTION UNIT
BEAM CORRECTIONS
With the deflection unit AT1085 and the multipole unit AT 1081 mounted on the tube
A5 1-500X or A47 - 500X the fo llowing corrections m ay be requj.red:
A5 1- 500X
A47 -500X
Maximu m requixed horizontai di.sp.lacement of the electron
beams with respect to the phosphor str ipes by the pur ify ing
magnet of the AT 108 1 1)
45 [lm
45 [lm
Stat ic convergence deviation,; mu t-:t be corrected .by the
adj ustable four -pole .and six-po le fie lds of the AT 1081 .
centred around the tube axis .
Maximum required compensat ion for static conver-gence
4-pole device: red opposite to blue (in a ny direction)
6 - po1e device: red and blue to green (in any d irect ion)
5 mm
2,5 mm
4,5 mm
2 , 3 mm
To obtain a symmetrical shape for the hor izontal lines at the

upper part and the lower part of the screen, the unit AT 108 1
co mp r ises an additional two-pole correction magnet g iv ing
a disp lacement of the bea m in the centre of the screen in
vertical direction of maximum
4 mm
3,5 mm
Maximu m centring error in any d irection after colour -purity,

stat ic convergence, and horizontal centre line correction
4 mm
4 mm
With respect to dynamic convergence, the displa y syste m , con s ist in g of pil::ture tttbe
A5 1-SOOX or A47 -5 00X a nd deflection unit AT1085 is inherently self converging . However,
a s ma ll 'fixed line par abola correct ion of 1, 3 mm for tube A5 1: 500X and of 2 , 6 mm for
tube A47-500X, is rcqvircd and also sma ll correct ions shou ld be made to co mp e nsate for
to leran ces and asymmetr ies in the tube a nd deflection unit combination.
For thi.s purpo!;e two types of dyna mic magnet ic four-pole fields can be used.
One is generat~d by additiona l w indings on the yoke r ing of the deflection unit energized
hy ;;djno;tahJ'e sawtooth currents synchro nized with scanning.
The other type is generated by sawtooth a nd parabo lic currents which are synchron ized
with scanning and flow through the deflection coils .
Co mpensation to be prov ided by thes e corrections :
- horizontal red~to - blu e distance a t t he encl of the
hori:>:ontal Hxis (line symmetry)
- horizontal red-to-blu e dis tance a t the ends of the
vertical axis (field symmetry)
- vert ica l red-to-i1lut> dtRtance at t he e nd s of the
horizontal axis in opposite direct ions (line balance)
- vertical r ed - to - blue d istance at t he e nds of the
horiz;mtal axi::; in equal directions (line ba la nce parabola)
- vert ical r ed-to - blu e distance at the top of the
vertical axis (field balance top)
- vertica l r ed-to - blue d istance at the bottom of the
vertical axis (field balance bottom)
0 1,5 mm
1, 5 mm
0 1,0 mm
0 0,5 mm
0 I mm
0 I mm
No tes see next page .
11
September I 976
.'3122 13 7 15660
A11085
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
Notes
2) This correction is m ade by feeding a sawtooth current of line frequency through the
additional four-pole w indings on the deflectian unit.
3
) This correction is made by feeding a rectifi:.:d ~awrooth current of field frequency
through the additional four-pole windings on the deflection unit.
4 ) This correction is m ade by unbala nciilg the lin <: de t1 e ction coils.
5 ) This correction is made by feeding a parabolic current of line frequency thro ugh the
line deflection co ils .
6 ) This. correction is made hy 1mbalancing the field deflection coils during the first half
of the field scan.
7) This correction is made by unbalancing the field deflection coils durin g the ~ec:ond
Application information available on request .
September 1976
11
E41
A.T2063/00
3122 138 31010
I
,.
5th harm onic tuned

lE HT
E. H. T. * )
0 , 05
1,5
22 , 5
25
RtEHT
mA
kV
MQ
1 7
Supply voltage (Vg)

current (IB)
185
480
183
650
mA
lp -p_deflect ion
6, 1
5, 9
RZ 720915-07-01
APPLICATION
This tr a nsformer has been _designed to provide the required scanning amplitude for the
1100 colour picture tube A66 -140X in television rece ivers presenting 625 lines at 50
fields per second (CCIR) or 525 lines at 60 fieid s per second (USA).
-deflection unit AT1062 / 0l
-linearity control unit AT4042/06
- line output transistor BU 20 8
-E. H. T. tripler m odule BG1 895 -641.
September 1974
'' ) after tripler module
E43
11
AT2063/00
3122 138 31010
DESCRIPTION
The m agnet ic circuit of the transformer comprises a ferroxc ube U - a nd a ferroxcube
I -c ore pressed t oget her by mea n s of brackets. The primary w indings. the second ary
w in dings a nd the E. H. T. wi nd ing are s ituated on one leg of the core. The E. H. T. winding
is encap sulated in fl ame retard ing polyester e,, ).
The transform er has been pr ovided with four mounting pin s a nd two threaded holes for
mounting.
Exter na l c ircuit connection is m ade to connecting pins, pos it ioned as indicated in Fig. 1,
enabling th e unit to be soldered directly into a printed wiring board (Fig. 2) .
MECHANICAL DATA
M3
i-1-+c:::
I
I
L-,
-~
r-'
l,.::r,,,,
_/._
7,45
4,30
I
Fig. 1
We ight
240 g approximately
mox
Lt-J
82,5
10
--,
--;
r-
T-
95+5
-o
7Z66935
51mox
':' )C omply ing with the self -extinguis hing and non-dripping pr operties of the Amer ican
Underwriter s ' Laboratories rating mentioned in UL94SE - l.
11
October 1972
3122 138. 3 101 0
AT2063/00
Mount in g
T he transfor m er ca n be m ou nted on e ither a prin ted-wir ing board or a m eta l chassis . It
ca n be secured wit h two .1 mm sc r ews .
For m ount ing on a printe d-w irin g boa rd t he fit of the conn ect ing a nd t he f our mounting
pin s in a printed-w ir iqg gr id w ith a pitch of 2, 54 mm is illu st r ated in Fig. 2.
-,,-
e=2,54
15,12 -
J.s _
12x)
'--
"'
rt
) 4
30
- t
28
26
24
22
20
. 55,44
"
"
12
10
+
4
F ig. 2 Hol e patt ern for

m oun t in g on a p. w. boar d
(c omp one nt s id e ),
hole dia
1, 3 0, 1 mm
18
1
20t
18
16
12
10
Whet her the transform e r is board - or c hass is m ount e d, the c or e mu st be ea rthe d.
Temperat ure
T he ope r at ing temperatu re of the c ore a nd t he -c oil s s hould not exce ed 105 C, under
worst c ond iti ons, i.e. ta kin g int o a cc ount:
- over voltage
- low at m osph er ic pressur e (at hi gh alt itudes ) impl ying ba d c ooling by convection
-high a mbient temperature (up to 45 oc).
Ampl e c ool a ir c ircul at ion s hou ld be prov id ed ar ound the tra ns f_9rm er .
September 1974
E45
AT2063/00
3122 138 31010
Distances
flat surfaces (in proportion to their sharpness protruding parts must have a greater distance) must be maintained:
From the E. H. T. winding, radially
axially
15 mm
10mm
From the' E . H. T. lead
15 mm
The transformer apd the leads a nd components carrying high tension pulses should be
kept free from _.metal particles, solder drops etc.
ELECTRICAL DATA . (see circuit diagram)
EHTsupply
IEHT
mA
EHT
kV
RiEHT
MQ
. V B
Power supply
---
Outp~t
trans.istor
Deflection
Low voltage supply

(pin 6)
v 8
V
(pin 8)
0,05
1,5
25
22,5
1, 7
183
185
172
165
Is
mA
480
650
VcEM
1200
1165
+le M
3,9
3, 9
-reM
2,9
2, 7
1defl. p-p
flyback
ratio
(zero line)
6, 1
5,9
Over scan
variation
Idc max .
17,7
1.0
28, 7
27,5
I, 2
For auxiliary windings see circuit diagram (pins 1, 2, 3, 4)
E46
11
October 1972
3122 138 31010
AT2063/00
Circuit dia gr a m
beam
c urrent
Jimiter
---
' 3,3mF +
t 25VlT
1
j
1
~'s ~sov:zsv
4
L_ .,
1
+60Vp
'3 '
-60Vp
-350Vp
Fig.3
*}
values depending on duty cycle of oscillator.
October 1972
l.l
E47 .
AT2076110
3122 138 33651
11
DIODE-SPLIT LINE OUTPUT TRANSFORMER

QUICK REF ERE NCE DATA
1eht
E.H.T.
max. 1, 5 mA
25 kV
Ri(eht)
2 MQ
l p- p defl ecti on (incl. 6% overscan)
6, 5 A
Load inductance (of line deflection coils)
1,12 mH
Suppl y voltage (VB')

current (Iaverage ) at Ieht =' 1, 5 mA
148 V
785 mA
Voltages of auxiliary windings
- 335 V p, -160 V p, + 160 V p,+ 335 V p,

picture tube heater vol tage
APPLICATION
This transformer has been des igned to provide the r eq uired scanning amplitude for
20 AX 110 colour picture tube s with a neck diameter of 36, 5 mm in transistor equipped telev is ion receivers presenting' 625 lines at 50 fiel ds per second (CCIR) or 525 lines
at 60 fields per second (USA).

-deflection unit AT1080, AT1083/01 or AT lO SS;
- linearit y control unit AT4042/38;
- line output transistor BU208 A;
- a scree ned e. h. t. cable w ith a length of 1 m (available under
catalogue number 3122 137 58250),
as s hown in the circuit diagram of F ig. 3 .
DESCRIPTION
The magnetic circuit of the tr ansformer comprises 2 Ferroxcube U-cores, sc rewed

together . The primary winding i s situated on one l eg of the core, the secondary on the
other leg. The windings a r e impregnated in flame retarding polyester, meeting the selfextinguishing requirements of IEC65 , para. 14. 4 and UL492, para. 280-SE1. The trans former i s provided with 2 M3 screw - s tuds for mounting 1 ). Ext ernal circuit connection
i s made to connecting pins, positioned as indicated in Fig. 1 enabling the unit to be solder ed directly into a prin~ed-wir in g board (Fig. 2).
1) For mounting on the printed- wiring board a washer of 20 mm in dia meter has
used. Tightening torque on printed - wiring board: 500 + 100 mNm.
11
to
be
AT2076110
DIODE-SPLIT LINE OUTPUT TRANSFORMER.
3122 138 33651
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (min) and te rminals
smooth solder
joint
133
ma x
----,.--- 11
- --l"r:=-:t:,ct::-=-=-..:.
- - 41- ---it=~-
11 _ _ _ _
_ _ ..lL
= ==='1fT===
i>li::~F=:=::::::
==t t=:::::..:::==.:.FI!~i!E:~=:::
11
11
=== =~ === 'l=;!~;:;s,,
1-
----
80max - - - ----.1
l.... s.7
4,0
Fig. 1
500 g approximately
S olderability
in accordance with IEC68, Test T
E50
11
11
Aul!USt 1975
3122 138 33651
DIODE-SPLIT LJNE OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
I "
AT2076110
MOUNTING
The transformer may be mounted on either a printed-wiring board pr, under certain
conditions, on a metal chassis. Two securing studs (M3) are provided.
The fit of the connecting and the mounting pins in a printed-wiring grid with a pitch of
2, 54 mm is illustrated in Fig. 2.
-, ,=2.54
I 0,1 in)
35
- - (2,xl-30
28
-1-
I+
26
24
22
20
44
18
16
14
12
f+
10
--
'
Fig.2
Hole pattern for mounting
(solder side). Grid hole
diameter 1, 3 0, 1 mm.
--
23 ,94
j
20e
18
16
14
12
10
7l7l~14
Whether the transformer is board or chassis mounted, the core must be earthed.
Temperature
The operating temperature of the e. h. t. coil should not exceed +85 C under worst conditions, i.e. taking into account:
- over-voltage on the coils;
- high ambient temperature (up to 45 C).
To satisfy this requirement it may be necessary to provide an ample cool air flow around
the transformer.
.August 1975
.J
AT2076110
3 122 138 33651
Distances
flat surfaces must be maintained (it should be noticed that edges of conductive parts must
have a greater distance) :
From the e.h.t. coil, radially 10 mm
axially 10 mm
The transformer , and the leads and components c~rrying high voltage pulses, should be
kept free from metal particles , solder drops etc.
ELECTRICAL DATA (measured in circuit of Fig. 3)
E. H. T. supply
Powe,r supply
Ieht
e. h. t.
mA
Ri(eht)
MQ
kV
Deflection
1, 5
22,0
2, 0
]"'
168
148
140
mA
580
785
{ VcEM
1190
1120
+IcM
VB'
1average
Output transistor
0,05
25,2
4,0
3,9
Load inductance
(of line deflection)
mH
Ip-p flyback
(incl. 6% overscan)
.6, 5
11,5
1,12
6, 2
t flyback
J.IS
Over scan
Variation
%
kV
6,15
Auxiliary windings :
picture tube heater voltage V 1-2
6,62
voltages at pin 3
v3
-335 p (+40 V d. c . )
pin 4
v4
-160 p (+14 V d. c.)
pin 6
Vfocus
v6
+160 p
pin 7
V7
+335 p
pin 8
Vs
+235
1)
5,45
6,18
r.m.s.
d . c.
+230 V
1 ) Video supply.
E52
August 1975
3122 138 33651
AT2076110
APPLICATION CIRCUIT
I.
'
I
'
I
'
1Mn
100nF
'
beam
18 1
~-+-C:::::t-+--~~-++t-~+:~--j---~-------------+ current
lim iter
15
from
from
to
8,2nF I
I1500Vll
driver stage
deflection
coils
33il
power supply
E-W
drive
47~F
163 VI
video supply
230V
123,5WI
!\_ +335V
!\_ +160V
I3,4WI
+14V
v-335V
330pF
Fig. 3
+
2,2
124WI
lmF
6,62 V
r.m .s.
L ___
eptember 1976
E-W drive
14,67W)
_J
FTB
35V
10,6WI
7Z7J 1 1S .2
11
38 V
E53
AT2080(10
3122 138 33320
11
leht
max . 1. 5 mA
E.H.T.
8,4
Ri(eht)
lp-p deflection (incl. 6%' over scan)
6, 5 A
Load inductance (of line deflection)
1, 12 mH
Supply voltage (VB)

current (IB) at Ieht = 1, 5 mA
148 V
780 mA
Peak voltages of auxiliary windings
-320 V, -155V, + 155 V, +3?0V,

picture -tube hea ter voltage
kV
M~2
APPLICATION
20AX 110 colour picture tubes with a neck diameter of 36,5 mm in transistor equipped television receivers presenting 625 lines at 50 fields per second (CCIR) or 525 lines
at 60 fields per second (USA).
.It is intended for use in conjunction with:
- deflection unit AT1080, AT1083/01 or AT1085;
- linearity control unit AT4042 / 38
- line output transistor BU208A
- e. h. t. rectifier / multiplier device BG1895 641 ~44
according to circuit diagram of Fig . 3.
September 1976
--
11
---
AT2080/10
3122 138 33320
DESCRIPTION
The magnetic circuit of the transf:Jrmer comprises Ferroxcube U and I -cores clamped
together with brackets. The primary windings, the secondary windings and the e. h. t.
winding are situated on one leg of the core. The windings are impregnatecj. in fla me
r.etardant polyester , meeting the self-extinguishing requirements of IEC 65, para. 14.4
and UL492, para. 280-SEl. The transformer is provided with four pins and twothreaded
holes for mounting. External circuit connection is made to connecting pins, positioned
as indicated in Fig . 1, enabling the unit to be soldered directly into a printed- wiring
board (Fig. 2).
Dimensions in mm
MECHANICAL DATA
Outlines
...
4,Bmax
69max
11=
Jl
==)
c:
.-4~1
Y111
~
M3
Pf
'11
--+--
82,5
max
~--1-- r-J
---1--
LJJ
+
-- --
15nom
"
../._
7,45
95 +S
0
4 ,30
Fig.1
Mass
E56
~19
51 max
1265976
240 g approximately
11
11
December 1975
3122 138 33320
AT2080/10
MOUNTING
The transformer may be mounted on either a printed-wiring board or, under certain
conditions , on a metal chassis. It may be secured with M3 screws.
For mounting on a printed- wiring board the fit of the connecting and the mounting pins in
a printed - wiring grid with a pitch of 2, 54 mm is illustrated in Fig. 2.
.., ,-
-15,12-
e=2,54
(0,1 in)
_ 3,5 12")
"'
w.
I+
30
-t
"
26
24
22
20
5144
18
16
14
12
10
+
Fig. 2 Hole patte:r:n for mounting
on a printed- wiring board
(solder side).
Grid hole diameter
1,3 0,1 mm
18
1
20t
18
16
14
12
10
Whether the transformer is board or chassis mounted , the core must be ea.rthed.
Temperature
The operating temperature of the core and the coils should not exceed 105 oc , under
worst conditions, i.e. taking into account:
- overvoltage on the windings
- low atmospheric pressure (at high a ltitudes) implying bad cooling by convection
- high ambient temperature (up to 45 OC).
To satisfy this requirement it may be desired to provide ample cool air circulation
around the transformer.
December 1975
11
F'>7
---
AT2080/10
3122 138 33320
LI NE OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
Distances
flat surfaces must be mainta ined (it should be noticed that edges of conductive parts
must have a greater distance):
a. From the e. h. t. winding, radially 15 mm
ax ia ll y 10 mm
b. From the e. h. t. lead
15 mm
The transformer, and the leads and component s carrying high voltage pulses should be
kept free from metal particles , solder drops, etc.
-ELECTRICAL DATA
(typical values)
1eht
E. H. T. supply
e. h. t.
kV
- MQ-
Ri(eht)
Power supply
--
Output transistor
24.9
22,0
VB
167
166
v
B
1average
148
140
570
780
VcEM
1200
ll20
4,0
4,0
6,2
+ 1cM
mA
6,5
flyback
ratio
(average)
fJS
11,6
Over scan
Variat ion
%
%
lp-p
Deflection
1, 5
0,05
mA
Focus -voltage
6
1,5
kV
8, 2'
7,5
8,2
- 320
-155
+ 155
+320
-520'
7,6
Auxiliary windings:
picture-tubeheater voltage
peak voltages at pin 3
pin 4
pin 6
pin 7
pin 8
V 1-2
v3
v4
v6
v7
V8
V
V
V
V
V
V
Tuning fre quencies a = 43 , 3 kHz

'Y = 206 kHz (for addit ion al information see Product Note No. 63,
titled "Tuning of a transistor-driven line output stage
in the TV receiver").
0
E58
_ II
11
Sept~mber 1976
3122 138 33320
LINE OUTPUT TRANSFO RMER
AT2080/10
APP LI CATION CIRCUIT

19
AT2080/10 ~-
68nF
I1600VI
270ka
,.._._c~-J.--i--+----'--J~--_.__--__..----_.__-------+ ~~~r'!'nt
limiter
0,91
8.2nF
from driver
stage
~F
to
deflection
I1600VII
coils
----
powe::~;ply -+--.--r'JJ~n,_..._..cv~.,J,113J---...j..J
+148V
no load '
470 nF
1250VIr
47~F
(63VI
, - . , f . _ - - : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
1\_ +320V
)-C'----- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + 1\_ +155V
Fig . 3
E-W dr iv e
'==,------~1~0.6~W_,_I + 38 V
eptember 1976
11
E59
11
AT 4040/ ..
CONVERGENCE SERIE
CONVERGENCE ADJUSTERS
APPLICATIO N
These adjusters are intended fot- use in conjunction with the convergence unit AT4046/ ..
for convergence a djustment.
MECHANICAL DATA
The converge nce adjusters are provide d with pins for mounting on printed- wiring boards
with holes of cl> 1, 3 + 0. 1 mm. They have a knob at the top for adjustment.
Dimensions in mm
Fig.l.
,...._ _
1
20,5 mo
10,16(4)
r---~
as.--- ~ --1~
~~ ~~~ - ~ I
I ~ - -~
.
I
15
2
Fig.2.
' "'
ptember 1976
- 3
11
--
---
---
AT 4040 I..
ELECTRICAL DATA
type numbe r
(typical values)
circuit
diagram
Fig. terminals
L- range
or L
(r.1H)
d.c.
resistance
(11)
0.48
0.48
0.18
catalogue
number
AT4040/3S"')
1- 5
2- 5 '
3- 4
0.17-0.07
0. 07- o. 17
0.05
AT4040/44
3"4
15.6-3.0
11.5
3122 138 22870
AT4040/49
3- 4
1- 2
l. 06- 0 ..'3.3
0. ,),)- l. 06
2.4
2.4
3122 107 30030
AT4040/53
3" 4
3.72-0.63
3.65
3122 107 30060
AT4040/57
3- 4
1-2
0 . .'32-0.10
0.10-0.32
0.66
3122 107 30090
AT4040/ 56 .
4- 5
1-4
2- 3
o. 024-0.006
0. 006- 0. 024
0.030-0.011
0.11
0.11
0.17
3122 107 30080
AT4040/58
3- 4
1- 2
8.15 -2 .5
2.5-8.15
20.7
3122 107 30100
AT4040/6 1
3- 4
33 .5- 7. 2
23. 1
3122 107 30130
AT4040/63
.3- 4
0.44-0 . 11
0.11-0.44
AT4040/89
1- 2
3- 4
4. 5- 12
4. 5- 12
AT4040/ 92')
.3 - 4
1-2
1- 4
0. 07-0.22
0.07-0.22
0.04
0.65
0. 78
0.58
3122 138 25780
AT4040/ 93
1- 2
3-4
0.21-0.58
0. 21- o. 58
l. os
l. os
3122 138 25790
l. 35
l.
35
I
25
25
3122 108 74390
3122 107 30480

3122 138 25770
At a frequency of 15 kHz the current through the convergence a djustment coils has to be
2 . Rd <0. 3 W remains in force .
such tha t the formul a I
rms
c-
':) Six mounting pins, pin 5 is marked by a colour dot.
E62
11
October 1971
AT 4040/ ..
Circuit cliagrams
A
4
7Z66110
7Z66111
7Z66116
7Z66112
7Z66106
ctober 19711
11
---
AT 4040/ ..
CORRECTION SERIES
11
CORRECTION COILS
RZ 30369 13
RZ 30369-2
V 27807
----
V 25546
APPLICATION
The correction coils are mainly intended for use with the transductors AT4041/ .. and the
deflection units AT1027 I . . , AT1029/ . , AT1060/ .. and AT1062 .. for raster correc ti on.
The AT4040/50 is for deflection units with parallel- connectedframe coils, theAT4040/ 55
for series- connected frame coils.
'
The AT4040/31 is also intended for use as the balancing coil between the combine d EHT
and s emi- scan transformer AT2100/ 04 and the semi- scan transforme r AT 210 1/ 02.
The AT4040/38 has also an a uxiliary win ding for convergence.
October 1971
11
E65
AT 4040/ .. .
CORRECTION COILS
11
11
MECHANICAL DATA
Th e coils a re provide d with pins for mounting o n printed - wiring boards witb holes of
cpl , 3 + 0 , 1 mm. They can be a djusted at the top by means of a trimming key.
Dim ensions in mm
1 '-e:;fi""-J"-":j~t:T:..
5.08
. F ig.l
20.2 12el
max 5.08
j 12',
Fig.2
Fig.3
Fig. 4
E66
11
11
September 1974
AT 4040/ ..
CORRECTION COILS
ELECTRICAL DATA (typical values)

type
number
circuit
diagram
L- range
or L
(mH)
F ig. terminals
d.c
resistance
(Q )
catalogue
number
AT4040/31
bridge coil
3- 4
1.1
0 . 82
3122 108 74400
AT4040/32
phase adjuster
3- 4
1. 6 -4
1. 18
3122 108 74340
AT 4040/34
2nd harm/anti- S
3-4
0.0.3-0 . 1
0. 18
3122 108 74410
AT4040/36
balancing coil
3- 4
0. 08- 0 . 56
0.22
3122 138 21090
AT4040/38
2nd harm
1- 2
3-4
1. 17
6.5
0 . 33
3122 138 26320
o. 033-0.13
AT4040/ 50
amplitude a djuster
3- 4
0 . 76-3 . 71
1.1
3122 107 31210
AT4040/55
amplitude a djuster
,)
.) - 4
2.46-11.5
4.1
3122 107 31220
AT4040/85
balancing coil
1-2
3-4
0 .03-0 .1
0.03-0.1
0 . 23
. 0.23
3122 138 2-5750
AT4040/87
phase a djuster
3- 4
1. 8520%
3122 138 25760
'
Circuit diaBEa ms
A
20
so
4
10
20
7Z66113
7Z66115
so
7Z66109
0 1
A[;:
os
7Z66 114
:)ctober 1971
---
I.I
E67
AT 4041/40
3122137 11660
11
TRANSDUCTOR
The transductor has been developed for 'use in combination with the deflection unit
AT 1062/01 *), and the adjusters AT4040/87 and AT4040/38 for passive north-south
raster correction in 110 colour television tubes, A coil AT4040/31 is used as a series
choke for a passive N -S pincushion correction.
For adjusting the horizontal lines on the picture tube screen (Fig .1 ) the transductor fs
provided with a rod-magnet which can be turned by a screw driver (minimum torque
0, 4 Ncm, maximum torque 2 Ncm) ..
+t
'
----+-t
I
Fig.l
------+
-.
1Z6693B
*> Frame coils series conn~cted .

October 1972
11
E69
--
AT 4041/40
3122 137 11660
TRANSDUCTOR
11
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm) and connections
adjustment
~~~;EJ== :1
F ig . 2 nss 4 o -
Weight
20max_ls,1 . 4,2
approximately 20 g
Mounting
The tran sductor is .provided with 8 pins for mounting on a prin ted -wiring board (F ig . 3).
e=2 ,54
--, 1--+--+-+-+-+-+-H--t-+-t-t-t-
-1
l
7e
F ig. 3 Ho le pat tern for m ounting on

a pr inted-wiring board.
Hole dia m et e r l. 3 + 0, 1 mm.
I I
I I
7Z66939
.- 2e - - s e - 2e -The ambient temperature should not exceed 65 C. By mounting the polycarbonate capac itor and the NTC thermistor (as given in the circuit diagram) close to the tran s du ctor, a
phase -drift can be prevented.
E70
11
11
September 1974
3122 137 11660
AT 4041/40
TRANSDUCTOR
ELECTRICAL DATA
Transductor measured without rod magnet . With rod magnet VR1 and VR2 can be
changed with minimum + 0, 5 V.
oscillogram
voltmeter adjustment (V r .m .s. )
values
Fig.
M2
M4
Im ax
16
20
880 mA + 10/ - 15%
VRl
16
20
8, 8 V
VR2
16
20
16
20
VR1 -VR2
+
- 9%
8, 8 V + 9%
-
to
max. 0, 6 V
-Measuring circuit
r;:--7l
6
18
si
I
I
I AT4041/40
I
I
I
Ml
M2
Fig . 4 M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
= l.f.generator 3kHz
= tube voltmeter
= oscilloscope
= tube voltmeter
= 1. f. generator 50 Hz
L1
L2
01
R1
R2
I
I
--
= 0, 7 mH
=min . 20 mH
= BA148
= 10 rl, 5 W
= 47 rl, 40 W
o-r..~~--------------~vo~,~.~Ol~,Fig . 5
Test voltage
September 197 4
2000 V d . c.
E7 1
IIITIIl
,,,- ):lo
2322 642 11332
-t
()
t:r:l
""'
AT4040/87
AT1062/01
r------1
3 ~
...
c:
::j
t:J
;;
41
...........
~
. (l
-350V
$:
15fi
>Ij
0
:::0
en
en
<
t:r:l
:::0
....,
en
>-l
:::0
;:..
470 ..J... 390
TnF
t:r:l
:::0
()
AT4040/31
0
:::0
:::0
t:r:l
()
1\.
Fig. 7 Input voltage

- Input current
typ. 400 V p-p

typ. 800 mA
'4 - - - 5
L. - - - - - - J
-:;.-;.,;::--'--- _ ~~~9..!_ on
- -CO
-----;;:
/
"
"
'
~
7Z66941
,-r
210 Vp-p
......
'-0
""'
Fig.8
Cl
::0
::l
0
z
w
......
N
N
C1l
>;
c:
()
()
0
C"
;:..
65t:J
"
......
--.)
'\
,,
- - - -- - - - - - - - - -
. ......
......
L_
7Z66942
e--
o0
AT 4042/08
3122 138 28650

A 55126-/A
=
==
APPLICATION
This unit has been designed for use in colour TV sets equipped with a 110 deflection an~
gle co~our picture tube, to adjust the linearity of line deflection. It can be used in combination with the unit AT 1062/01 if parallel connected line coils are used.
CONSTRUCTION
The unit consist of a coil, mounted on a ferroxcube rod, two ferroxdure magnets and one
plastoferrite magnet. One magnet has the shape of a ring and is placed around the ferroxcube rod above the coils. One has the shape of a half ring and is placed around the
ferroxcube rod under the coils. The third magnet is cylindrical; it is positioned to and
clamped against the ferroxcube rod opposite the half ring magnet. It is provided with a_
square hole to facilitate turning to adjust the biasing field and, therefore, th~ linearity
of the line deflect ion .
February 1973
11
AT 4042/08
3122 138 28650
MECHANICAL DATA
Dime nsions (mm)
Se
/ 11'
'
Se
Fig. 2 Hole pattern for m ounting on

a printed- wiring board.
Hole diameter 1, 3 + 0 , 1
e = 2 , 54
44-232~,.;----h
_ 10.1 . ..
'
R3min
ad Justable
magnet
_UT\,
M3
_,V
I
----r----- .a
I
'
16
mln
1.5
(2x)
I
1
- -'
, . . - . - - - : U66!19
.C OSLOQ
1 -
---
16m i n -~ 1
5.S
5,0
F ig. 3 Hole pattern for mounting

on a chassis
Fig. 1
ELECTRICAL DATA
When a saw - tooth current of a peak-to peak value of 6A,

frequ e ncy 15 625 Hz , fl y -ba ck ratio 18% (wi thout S- corr ection)
flows through the linearity control unit (coils connected in
parallel , one conn ection point to earth). the correction
voltage is a djustable berv,;een 15 and 25 V .
For connecti on s see the r e levant data s heets of line -deflection
tran sform er s .
-0
./.]
adjustable
magnet
11
1ZIS JU
circuit diagram
MOUNTING
The unit can be mounted either on pr inted-wiring boards by m eans of its two conn ection
pin s a nd two mounting pins, or on metal chassis by bending the two mounting pins and/or
by m ea ns of a screw through an aperature in the casing (see Fig . 3). To prevent distortion
of the magn e tic fi eld, no iron part should approach the magnetic partd n earer than 3 mm .
The coils should be s hunted wi th carbon resistors to damp r inging phenomena; the value
of resistor de pends on applied deflec tion tran sformer .
1) Hol e only necessary for bottom adjustment.
R7A
11
Seotember 1974
AT4042/17
3122 138 73260
11
APPLICATION
This unit has been designed for us e in col our TV sets equipped with a ll0 deflection angl e col our picture tube, to adjus t the linearity of line deflection. It can be use d in coml:lination with the unit AT1080 if parallel connected line c oil s a re us e d.
DESCRIPTION
The unit consist of a coil, mounted on a fe rroxcu be rod , two ferroxdure magnets and one
plastoferrite m agnet . One magnet has the shape of a ring and is placed around the
fer r oxcube rod above the coils. One has the s hape of a half ring and is placed around the
ferroxcube rod under the coils . The third magnet is cylindrical ; it is positioned to and
cla mped against the ferroxcube rod oppos ite the half ring magnet. It i s provided with a
squar e hole to facilitate turning to adjust;_ the biasing field and , the r efore, the linearity
of the line deflection.
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimens ions (mm)
18.7
o 2 54(01in)
- 3.4
-""-
15.4
l)\
'
--
Fig. 2 Hole pattern for mouritingon

a printed-wiring board.
Hole diameter 1, 3 + 0, 1
F ig. !
1) Hol e only necessar y for bottom adjustment.
October 1974
11
E75
AT4042/17
3122 138 73260
c:
ELECTRICAL DATA
The correction voltage is pre-adjusted to 30 V at a saw tooth
current of 6, 4 A peak-to-peak, frequency 15625 Hz, fly-back
ratio 18 % (without S-correction), flowing through winding 1-2.
The voltage between pins 2 and 3 (pins 1 and 4 interconnected)
is then 37 V.
c:
7Z69289
Fig. 3 Circuit diagram
MOUNTING
The unit can be mounted either on. printed-wiring boards by' means of its four connection
pins and two mounting pins, or on metal chassis by bending the two mounting pins and/or
by means of a screw through an aperture ln the casing(see Fig. 3). To prevent distortion
of the magnetic field ,. no iron part should approach the magnetic parts nearer than 3 mm.
The coils should be shunted with a carbon resistor to damp ringing phenomena; the value
of resistor depends on applied deflection tran~former (typical value 820 Q with transfor mer AT2080/l0).
--
'-') Pins 2 and 3 should be interconnected on the printed-wiring board .
E76
11
11
October 1974
::!122 13 8 765 70
AT4042/38
11
APPLICATION
This unit hns been des igned for us e in colour TV sets e quipp ed with a 110 deflect ion a n g le colour pictu re tube , to adjust the lin ear it y of line deflection. It ca n be used in combination with the deflection un its AT JOHO. AT JO S:l /0 1 and AT lOSS.
DESCRIPTIO N
T he un it cons is t s of a coil , mou nted on a Ferroxc ube rod, and thr ee f'erroxdure magnets.
Two rin g-shaped magnets are pl aced around the f'erroxcube rod. one nt th e top and one
at the bottom. The third m agnet is positioned aga in st th e Ferroxcube rod opposite the:
bottom mngnet a nd clamped. It is provided w ith a s q ua r e bol e to facilitate ad jus tm ent of
the biasing fi e ld a nd . therefore. the l inea rit y of the lin e deflection.
MECH AN ICA L DAT A -
27 max .___
.Dimensions (mm)
Fig.l
-,,-
0 2,54 (0, 1 in)
24,2
max
18,2
max
-+--cH-+r--++t-t-+__. 11
'
7Z76 15 4
F ig . 2 Hole patte rn for mount ing on

a printe d- wiring board ,
Hole dia me ter 1, 3 + 0 , 1.
52,2
max
-t - r-'-TH'w=~
12 max
t
-1-
I (4x)
1) Ho le (dia 5, 1 mm m in . ) only necessa ry for bottom ad jus tme nt.
October 1976
11
E 77
AT4042/38
.3 122 1.18 765 70
ADJUSTAB LE Ll EARITY CONTROL UNIT
ELECTRICAL DATA
c:
Th e correction vo lta ge is pre-a dju sted to 23,5 V 2,5% a t a

sawtooth current of 6, 4 A peak -to-pea k , frequency 15 625 Hz.
fl yback rat io 18% (w ithout S- correct ion ) , flowing through wind ing 1- 2 . The voltage betwee n pins 2 and .) '(pins 1 a nd 4 interconn ected) is the n 2 R. 5 10%.
[3
7Z69289
I'ig. 3 Circu it diagram

~')
MOUNTING
The unit can be mo unred on printed-wiring boards by means of it s four co nn ect ion pins
(see I' ig. 2) . T o prevent distortion of the mi.lgnetic field. no iron part s ho uld approach
th e magnetic parts nea r er tha n .1 mm. The coil s s houl d be s hunted with a carbon resistor
to d<lmp r in ging phenomena; the va l ue of resistoJ: depends o n app li ed deflect ion transform er (typical value 560 ~ >.w i th transformer AT2076 / 10).
c:
'-') Pin s 1 and 4 s h ou 1d b e mterconnecte
d on t h e printe d - wiring b ?a r d .
E78
11
October 1976
3 122 138 31930
AT4043/15
I
FILTERING COIL
APPLICATION
The coil AT4043/ 15 has been des igned for all-trans i stor colour tel evision sets, t o be
used in the suppl y unit.
MECHANICAL DATA
The magnetic circuit of the coil compri ses t wo iron U- cores .

The unit i s provided with pins for mounting on a printed-wiring board.
Dimensions (mm)
, -.---32max - - -
-1
r 31 max
:rJ
4,50,4(4x)
+3:!:0,2
7Z72179
F ig . !
September 1974
E79
11
AT4043/15
3122 138 3 1930
FILTERING COIL
11
...-..__
I
Mounting
15+01
1Z72180
f-- 2
02min -..._
..+
Fig .2
Hole pa ttern for mounting
on a printed-wiring board,
hole dia met e r 1, 3 + 0 , 1 mm.
f-- 1
e=2 ,54mm
ELECTRICAL DATA
Inductance
2 , 1 mH 15%
Resistanc<;) at 25 C
0 , 27 Q
Maximum working t e mperature
95 C
0
7Z65969.1
--=
Fig . 3 Connection diagr a m
E80
11
11
September 1974
AT4043/35
3122 138 74010
CLASS-D FILTER CHOKE
APPLICATION
The AT4043/35 filter choke has been designed for use in class -0 field time bases .
It can be used in conjunction :_..,ith the TDA260() in both 900 and 1100 colour television
receivers.
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
The magnetic circuit of the choke .comprises two Ferroxcube U-c ores.
The unit is provided with pins for mounting on a printed-wiring board.
Outlines
-4,5 0,4 (4x)

4
-19max-
7169990
Mounting
1,50,1
-,~ .
?Z69991
2min ....
1 ~-+-
r--3
I"
-~
Hole pattern for mounting o~ a printedwiring board (component side).

Hole diameter 1, 3 + 0, 1 mm.
e = 2,54 mm (0,1 in) .
September 1976
-4
2~-
11
AT4043/35
3122 138 74010
CLASS-D FILTER CHOKE
ELECTRICAL DATA
J.lH
Inductance
(1- 2)
22 0
R es istance
(1 - 2)
0; 15 Q
Maximum peak-to-peak current
3 ,6 A
Maximu m working temperature
100
12%
c
2
7Z69992
en
~
w
.....
N
APPLICATION CIRCUIT
or
g.
.....
w
Cl>
'"1
+ 37 V
.....
+sync.
JlJ
00
.,.
-..]
10 V
0
.....
0
"'a-..]
10!1 12W)
4,7 k!1
12x)
8AV19
t;:
en
en
freq . ......
470
' '
TDA2600
'
680
"'1
AT4043/ 35
12x)
1000 ~F
125 VI
I8
"I
1,5
k!1
D~ I I !
til
::<l
0
8,2
3,3
nF
::r:
0
:><:
dell.
coils
til
!1
8AV19
1.,.1
3,9 k!1
c::J
til
00
w
11~<1
. .
7Z74428
11
IUIIII
,J,
11
)>
-t
~
11
11
w
.........
w
Ut
AT4043/38
3122 138 73330
11
BRIDGE COIL
APPLICATION
This correction coil has been developed to be used as a bridge transformer in the line
output transformer circuitry of the AT2080/10 in conjunction with the deflection unit
AT1080 (see also data sheet of the AT2080/10).
MECHANICAL OAT A
The magnetic circuit of the coil comprises two Ferroxcube U-cores. The unit is provided
with pins for mounting on a printed-wiring board.
Dimensions (mm)
(
32max---,
-)
--
' r 30max
ITJ
4,50,4 (4x)
-t
7Z65606.1
)eptember 1976
11
E85
---
AT4043/38
3122 138 73330
BRIDGE COIL
11
-- -1,50,1
'
t- 3
02min
7Z 65178.1
r--.:,&.
l't
t- 4
t-
e=2 ,54mm
Hole pattern for mounting on a

printed- wiring board. Hole diameter
1, 3 + 0 , 1 mm. e = 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in).
ELECTRICAL DATA
Inductance
(primary, 1- 2)
4251JH 10 %
Resistance
< 0,4 Q
Maximum voltage, peak-to- peak
400 V
Maximum curre nt , peak-to - peak
6, 7 A
Maximum current , r.m.s.
1, 8 A
Maximum working tempera ture
100 C
. 7Z65179
11
Octobe r 1974
AT 4043/86
3122 138 26050
11
BRIDGE COIL
A55126-2
---APPLICATION
The bridge coil AT4043/86 is intended for use in the single-tran s istor ( BU108 ) line -out put circuit for the 110 deflection angle colour television tube A66-140X.
MECHANICAL DATA
The magnetic c ircuit of the bridge coil comprises two ferroxcube U - co r es .
The coil i ~;> provided with pins for mounting on a printe d -wiring board.
November 1971
11
F.R7
AT 4043/86
3122 138 26050
BRIDGE COIL
Dimensions in mm
l-+-------32max------- .
-i
30max
Il
4,50,4(4x)
7265606.1
-- ....
1,50,1
02min,
---
7265178.1
!',U.
['f
21H-
f-- 4
e=2 ,54mm
Hole pattern for mounting on a

printed -wiring board, Hole diameter
I, 3 + 0, I mm. e =2, 54 mm (O,I in).
ELECTRICAL DATA
~H
Indu ctan ce _
(primary, 3 -4)
Resistan ce
285
Maximum vbltage, peak-to peak
350
Maximum current, peak-to-peak
6 A
Maximum curren t , r.m.s.
I, 75
Maximum work ing temperature
lOO C
E 88
-11
10 %
S"l
< 0,2
V
A
September I976
AT 4043/87
3122 138 26060

11
APPLICATION
The 'tran :;forme r AT4043/87 has been des igne d for all-tra ns is tor bla c k/w hite and
colour te lev i s ion se t s . ln black and white te l ev i s ion se t s it can be use d in the s ingletra ns i s tor (l3U20 5) line - ou tput c ir cuit in co nj unction with the line-out pu t tran s forme r
AT2048/ l 2: in col ou r te lev i s ion set ~ it ca n be use d in the s ingle- tran s is tor (BU20 8)
line - ou t put ci r cu it in conj unc tion with the lin e-o utput tran sforme r AT2063/ ...
Dimens ions in mm
MECHAN ICAL DATA
T he magne tic ci r cu it of the tra nsformer co m prises two Ferroxcube U- co r es .

The unit is prov ide d with pin s fo r mounting on a printe d- wirin g boa rd .
Ou tlin es
32 ma x ----~
Nove mbe r 1976
11
E89
AT4043/87
3122 138 26060
Mounting
-- -1.50,1
7165178.1
f- 3-.t-t-t-t--t-t-t---t -Ge--+----1---':'-+
12!2 min ,H--t-+t--+-H--+--+-+---i-+-1
Hole pattern for m ounting

on a printed-wiring board ,
hole diameter 1, 3 + 0 , 1 mm.
4.+-+--H+++-1 2
e=2,54mm
ELECTRICAL DATA
Indu ctance (prima r y, 1- 4)
Le akage inductance
(secondary)~' )
76mHl2%
::: 2 , 0fJH
Transformation ratio
29: 1
lOO C
7Z66952
'-') Primary short c i;rcu ited
E90
11
11
September 1974
AT 4043/88
3122 138 2 7810
11
LINE CENTRING CHOKE
APPLICATION
The coil AT 4043/88 is intended for use in the s ingle - tran s istor ( BU 208 ) line - output
circuit ; for cir cuit diagram see data on line -output trans former AT 2063/ ..
MECHANICAL DATA
The magnetic circuit of the line centring choke comprises two ferroxcube U - cores .
The coil is provided wi th pins for mounting on a printed -wiring b oard .
Dimensions (mm)
rRS
+----------~gx--------~
max
,- 13-,
max
-1 36,15
---
ma x
27,5
max
j
_ll--;~1
30,5
max
7Z65603
eptem ber 1974
E9 1
AT 4043/88
.3122 138 27810
LINE CENTRING CHOKE
Mounting
7Z6S604
7
6
Hole pattern (viewed from

5
printed -wiring side) for
mounting on a printed -wiring
board, hole diameter 1, 3 +
0, 1 mm .
3
4
e=2 ,54mm
Jel._
ELECTRICAL DATA
Indu ctance (primary, 1-5)
52,5 mH
Resistance (pr im ary, 1 -5)
6,1 Sl
10%
10%
Nomina l curr ent, peak to peak
140 mA
Transformatton ratiO
20: 1
Maximum working temperatur e
100 C
7Z65605
ii9?_ _ _ _
ll ________.._.___..:/~-11
September 1974
AT4044/20
3122 138 71890
11
11
E/W LOADING COIL
APPLICATION
This coil has been designed for the c ircuitry around the line output tran sformer
AT 2080/10 in conjunction with the deflection unit AT 1080 (see also the data on
the tra nsformer).
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
-
~----- 43max -----4~5!01l_
21 .2max-
-B
-~ -
cs==: '+,
1Z690J9
--
Fig. 1.
The coil i s . provided with pins for mounting on a printed-wiring board. It can be adjusted
at the top by means of a trimming key.
-e= 2,54
\
J
Bmin
t
7269040
Fig. 2 Hole pattern for mounting on a

printed -wiring board, hole dia 1, 3 + 0, 1 mm
E9:3_ _ _ ___.]
11
AT4044/20
E/W LOADING COIL
3122 138 71890
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
Inductance between 3 and 4
Resistance between 3 and 4
*)
1 to 5, 3 mH
211
95
sO
10
7Z66115
Fig. 3 Connection diagram
'~ ) measured with 5000 pF in parallel .
E94
11
Febru ar y 1975
AT4044/26
3122 138 71910
LINE BALANCE COIL
APPLICATION
This coil has been designed for the circuitry of the four-pol e unit incorporated in the
deflection unit AT1080, for equalization of line and fie l d astigmatism (see also data on
AT1080)
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
-20,1max-
- - - - - 43 max - - - --
22,5
max
',
j,
Fig. t
The coil is provided with pins for mounting on a printed-wiring board. It can be adjusted
at the top by means of a trimming key .
e= 2,54
7Z69010
Fig. 2 Hole pattern for mounting on a

printed-wiring board, hole dia 1, 3+0, 1 mm
September 1974
C'I)C:
--
AT4044/26
LINE BALANCE COI L
3122 138 71910
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
Indu ctance between 4 and 1
between 2 and 3
~' )
110 to 30 11H,
30 to 110 11H
Resistance between 4 a nd 1,
ar;d 2 and 3
0 , 23 Q
95
4
7Z690t.2
Fig. 3 Connection diagram

Pins 2 and 4 should be interconnected .
'~ ) measured with 5000 pF in parallel.
E96
11
11
September 197 4
AT4044/27
3122 138 72390
11
FOUR-POLE ADJUSTING COIL
APPLICATION
T hi s corre cti on coil has been designed for the c ircu itry of the four- pole unit in corpo rated in the deflection unit AT 1080, for eq ualization of line astigmatism (see
a l s o data on AT1080).
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimen sions (mm)
1--- - - - 43max - - - --
-20,1max -
22,5
mox
1
7265970
Fig . 1
The coil is provided with pins for mounting on a printed-wiring board . It can be a djuste d
at the top by m ea ns of a trimming key .
e= 2,54
7Z 69070
Fig . 2 Hol e pattern for mounting on a

printed -wiring board, hole dia 1, 3 + 0, 1 mm
September 1974
E97
--
AT4044/27
FOUR -POLE ADJUSTING CO IL
3122 138 72390
ELECTRICAL DATA
Inductance , measured with 5000 pF in parallel
between 3 and 5
':')
between 4 and 5
'')
33 to 150 jJH
150 to 33 jJH
Resistance at 25 oc
between 1 and 2
between 3 and 4
0 , 23 Q
95 C
0, 18
4
7Z69271
Fig. 3. Connection diagr am
-:--
':') Supplied with core position for L3-5 = Ls - 4 = 11 ,3 jJH 5%.
E98
September 1974
3122 137 127 30
AT4046/27
3122 137 12740
AT4046/28
CONVERGENCE UNITS
APPLICATION
These units are intended to be used with a 90 or llO 0 shadow mask colour picture tube
in conjunction with the deflection unit AT1027/ ..
or AT1060/ ..
or AT1062/ ..
cir A Tl063/ ..
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
21 - , - - max
18,5--..
F'!lOX
--
76 ;;,.; ;
max
Fig.!
,.,.___ ~cfxs -----<~'
7Z65796
Mounting
The housing of the deflection unit AT1027 / .. is so constructed that the convergence units
can easily slide in and then, after they have been properly pushed back, lock.
The units have to be put into the housing with the printed wiring up. To t a ke out the units
the l ocks must be released; this can be done by pushing a screwdriver or the like between
each unit and the housing.
February 1973
~--11 _
E99
--
1--
!:::
AT4046/27
CO:t\TVERGENCE UNITS
AT4046/28
3122 137 12730

3122 137 12740
ELECTRICAL DATA
The units have 4 coils , two for horizontal and two for vertical deflection. They are
mounted on a printed - wiring board. The coils can be connected by soldering to the
printed-wiring pads. The units are provided with a permanent magnet for static con vergence with which a shift of > 20 mm can be obtained on 90 picture tubes, and
> 12 mm on 110 picture tubes .
HH
1
Fig. 2
Series connected line coils

Inducta nce
Resistance
Connecting tags
Tags to be interconnected
AT4046/27
AT4046/28
0,4 mH
2Q
3 and 7
2 and 6
4,9 mH
22 .6 Q
3 and 7
2 and 6
0,1 mH
0,5Q
2 and 3
2 and 7.
3 and 6
1, 2 mH
5,5 Q
2 and 3
2 and 7 ,
3 and 6
1, 44 H
194 Q
1 and 5
4 and 8
1 ,44 H
194 Q
1 and 5
4 and 8
0. 36 H
48,5 Q
1 and 4
1 and 8,
4 and 5
0 . 36 H
48.5 Q
1 and 4
1 and 8,
4 and 5
Parallel connected line coils

Inductance
Resistance
Connecting tags
Series connected field coil s

Inductance
Resistance
Connecting tags
Parallel connected field coils
Inductance
Resistance
Connecting tags
- ' - - -R onn
' September
19 ~
AT4046/32
3122 137 12750
11
CONVERGENCE UNIT
APPLICATION
These units are intended to be used with a 90 or 110 shadow mask colour p icture tube
in conjunction with the deflection unit AT 1027/ ..
or ATi060/ ..
or ATI062/ ..
or ATl06.3/ ..
MECH.ANICAL DATA
Dimensions
(mm~
t T~;,- /t"21 ,4
0,1
,/
"
i
.
---r
/.
-18,5~,
max
+
76
max
Fig. !
--
~.;;
7Z6S797
Mounting
The housing of the deflection unit AT 1027/ . . is so constructed that the convergence units
can easily slide in and then, after they have been properly pushed back, l ock.
The units ha ve to be put into the housing with the printed wiring up. To t ake out the units
the locks must be released; this can be done by pushing a screwdriver or the like between
each unit and the housing.
February 1973
E 101- - - - - - -
!::::
!::::
AT4046/32
CONVERGENCE UNIT
3122 137 12750
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
The unit s have 4 coils , two for horizontal and two for verti cal deflection. They are
mounted on a printed-wiring board . The coil s can be connected by soldering to the
printed-wiring pads . The unit i s provided with a plastic bush B (see F ig. 1) to accomodate the permanent magnet ~, )for rough static ad justment. Fine adjustmen t can be made
with a d . c . current .
HH
1
F ig . 2
Series connected line coils

Inductance
Resistance
Connecting tags
4 , 9 mH
22,6 Q
3 and 7
2 and 6
Parallel connected line coils

Indu ctance
Resistance
Connecting tags
1,2 mH
5, 5 Q
2 and 3
2 and 7 ,
3 and 6
Series connected field coils

Inductance
Resistance
Connecting tags
1, 44 H
194 Q
1 and 5
4 an d 8
Parallel connected field coils

Indu ctance
Resistance
Connecting tags
0, 36 H
48 . 5 Q
1 and 4
1 and 8 ,
4 and 5
~' ) Separ atel y availabl e under catalogue nu.mber 4312 020 70201.
Sept embe r 1974
DLSO
4322 026 95500
11
DELAY LINE
QUICK REFERENCE._D_A_T_A_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--1
For receivers up to European PAL
st~ndard
Nominal frequency
4, 433619 MHz
Phase delay time
63,943 f.!S
Dimensions
71 x 7, 5 x 37 , 5 mm
Self-extinguishing properties
APPLICATION
The DLSO is intended for use in decoder circuits of colour television receivers.
DESCRIPTION
A very thin slab of zero TC g lass provided with two transducers is mounted shock proof
in a housing, that satisfies the flame test described in IEC 50 C (secretariat) 11.
Stx pins enable the unit to be soldered dtrectly into a prmted-'ijirmg board.
~ptember
1976
E 103
_.J
-;:::
--
DLSO
DELAY LINE
'
11
4322 026 95500
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
1.1
71 max - - .--~
*~- Ill
llfI~2
6,6
l max ._
-,45 '
t-
37,5max
26
u ~
1 -r.~5~2 u
I
_J_1
4,6
F ig .1
~-
I ._..
r---
r--
J~L
max
+I
7Z65314.1
Weight
16 g
Mounting:
The unit can be soldered directly into a printed -wiring board .
_ _ _ ___;E
::.,l04
0 2 4 6
Fig . 2.
19 21
oe~ l!ltliltlllllllllllltlt Ill I

1Z 'i'J te7
Recommended hole pattern for mounting on a prif)ted -wiring board.

e = 2, 54 mm. The tolerance on the distances of the different holes to
the 0-line is 0, l mm. Hole diameter is 1, 3 0, 1 mm .
-~~ ~~~~~~ -March
1973
4322 026 95500
DLSO
DELAY LI NE
11
ELECfRICAL DATA
Measured according to the circuit of F ig . 3 at 25 oc and fnom (unless otherwise specified)

Nominal frequency (fnom)
4, 433619 MHz
Phase delay time (T) between V 1

and V 2 (unmodulated sinewave
voltage)
63,943 0, 005 J.lS
Bandwidth at - 3 dB
from~
Insertion lo ss
83dB
Drift of phase delay from + 10 to +60 oc

(re lative to 25 oc)
max . 5 ns, typ. 3 ns
Maximum input voltage (p-p)
15 V
3,43 to?: 5,23 MHz

.
Unwanted reflections,
3T
other reflections
Phase relation .p 4 _3 -.p2 _ 1

Storage temperature range
-2 2 dB with respect to 1 T s ignal

- 30 dB with respect to 1 T s ignal
180
- 40 to +70 oc
Measur ing circuit
V
2
, , L,! ~R2
Vl~~[
Fig.3
::::::::1
::::::::1
Nominal t erminat ions

.R 1, R 2 termination resistance
Cl
total capacitance
390Q
120 pF
Ll
inductive reactance
128 Q
L2
indu ctive reactance
231 Q
Recommended ad ju stment range of the co ils
- 19 to +36%
Maximum capacitance of the coils
20 pF
)eptember 1976
El05
DL51 DL52
DL53 DLSS
11
DELAY LINES
For DESCRIPTION and MECHANICAL DATA see datasheet of type DLSO.
--
March 1973
El07
ITITITI
11
ELECTRICAL DATA ,, measured according to the circuit diagram below at 25 C and at fnom (unless otherwise stated)
til
.....
00
DL51
DL52
DL53
DL55
Catalogue number
4322 026 95510
4322 026 95520
4322 026 95530
4322 026 95550
Application
European
PAL/SECAM
Brazilian
PAL
NTSC
Nominal frequency (fnom>
MHz
4,433619
3,582063
3, 575611
3, 579545
Phase delay time (7) between V 1

and V 2 (unmodulated sinewave
voltage)
63, 929 0, 005
63, 486 0, 005
63, 555 0, 005
jlS
63, 943 0, 005
Bandwidth at -3 dB
MHz
53, 43 to <= 5, 23
52, 7 to <= 4, 4
52, 7 to <= 4, 4
52, 7 to 2: 4, 4
Insertion 1os s .
dB
8 3
8 3
8 3
83
ns
max. 5
typ. 3
max. 5
typ. 3
max. 5
typ . . 3
max. 5
typ . .3
15
15
15
15
3T
dB
5 -22
5-35
Phase relation <1'4-3 -<1'2-1
180
oc
-40 to +70
tll
~ro
g.
ro
'1
.....
"'a-.J
cc
r- rVI VI
VI.._,
t:l
til
t"'
:>
><!
t"'
z
til
tll
Unwanted reflections,
other reflections
VIVI
w-
Type number
Drift of phase delay from

+ 10 to +60 C (relative to 25 oC)
cc
r- r-
::~
measured between 3, 9 and 4, 75 MHz.
"')
-22
- 30
5-22
5-30
5-22
5 -30
180
-40 to +70
-40 to +70
-40 to +70
5
5
g;::
11
Measuring circui ~
t-j
(')
::r
1-'
\()
"""
t'',! ~""
"~
t:J
I:Il
t""'
>
><:
t""'
DL51
DL 52
DL53
I:Il
DL55
en
Nominal termina i ons

\
Rl, R2 termina ion resi stance
390
560
560
560
Cl
total cap ac itance
pF
120
22
22
22
L1
inductiv resi stance
128
337
337
337
L2
inductiv r eactance
231
405
405
405
- 19to+36
- 20 to +33
- 20 to +33
- 20 to +33
20
20
20
20
til
b
'Cl
Recom mended ad just ment range

of the coil s
Maximum capaci :ance of the coil s
CO
. pF
.-
U1 U'l
w-
CO
~.-
U'IU'I
U'l....,;)
IUIIII
DL60
4322 027 846 00
11
DELAY liNE

For receivers up to European PAL standard
No mina l frequency
4,4336 19 MH z
Phase delay time
63,943 flS
Dimensions
37x 7,S x28, Smm
Self- extinguishing properties
APPLICATION
The. DL60 is inte nded for use in decoder circuits of co lou r te levis ion receivers.
DESCRIPTION
A very thin s lab of zero TC glass provided w ith two tra nsducers is shoc k-p ropf mounted
in a housing that satisfies the flame tes t descr ibed in IEC SO C (s ecreta ria t) ll.
Four pins e nable the unit to be s oldered directly onto a printed-wiring board.
September 1976
11~
DL60
4322 027 84600 '
DELAY LINE
11
Dimensions in mm
MECHANICAL DATA
Outlines
, - - - - 3 7 max
ll
-1
28,5max
_j
'?
-1
t _
_,,__
5,5 j5,0
O8 +0,05
0
7,5max
7Z11207.1
E
0
Fig. 1
Mass
7g
Mounting
The unit can be soldered directly onto a printed-wiring board.
Se
t t t tit
Ill
72:11206.1
Fig.2.
Recommended hole pattern for mounting on a printed-wiring board: e = 2, 54 mm. '
The to lera n ce on the distances of the different holes to the 0-line is 0, 1 mm.
Hole diameter is 1, 0 + 0, 1 mm.
September 1976
4322 027 84600
DL60
DELAY LINE
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
Measured with the circuit of Fig. 3 at 25 oc and f0 (unless otherwise specified)
Nominal frequency (f0 )
4, 4.3.3619 MHz
Phase delay time (T)
63, 94.) 0, 005 f!S
Bandwidth at -3 dB
from
Insertion loss
9 3 dB
Drift of phase delay from+ 10 to+ 60 oc

(relative to + 25 oq
max. 5 ns, typ . .3 ns
10 V
Spurious signals
.) 'T s ignals
other signals
:5
Phase relation q> 4 _3 - <Pz-l

- 40 to +70 oc
:5
:5
3,43 to 2:5.23 MHz
-22 dB with respect to 1 'T signal

- 30 dl3 with respect to 1 'T signal
180
R1
V1
--
DL60
Fig. 3.
Terminations
Rl = R2 = 560 Q
Cl=20pF
C2 = 30 pF
Ll = 10,5 jJH
L2= 9,7f!H
September 1976
total capacitance of test jig without delay-line i.e. wiring

capacitance, capacitance of coil and extra trimming capacitor.
Ell3
DL60
4322 027 84600
DELAY LI NE
Application circuit
CHROMA
DEMODULATOR
ss on
~------o----1--,
C1*
DL60
RL
Qz;
I
I
7Z73204
Fig.4
< 30 pF (wiring_capacitance and capacitance of the coil)
Cl, C2
Ll,
nominal values depend on values of C 1 arid C2 to produce the reactances :
Xl
X2
w0 Ll
1-w 0 2 LlC1
W0
L2
l- w0 2 L2C2
= 350 Q
= .150 Q
f 0 = 4, 4336 19 MHz
Maximum bandwidth is obtain'ed at minimum C 1 a nd C2 .

Recommended adjustment range of the coils -19 to +36%.
Rl14
September 1976
NON -PREFER
TYPES
11
RE~
BLUE LATERAL UNITS
Type number
Catalogue number
Picture tube
AT1025/05
3122 107 30020
90
90
AT1066/0l
3 122 107 13750
and 110 o
90
Inductance
series connected
parallel connected
3,2
0,63
Resistance
series connected
parallel connected
36
9
Adjustment range
static (with m agnet)
dynamic
AT1025/08
3122 137 11690
mH
mH
Q
3,2
6,5 mm
3,5 mm
at 350 mA per
coil
0,3
2,.81
mH
6,4
6 ,5 mm
3,5 mm
a t 550 mA per
coil
mH
6,5 mm
3,5 mm
at 300 mA per
c oil
March 1973
----
11
H' 1 1"
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
DEFLECTION UNITS
.--
--
dimensions (mm)
type
, March 1973
amax
bmax
Cmin
AT1027/07
145, 7
172, 3
3 8,2
AT1027/ 09
145 , 7
172, 3
38 , 2
AT1029/ 07
145, 7
172,3
38, 2
AT1029/ 09
145, 7
172,3
38,2
AT1060/ 01
129, 4
203,9
38,2
1<'11'7
1111 fll
I:I:I
......
......
AT1027/07
3122 137 10990
rt>
0'
rt>
'i
......
""'""'
AT1029/09
3122 108 87900
AT1060/0 1
3122 137 10670
2, 95
114
2,95
28
2,95
114
2, 95
28
4,4
25 , 4
Resistance
field deflect i-on co il s
Q
Q
2, 9
56
2, 9
14
2,9
56
2, 9
14
3,4
15
NTC thermistor
Parallel resistor
Q
Q
50
33
6
12
50
33
6
12
E-H-To
kV
25
25
25
25
25
A p-p
A p-p
2, 6
0 , 415
2, 6
0 , 83
2,6
0 , 415
2, 6
o, 83
3, 3
1,2
22 in , 90
26 in , 90
22 in , 90
26 in , 90
19 in, 90
22 in, 90
19 in , 90
22 in, 90
22 in, 110
26 in , 110
lineoutput transformer
AT2053/02
AT2053/02
AT2053/02
AT2053/02
AT2100/04 and
AT2101 / 02
adjustable linearity
control unit
AT4042/12
AT4042/12
AT4042/12
AT4042/12
AT4042/12
AT4045/o
AT4046/o
AT4045/ o
AT4046/o o
AT4045/o o
AT4046/ o o
AT4045/o
AT4046/o o
AT4045/ oo
AT4046/ o o
convergence units
rt> '
AT1029/07
3122 108 87890
mH
mH
o'
To be used with:
picture tube
C/)
AT1027/09
3122 107 31520
Inductance
line deflection co ils
fie ld deflect ion coils
Sensitivity
in horizontal direction
in vertical direction
"g
type number an d catalogue number
'0 0
Z
::;l 0
"'ttm
m"TT
"'m
;g
;g
-m
0
I:I:I
"rl
r-'
I:I:I
...,
()
0
z
c::
z
~
DEFLECTION UNITS
11
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
Terminal location
AT1027/07
AT1027/09
AT1029/07
AT1029/09
7'----__j
Rear view
Diagram
AT1060/0l
1'
2'
3'
4'
5'
ttril1l
Wo-W
5
_,
VE 71801t. P
Rear view
Diagram
H = line coils
V = field coils
eptember 1974
1". 110
'
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
TRANS.DUCTORS
I
I
!
i
l
type
AT 404 1/08
AT404 l /14
AT404 1/15
AT404 1/37
11
11
Jl
11
H-- ---+-- --++- -
b -
----
I~
m ax . dim en s ion s (mm)
32,5
32 , 5
32 , 5
32,5
. 21 , 5
2 1. 5
21,5
2 1 ,5
30 , 2
28
28
30 , 2
catalogue
number
3122
3122
3 122
3122
107
137
137
137
13420
10530
10540
122 10
T heAT404l/08andthe AT 404 1/37 are intende d for use in conjunction with deflection unit
AT1027/ .. or AT1029/ .. , line output transformer AT2053/ . . , pin-cush i on actjustor
AT4040/ . . and a frame output transformer to correct pin-cushion distortion.
T he transductor AT404l/l4 is intended for use in conjunction with the deflection unit
AT1060/- . and in combination with the transductor AT404l/l5, for active E . -W . correcti on .
.__-II ______..;:;.E=
_II _____________
121
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
TRANSDUCTORS
11
Terminal location
Bottom views
AT4041/08
AT4041/37
'{ T'J
-u-
lA
,!,
"
"1111
6
.
I
7
()
E.
Diagrams
""'
11
11
li
'3i
23::iE~ .
3
11
11
11
LJ
n
11
'
AT4041/14
-6
10
1--, - /o
I
.5
8
0
10
0
- - - - 1-0
:jC:
H
'7!1[:
10~'[
I
H
VS71801 G
AT4041 /1 5
2
0
/6
,0
1--- -+--.
1--
I~
I
El22
10
:J:[5
9]1
V 6
9
100
vs 718017
March 1973
NON-PREFERREC
TRANSDUCTORS
TYPES
11
Circuit diagrams for AT4041/08 and AT4041/37
Deflection units with parallel connected frame coils
\lp-p
p-p voltage on
BA
CD
AT4041/08
;'\T4041/ 37
350 V
1400 V
55 V
55 V
De flec t ion units with series connected frame coils

AT4041/
r-----,
~8
v,_,
,'-
--
L _______
_j
p-p voltage on
BA
CD
AT4041/08
AT4041/37
350 V
1400 V
llOV
llOV
Vp-p
- -- - - -
March 1973
- - - - -- -'
E12 3
ON-PREFERRED
TRANSDUCTORS
TYP~S
11
Circuit diagra m for AT4041/14

to E. -W. raster correction
680rl
r-----,
I
2
4
8
po
L_
680rl
AT 4042/12
to spark gap
AT 4041/14
frame coils
Circuit dia gra m for AT4041/15
El24
March 1973
NON-PREFERRE I
TYPES
ADJUSTABLE LINEARITY CONTROL UNITS

AT4042/02 , c atalogue numbe r 3122 108 28239
This unit is intended to be used in black and white, and in co lour TV sets e quipped
with tubes , to a dju st the line arity of the li~ -deflec ti on. In colour TV sets it can
be us ed in combination with deflection unit AT 1027/ .. or AT 1029/ .. and lineoutput transformer AT2050/ .. , AT205 1/ . . or AT2053/.. .
For further information see section "Components for black and white television".
AT4042/ 12 , c atalogue numbe r 3122138 21281
This unit has been designed for use in colour TV sets equipped with a 110 deflection a ngl e colour picture tube , to a dju st the linearity of line defl ection. It c an be
used in combinat ion with the deflection units AT 1060/ .. or AT 1062/ . . .
Dimension s (mm)
/ ~~-,
LJ
j~
1
mo> - -
-~
IS.t..
1'
1 ' - me>
'
'\
\+-+:~~
'- h :-,_
I
18.7
/' . . .
~~ ~. ,
+-+--1-+--J-+--1-t--J-t-+O
-2B.Smax-~
c---r ll 3.2mo-l
mo>
52.2
~t.
r--:::
-t-+-t-t-+H-t-t-1-t- S
Hole pattern for mounting on

a printed- wiring boa rd.
Recommended hole di a meter
1,3 mm.
adj us table
~ p.- magnet
1) Hole only necessa ry for bottofll adjustment.
Sep<emb'" 1974
- ~ ----~---~-~~----~~ ~--
E125
-:-:::
---
ON-PREFERRED
TYPES
ADJUSTABLE LINEARITY CONTROL UN ITS
Electrical data
When a saw -tooth current of a peak-to peak value of 3 . 3 A,
frequency 15625 I-lz, fly -back ratio Hl % ( without S- correction) flows through the linearity control unit ( coils connected in series, one connection point to earth ) , the correction voltage is 27 V.
--
El26
March 1973
NON-PREFERRE~
TYPES
CONVERGENCE UNITS
AT4050/ll
Type number
AT404S/08
AT404S/07
AT4046/07
AT4046/08
Catalogue number 3 12210883 130 312210883140 312210883150 312210883 160 3122107 13220
Picture tube
90o and uoo
900 and 1100
900 and 1100
900 and 1100
ll0
Line c oils ,
series connected
inductance
res istance
0,4 mH
2,5 Q
4 , 8 mH
22 , 6 Q
0,43 mH
2,5 Q
5,2 mH
22 , 6 Q
0 , 155 mH
l Q
parallel connected
inductance
0 , 1 mH
0,6 Q
res istance
1, 2 mH
5, 7 Q
0 , ll mH
0,6 Q
1, 3 mH
5, 7 Q
Field coils ,
series connected
inductance
resistance
1, 40 H
155 Q
1, 40 H
15 5 Q
1, 48 H
194 Q
1 , 52 H
194 Q
parallel connected
inductance
0 , 35 H
39 Q
resistance
0,3S 'H
39 Q
0, -37 H
49 Q
0, 38 H
49 Q
Static coils .
series c onn ected
inductance
res istanc e
Static adjustment
0 , 66 H
125 Q
--
-60 mH
34 Q
d. c. through
frame c oils
d. c . through
fr ame coils
with
m agnet
with
m agnet
d. c. through
static coils
September 1974
'
11
R 1? 7
Contents
page
DATA HANDBOOK SYSTEM

F.M . TUNERS
F. M. tune r s
AP2157/0l
AP2158
FDl
FDlA
A3
All
Al9
Al9
LOUDSPEAKERS
Survey
Introducti on
Loudspeaker types
AD0140/T.
AD0162/T.
AD0199/Z25
AD02l0/Sq .
AD2070/Z .
AD207l/T.
AD227l/T.
AD2090/T.
AD2290/T .
AD2099/Z25
AD3070/Y .
AD3370/Y.
AD3590/X .
AQ3880/X.
AD3890/X .
AD4070/Y.
AD4470/Y.
AD4080/X.
AD4480/X.
AD4085/X.
AD4485/X .
AD4090/X.
AD448l/X4
AD4681/M.
AD468l/X.
AD4682/X.
AD4691/M .
AD469l/X.
AD4692(X.
AD4890/X.
AD5060/Sq .
AD506l/M .
B2
BS
Bl7
B21
B25
B29
B33
B37
B43
B49
B53
B57
B6l
B65
B69
B73
B77
B8l
B85
B89
B93
B97
BlOl
BlOS
Bl09
Bll3
Bll7
Bl 2l
page
Loudspeaker types .
AD5061/ Sq.
AD5081/M .
AD5081/X .
AD5780/M.
AD57il0/X.
AD5790/M .
AD5790/X.
AD6980/M.
AD6980/X .
AD7060/W.
AD7062/M.
AD7063/M.
AD7066/MFI3
AD7066/W .
AD7080/M .
AD7080/X .
AD7091/M .
AD709 1/X. ,
ADSOOO
AD8061/W.
AD8066/W .
AD8067/MF13
AD8067/W.
AD8081/M.
AD8081/X.
97 10/MC
AD1065/M.
ADJ065/W.
AD10100/W.
AD 1265/M .
ADI265/W .
ADJ2l00/HP.
ADJ2 100/M.
AD12 100/W .
!3125
13 129
!3133
13 137
13141
13145
13149
!315:3
13157
13161
13165
13 169
13173
13179
13 18:3
!3187
13 19 1
13195
13 199
13201
13205
13209
13215
13219
B22.'l
13227
132:3 1
132:3 5
132.19
1324.1
13247
13251
13255
13259
Cross-over networks
ADP 1600
ADF2400
ADF500/4500
13265
13267
13269
13272
Recommended l oudspeake r combinations
TELEVISION TUNERS AND AERIAL INPUT ASSEMBLIES

T elevision tuners
ELC 1042/05
ELC 1043/05
ELC1043/06
ELC2000
ELC2060
ELC2070
ELC.3082
ea
C 17
C29
C:ll
C49
C67
C8 1
page
Television tuners
12ET5632}
12ET5732 genera l
C9:l
C97
Cl03
Coaxia l aerial input assembli es
12ET5632/ 03
l2ET5732/03
3122 127 10260
.'3122 1.27 10450
:3 122 127 14730
Cl09
COMPONENTS FOR BLACK AND WHITE TELEVISION
Survey
Deflection units
Line output transformers
Frame output rran s formers

Adjustable linearity control unit s
AT1040/l5
AT1071/0l
ATl074
AT2048/12
AT2J02/0l
AT2 140
AT:35 15
AT40%
AT4042/14
AT404.3/87
Line driver tran s former

Non prefe rre d types. deflecti on units
line output tran sfor mers
lin earity control units
e. h. t. sockets for tube DY802
02
05
011
015
021
027
033
0.19
D45
D49
D5l
053
D59
065
067
COMPONENTS FOR COLOUR TELEVISION
Survey
Deflection units
llluc latera l units
Deflection unit
Multi-pol e unit
Deflection units
Line ou tput transformers
Convergence adjuster::;
Correction coi l s
Transductor
Adjustable linea rit y control units
Filtering co il
Class- D filter choke
Bridge coils
AT1062/01
ATI06:3/0l
ATI068/03
ATl068/04
ATJOSO
AT J0 8l
AT1083/0l
ATJ085
AT2063/00
AT2076/ 10
AT2080/ IO
AT4040/ ..
AT4040/ ..
AT404l / 40
AT4042/08
AT4042/17
AT4042/38
AT404.3 /l5
AT4043/35
AT4043/38
AT4043 /8 6
E2
E5
ElI
E IS
E 17
E I9
E25
E3 1
E:l7
E43
E49
E55
E6l
E65
E69
E73
E75
E:77
E79
ESJ
E85
E87
page
Line driver. transformer
Line centring choke
E/W loading coil
Line balance coil
Four- pole adjusting coil
Convergence units
Delay lines
AT4043/87
AT4043/88
AT4044/20
AT4044/26
AT4044/27
AT4046/27
AT4046/28
AT4046/32
DLSO
DL51/DL52/DL53/DL55
DL60
Non preferred types, blue lateral units

deflection units
transductors
adjustable linearity control units
convergence units
E89
E91
E93
E95
E97
E99
E99
El01
El03
El07
Elll
EllS
Ell7
El21
El25
El27
'
.--.
- B
--- c
--c::
=
-:
!--=
-!:
t::
FM
tuners
Loudspeakers
Television tuners and aerial input as~emblies
Components for black and white television

Contents
'
Argentina: i'APESA l.y.C., Av. Crovara 2550, Tablada, Prov. de BUENOS AIRES, Tel. 652-7438 / 7478.
Australia: PHI LIPS INDUSTRIES HOLDINGS LTD., Elcoma Division, 67 Mars Road, LANE COVE , 2066, N.S.W., Tel. 421261.
Austria: 0STERREICHISCHE PHI LIPS BAUELEMENTE lndustrie G.m.b.H., Triester Str. 64, A-11 01 WIEN, Tel. 62 91 11.
Belgium: M.B.L.E., 80, rue des Deux G~res , B-1 070 BRUXELLES, Tel523 00 00.
Brazil: IBRAPE, Caixa Postal7383, Av. Paulista 2073-S / Loja, SAO PAULO, SP, Tel. 287-7144.
Canada: PHILIPS ELECTRONICS LTD., Electron Devices Div. , 601 Milner Ave., SCARBOROUGH , Ontario, M1 B 1MS, Tel. 292-5161 .
Chile: PHI LIPS CHILENA S.A., Av. Santa Maria 0760, SANTIAGO, Tel. 39-40 01 .
Colombia: SADAPE S.A. , P.O. Box 9805 Calle 13, No. 51+ 39, BOGOTA D.E. 1., Tel. 600600.
Denmark: MINIWATI A / S, Emdrupvej 115A, DK-2400 K0BENHAVN NV., Tel. (01 ) 6916 22.
Finland: OY PHI LIPS AB , Elcoma Divis ion , Kaivokatu 8, SF-001 00 HELSINKI1 0, Tel. 1 72 71.
France: R.T.C. LA RADIOTECHNIOUE-COMPELEC, 130.Avenue Ledru Rollin, F-75540 PARIS 11 , Tel. 355-44-99.
Germany: VALVO, UB Bauelemente der Philips G.m.b.H., Valvo Haus. Burchardstrasse 19, D-2 HAMBURG 1, Tel. (040) 3296-1 .
Greece: PHILIPS S.A. HELLENIQUE , Elcoma Division , 52, Av. Syngrou, ATHENS , Tel. 915 311.
Hong Kong: PHILIPS HONG KONG LTD., Comp. Dept. , Philips lnd . Bldg ., Kung Yip St. , K.C.T.L. 289, KWAI SHUNG , N.T. Tel.12-245121 .
India: PHI LIPS INDIA LTD., Elcoma Div., Band Box House, 254-D, Dr. Annie Besant Rd., Prabhadevi, BOMBAY-25-DD , Tel. 457 311-5.
Indonesia: P.T. PHILIPS-RALIN ELECTRONICS, Elcoma Division , 'Timah ' Building, Jl. Jen . Gatot Subroto, JAKARTA, Tel. 44163 .
Ireland: PHILIPS ELECTRICAL (IRELAND) LTD., Newst ead , Clonskeagh, DUBLIN 14, Tel. 69 33 55.
Italy: PHI LIPS S.P.A., Selione Elcoma , Piazza IV Novembre 3, 1-20124 MILANO, Te l. 2-6994 .
Japan: NIHON PHI LIPS CORP., Shuwa Shinagawa Bldg., 26-33 Takanawa 3-chome, Minato-ku, TOKYO (108), Tel. 448-5611 .
(IC Products) SIG NETICS JAPAN , LTO., TOKYO , Tel. (03) 230-1521 .
Korea: PHILIPS ELECTRONICS (KOREA) LTD. , Philips House. 260-1991taewon-dong , Yongsan-ku , C.P.O. Box 3680, SEOUl:, Tel. 44-4202.
Mexico: ELECTRONICA S.A. de C. V. , Varsovia No. 36, MEXICO 6, D.F., Tel. 5: 33-11 -80.
Netherlands: PHI LIPS NEDERLAND B.V., Aid . Elonc< , Boschdijk525, NL-4510 EINDHOVEN ,Tel. (040) 79 33 33 .
New Zealand: Philips Electricallnd . Ltd., Elcoma Divi"ion , 70-72 Kingsford Smith Street, WELLINGTON, Tel. 873156.
Norway: ELECTRONICA A / S., Vitam inveien 11 , P.O. t) ox 29, Grefsen, OSLO 4, Tel. (02) 15 OS 90.
Peru: CADESA, Jr. llo, No. 216, Apartado 10132, LIMI , Tel. 27 7317 .
Philippines: ELDAC, Phi lips Industrial Dev.lnc., 2246 Pasong Tame, MAKATI-RIZAL, Tel. 86-89-51 to59 .
Portugal: PHI LIPS PORTUGESA S.A.R.L. , Av. En g. Duharte Pacheco 6, LISBOA 1, Tel. 68 31 21 .
Singapore: PHILIPS SINGAPORE PTE LTD ., Elcoma Div., POB 340, ToaPayoh CPO, Lorong 1, Toa Payoh , SINGAPORE 12, Tel. 53 8811 .
South Africa: EDAC (Pty.) Ltd., South Park Lane, New Doornfontein, JOHANNESBURG 2001 , Tel. 24 / 6701 .
Spai n: COPRESA S.A., Balmes 22, BARCELONA 7, Tel. 301 63 12.
Sweden: A.B. ELCOMA, Lidingovageo '0, S-1 0250 STOCKHOLM 27, Tel. 08 / 67 97 80.
SWitzerland: PHI LIPS A. G., Elcoma Dept. , Edenstrasse
CH-8027 ZORICH , Te l. 01 / 44 2211 .
Ta iwan: PHI LIPS TAIWAN LTD. , 3rd Fl .. San Min Building , 57-1 , Chung Shan N. Rd , Section 2, P.O. Box 22978, TAIPEI, Tel. 5513101 -5.
Turkey: TORK PHI LIPS TICARET A.S., EMET Department, Giimiissuyu Cad. 78-80, Beyoglu, ISTANBUL, Tel. 45 32 50.
United Kingdom : MULLARD LTD., Mullard House, Torrington Place, LONDON WC1 E 7HD, Te l. 01-580 6633.
United States: (Active devices & Materials) AMPERE X SALES CORP., 230, Duffy Avenue , Hl CKSVILLE, N.Y. 11802,1el. (516) 931-6200.
(Passive devices) MEPCO / ELECTRA INC ., Columbia Rd., MORRISTOWN , N.J. 07960, Tel. (201) 539-2000.
(IC Products) SIGN ETICS CORPORATION , 811 East ArquesAvenue , SUNNYVALE , California 94086, Tel. (408) 739-7700.
Uruguay: LUZILECTRON S.A., Rondeau 1567, pi so 5, MONTEVIDEO , Tel. 9 43 21 .
Venezuela: IN D. VENEZOLANAS PHI LIPS S.A. , Elcoma Dept., A. Ppal de Ios Ruices, Edit. Centra Colgate, Apdoo1167, CARACAS , Tel. 36 0511 .
2o,
N.V. Ph ili p~ Gloeilampenfabrieken
Printed in The Netherlands
9399 261 27001

Component and Materials Part 3 Januari 1977

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Component and Materials Part 3 Januari 1977

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Components and

COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS

Television tuners and aerial input assemblies

Components for black and white television

Components for colour television

FOR " FERRITES FOR RADIO, AUDIO AND TELEVISIO~I"

DATA HANDBOOK SYSTEM

ELECTRON TUBES (BLUE SERIES) '

Transmitting tubes for communication

Transmitting tubes for communication

Microwave produ cts

Special Quality tubes;

Camera tubes; Image intensifier tubes

Products for nuclear technology

Channel e lectron multipliers

Voltage st a bilizing and reference tubes

SEMICONDUCTORS AND INTEGRATED CIRCUITS (RED SERIES}

Small signal germanium diodes

Rectifier diodes, thyristors, triacs

Voltage r egulat or d iodes (< 1, 5 W)

High -frequency .and switching transistors

Transmitting tran s istors

Dual tran sistor s

Devices for optoelectronics

Photosen sitive diodes and tran sistors

Professional analogue integrated circuits

N. B. Cons umer circuits will be issued in par t 5b

Digital integrated ci rcuits

l\l nuco rn h.coT" 10 7{..

COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS (GREEN SERIES)

Functional units, Input/output devices,

Electric motors and accessories

Ferrite core memory products

Small synchronous motors

Piezoelectric ceramics, Permanent magnet materials

Ferroxcube memory cores

Ceramic capac itors

Radio, Aullio, Television

Circuit blocks 90-Series

Variable mains transformers

Piezoelectric quartz devices

Core memory systems

QUICK REFERENCE DATA

.1 122 137 152 30

- - - - - - - 87,5max - - - - - - - i.f. injection

Note: The left a nd right sides are ide ntical.

3122 137 152 30

Ambient temperature range

Supply voltage (d. c.)

Current drawn from+ 15V supply

Tuning voltage range

87,5 to 108 MHz

I. F. ban dw icith ( 3 dB)

Input impedance. asymmetr ica l

Padding deviat ion

3122 ].)7 15230

Repeat spot suppression (RSS) 1)

Double beat suppression (DBS) 2)

Cont in uous heat suppression (CBS) :l)

Shift of oscillator frequency

at a change of the amb ient temperature

:s 5 kH z;oc; typ. 2.5 kH z/C

after resistance to moistur e tes t

:s 1250 kH z ; typ. 600kHz